Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 694

GENERAL INDEX

GENERAL INDEX.....................................................................................................................1

PRELIMINARY INFORMATION ........................................................................................... 31


INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................31
Contents of handbook.......................................................................................................................31
Conventions used in this handbook..................................................................................................31
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS .........................................................................................................31
Hardware Platform ............................................................................................................................31
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................................................32
Local Controller for Unix Operating System .....................................................................................32
Local Controller for Windows NT Operating System .......................................................................33
Local Controller for Windows 2000 Operating System ....................................................................33
Year 2000..........................................................................................................................................33
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION OF THE PC TO THE EQUIPMENT ......................................33
Personal Computer Installation.........................................................................................................33
INSTALLATION OF SOFTWARE PLATFORM..................................................................................33
Unix Operating System with OSF/MOTIF ........................................................................................33
Retix LT610.......................................................................................................................................34
Windows NT / 2000 Operating System ............................................................................................34
X-NutCracker ....................................................................................................................................34
INSTALLATION OF LOCAL CONTROLLER......................................................................................35
Local Controller for SCO/Unix ..........................................................................................................35
Users and Directories .......................................................................................................................35
Installation Procedure for SCO/Unix.................................................................................................36
Local Controller for Windows NT / 2000...........................................................................................40
Installation Procedure for Windows NT / 2000.................................................................................41
Customizing the LC Configuration for SCO/Unix Version................................................................46
Customizing the LC Configuration for Windows NT / 2000 Version ................................................47
Connect the Personal Computer to the Equipment .........................................................................49
Connect Personal Computer to a Printer .........................................................................................53

USERS INTERFACE ............................................................................................................ 54


WORKING AREA ................................................................................................................................54
How to Move a Window in the Working Area...................................................................................55
How to Move a Window to the Front ................................................................................................57
Menu Selection .................................................................................................................................58
Information Boxes .............................................................................................................................59
DIALOG BOXES..................................................................................................................................60

STARTING LOCAL CONTROLLER .................................................................................... 63

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

SCO/UNIX VERSION ..........................................................................................................................63


WINDOWS NT / 2000 VERSION ........................................................................................................64
LOCAL CONTROLLER MAIN WINDOW ...........................................................................................67
Initial Printer Selection ......................................................................................................................68
Initial Printer Setup............................................................................................................................68
NEs Domain Management ...............................................................................................................69
Control Session Activation................................................................................................................71
SHUTTING DOWN THE COMPUTER ...............................................................................................73
SCO UNIX Shut Down Procedure....................................................................................................73
Windows NT / 2000 Shut Down Procedure......................................................................................73

DXC MAIN MENU.................................................................................................................. 74


GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................................................................................74
Operational Feature ..........................................................................................................................75
DXC Messages .................................................................................................................................75
Alarm Summary Indication................................................................................................................76
Signallers...........................................................................................................................................76
Other Indications ...............................................................................................................................78

MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION ....................................................................... 79


PRINTER: SELECTION ......................................................................................................................79
NE MODEL: SELECTION ...................................................................................................................79
NE MODEL: DEFINING LOCATION AND ALARM INTERFACE ......................................................80
Rack Visual Indications.....................................................................................................................81
CONTROL AND TIMING SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING.................................................................82
Control and Timing Subrack: equipping ...........................................................................................83
Control and Timing Subrack: displaying operational state...............................................................84
Control and Timing Subrack: modifying unit configuration...............................................................84
Control and Timing Subrack: removing a unit ..................................................................................84
Control and Timing Subrack: displaying inventory data...................................................................84
Control and Timing Subrack: displaying software version ...............................................................84
Input Ground Contacts: configuring..................................................................................................85
Output Ground Contacts: configuring...............................................................................................86
Output Ground Contacts: switching..................................................................................................87
Ground Contacts: reading state........................................................................................................87
MATRIX SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING (DXC 4/1) ..........................................................................88
Matrix Subrack: equipping unit (DXC 4/1) ........................................................................................88
Matrix Subrack: displaying information (DXC 4/1) ...........................................................................89
Matrix Subrack: modifying configuration (DXC 4/1) .........................................................................90
Matrix Subrack: decommissioning (DXC 4/1) ..................................................................................90
Matrix Subrack: displaying free accesses (DXC 4/1) .......................................................................90
Matrix Subrack: displaying accesses status (DXC 4/1) ...................................................................90
Matrix Subrack: displaying traffic information (DXC 4/1)..................................................................91
Matrix Subrack: displaying inventory data (DXC 4/1).......................................................................91

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 2 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

Matrix Subrack: displaying software details (DXC 4/1) ....................................................................91


TYPE 2 SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING .............................................................................................92
Type 2 Subrack: equipping ...............................................................................................................92
Type 2 Subrack: displaying information............................................................................................93
Type 2 Subrack: modifying configuration .........................................................................................94
Type 2 Subrack: decommissioning ..................................................................................................94
Type 2 Subrack: displaying matrix accesses map ...........................................................................94
Type 2 Subrack: displaying inventory data.......................................................................................95
Type 2 Subrack: displaying software details ....................................................................................95
TYPE 3 SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING .............................................................................................96
Type 3 Subrack: equipping ...............................................................................................................96
Type 3 Subrack: displaying information............................................................................................98
Type 3 Subrack: modifying configuration .........................................................................................98
Type 3 Subrack: decommissioning ..................................................................................................99
Type 3 Subrack: displaying inventory data.......................................................................................99
Type 3 Subrack: displaying software details ....................................................................................99
TYPE 4 SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING ...........................................................................................100
Type 4 Subrack: equipping .............................................................................................................100
Type 4 Subrack: displaying information..........................................................................................101
Type 4 Subrack: modifying configuration .......................................................................................102
Type 4 Subrack: decommissioning ................................................................................................102
Type 4 Subrack: displaying matrix accesses map .........................................................................102
Type 4 Subrack: displaying inventory data.....................................................................................103
Type 4 Subrack: displaying software details ..................................................................................103
TYPE 5 SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING ...........................................................................................104
Type 5 Subrack: equipping .............................................................................................................104
Type 5 Subrack: displaying information..........................................................................................106
Type 5 Subrack: modifying configuration .......................................................................................106
Type 5 Subrack: decommissioning ................................................................................................106
Type 5 Subrack: displaying inventory data.....................................................................................107
Type 5 Subrack: displaying software details ..................................................................................107
TYPE 6 SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING ...........................................................................................108
Type 6 Subrack: equipping .............................................................................................................108
Type 6 Subrack: displaying information..........................................................................................112
Type 6 Subrack: modifying configuration .......................................................................................112
Type 6 Subrack: decommissioning ................................................................................................113
Type 6 Subrack: displaying inventory data.....................................................................................113
Type 6 Subrack: displaying software details ..................................................................................113
TYPE 6E SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING.........................................................................................115
Type 6E Subrack: equipping...........................................................................................................115
Type 6E Subrack: displaying information .......................................................................................120
Type 6E Subrack: modifying configuration.....................................................................................120
Type 6E Subrack: decommissioning ..............................................................................................121
Type 6E Subrack: displaying inventory data ..................................................................................121

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 3 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

Type 6E Subrack: displaying software details................................................................................121


TYPE 7 SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING ...........................................................................................122
Type 7 Subrack: equipping .............................................................................................................122
Type 7 Subrack: displaying information..........................................................................................126
Type 7 Subrack: modifying configuration .......................................................................................126
Type 7 Subrack: decommissioning ................................................................................................126
Type 7 Subrack: displaying inventory data.....................................................................................127
Type 7 Subrack: displaying software details ..................................................................................127
TYPE 7E SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING.........................................................................................128
Type 7E Subrack: equipping...........................................................................................................128
Type 7E Subrack: displaying information .......................................................................................133
Type 7E Subrack: modifying configuration.....................................................................................133
Type 7E Subrack: decommissioning ..............................................................................................134
Type 7E Subrack: displaying inventory data ..................................................................................134
Type 7E Subrack: displaying software details................................................................................134
BOOSTER SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING......................................................................................135
Booster Subrack: equipping............................................................................................................135
Booster Subrack: displaying information ........................................................................................136
Booster Subrack: modifying configuration......................................................................................136
Booster Subrack: decommissioning ...............................................................................................136
Booster Subrack: displaying inventory data ...................................................................................137
Booster Subrack: displaying software details.................................................................................137
UNIT: COMMISSIONING ..................................................................................................................137
Unit: equipping (DXC 4/1) ...............................................................................................................137
Auxiliary Unit: equipping .................................................................................................................144
Unit: displaying information.............................................................................................................144
Unit: modifying configuration...........................................................................................................144
Unit: decommissioning....................................................................................................................145
Unit: resetting ..................................................................................................................................145
PORT: CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................146
Port: configuring operational parameter .........................................................................................147
Port: displaying operational parameters .........................................................................................172
Port: modifying operational parameters..........................................................................................172
Port: removing configuration...........................................................................................................172
2Mbit/s Port: configuring global parameters...................................................................................173
2Mbit/s Port: displaying global parameters.....................................................................................174
2Mbit/s Type 2 Port: configuring global parameters.......................................................................174
2Mbit/s Type 2 Port: displaying global parameters ........................................................................175
34Mbit/s Port: configuring global parameters.................................................................................176
34Mbit/s Port: displaying global parameters ..................................................................................176
34Mbit/s T-Mux Port: selecting the channel to discard ..................................................................177
140Mbit/s T-Mux Port: configuring the VC-12 POH .......................................................................177
140Mbit/s T-Mux Port: displaying the VC-12 POH.........................................................................178
4x34Mbit/s Videocodec Port: configuring global parameters.........................................................178

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 4 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

4x34Mbit/s Videocodec Port: displaying global parameters ..........................................................179


2Mbit/s Port: configuring the G703/G704 frame characteristics ....................................................179
2Mbit/s Port: displaying the G703/G704 frame characteristics......................................................180
1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Port: setting the VC-12 parameter....................................................................180
1x45 T-Mux Mbit/s Port: displaying the VC-12 parameter .............................................................181
STM-1 Port: setting HPOM alarm suppression state .....................................................................182
STM-1 Type 2 Port: setting C2 mismatch detection state..............................................................182
34/45Mbit/s, 140Mbit/s, STM-N and NxSTM-1 Ports: displaying the SOH bytes status...............182
STM-N and 2xSTM-1 Ports: managing the optical parameters.....................................................182
STM-N Port: configuring VC-4 operational parameter ...................................................................184
LPOM Ports: configuring LO VC operational parameter (DXC 4/1) ..............................................187
LPOM Ports: displaying LO VC operational parameter .................................................................191
STM-N Port: configuring frame and supervisory unequipped state...............................................192
AU Group Definition ........................................................................................................................195
SONET STS-1 Setup......................................................................................................................199
Port Mode Setup .............................................................................................................................203

SYNCHRONIZATION.......................................................................................................... 204
SYNCHRONIZATION: DISPLAYING INFORMATION.....................................................................204
SYNCHRONIZATION: DEFINING A PORT SUBRACK AS SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE.......206
Synchronization: defining a port as synchronization source ..........................................................206
Synchronization: displaying port parameters .................................................................................208
Synchronization: removing a synchronization port.........................................................................209
SYNCHRONIZATION: DEFINING PRIORITY TABLE FOR THE MAIN OSCILLATOR.................209
SYNCHRONIZATION: DEFINING PRIORITY TABLE FOR SECONDARY OSCILLATOR ...........211
SYNCHRONIZATION: CONFIGURING MODE ...............................................................................212
SYNCHRONIZATION: SWITCHING SYSTEM SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE ..........................215
SYNCHRONIZATION: SWITCHING EXTERNAL OUTPUT SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE......216
SYNCHRONIZATION: CALIBRATING THE TIMING SELECTOR OSCILLATOR UNIT................217
SYNCHRONIZATION: SELECTING THE TIMING SIGNAL ON TEST POINT OF TS...................218
SYNCHRONIZATION: SETTING PLL CUT FREQUENCY .............................................................219
SYNCHRONIZATION: RESTORING OOF SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE.................................220

PROTECTION AND TEST .................................................................................................. 221


CT SUBRACK PROTECTION: DISPLAYING UNIT STATE............................................................221
CT SUBRACK PROTECTION: SWITCHING ...................................................................................222
CT SUBRACK PROTECTION: DISPLAYING SIO LINE STATE.....................................................223
MATRIX SUBRACK PROTECTION: DISPLAYING .........................................................................223
MATRIX SUBRACK PROTECTION: SWITCHING ..........................................................................223
PORT SUBRACK PROTECTION: SELECTION ..............................................................................224
Port Controller Protection: displaying .............................................................................................224
Port Controller Protection: switching...............................................................................................224
Multiplexing Section Protection: configuring...................................................................................225
Multiplexing Section Protection: displaying ....................................................................................233

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 5 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

Multiplexing Section Protection: removing......................................................................................233


Multiplexing Section Protection: modifying .....................................................................................233
Multiplexing Section Protection: switching......................................................................................234
NxSTM-1 Unit Protection: configuring ............................................................................................235
NxSTM-1 Unit Protection: displaying information...........................................................................235
NxSTM-1 Unit Protection: removing ...............................................................................................235
NxSTM-1 Unit Protection: switching ...............................................................................................236
63x2Mbit/s Unit Protection: configuring ..........................................................................................237
63x2Mbit/s Unit Protection: displaying information.........................................................................237
63x2Mbit/s Unit Protection: removing.............................................................................................237
63x2Mbit/s Unit Protection: switching.............................................................................................238
4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: configuring...............................................................................238
4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: displaying information .............................................................238
4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: removing .................................................................................239
4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: switching .................................................................................239
1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: configuring...............................................................................239
1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: displaying information .............................................................240
1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: removing .................................................................................240
1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: switching .................................................................................240
2Mbit/s Unit Protection: configuring ................................................................................................241
2Mbit/s Unit Protection: displaying information...............................................................................241
2Mbit/s Unit Protection: removing...................................................................................................242
2Mbit/s Unit Protection: switching...................................................................................................242
4x34Mb/s Videocodec Unit Protection: configuring........................................................................243
4x34Mb/s Videocodec Unit Protection: displaying information ......................................................243
4x34Mb/s Videocodec Unit Protection: removing ..........................................................................243
4x34Mb/s Videocodec Unit Protection: switching ..........................................................................244
3x34-45Mbit/s Unit Protection: configuring.....................................................................................244
3x34-45Mbit/s Unit Protection: displaying information ...................................................................245
3x34-45Mbit/s Unit Protection: removing........................................................................................245
3x34-45Mbit/s Unit Protection: switching........................................................................................246
3x34-45Mbit/s Line Protection: configuring ....................................................................................247
3x34-45Mbit/s Line Protection: displaying information...................................................................248
3x34-45Mbit/s Line Protection: removing .......................................................................................248
3x34-45Mbit/s Line Protection: switching .......................................................................................249
140Mbit/s Line Protection: configuring ...........................................................................................250
140Mbit/s Line Protection: displaying information ..........................................................................250
140Mbit/s Line Protection: removing ..............................................................................................250
140Mbit/s Line Protection: switching ..............................................................................................251
140Mb T-Mux Line Protection: configuring.....................................................................................251
140Mbit/s T-Mux Line Protection: displaying information...............................................................252
140Mbit/s T-Mux Line Protection: removing...................................................................................252
140Mbit/s T-Mux Line Protection: switching...................................................................................252
DXC TYPE THREE PROTECTION: SELECTION ...........................................................................253

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 6 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

DXC Type Three Protection: configuring........................................................................................254


DXC Type Three Protection: displaying information ......................................................................256
DXC Type Three Protection: modifying..........................................................................................256
DXC Type Three Protection: switching ..........................................................................................257
DXC Type Three Protection: removing ..........................................................................................258
DXC Type Three Protection: swapping role...................................................................................258
PROTECTIONS LIST: FILTER .........................................................................................................259
Protections List: reading .................................................................................................................259
PORT SUBRACK PROTECTION: SETTING THE WTR PERIOD..................................................259
HOLD OFF: MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................................260
PORT LOOPBACKS: MANAGING ...................................................................................................261
Loopbacks: configuring the mapping state.....................................................................................261
Loopbacks: displaying the mapping state ......................................................................................261
2Mbit/s Port Loopback: configuring ................................................................................................262
2Mbit/s Port Loopback: displaying state.........................................................................................262
63x2Mbit/s Unit Port Loopback: configuring...................................................................................263
63x2Mbit/s Unit Port Loopback: displaying state............................................................................264
4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Port Loopback: configuring .......................................................................264
4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Port Loopback: displaying state ................................................................265
NxSTM-1 Port Loopback: configuring ............................................................................................265
NxSTM-1 Port Loopback: displaying state .....................................................................................266
STM-N Port Loopback: configuring ................................................................................................266
STM-N Port Loopback: displaying state .........................................................................................267
140Mbit/s Port Loopback: configuring ............................................................................................267
140Mbit/s Port Loopback: displaying state.....................................................................................268
140Mbit/s T-Mux Port Loopback: configuring.................................................................................268
140Mbit/s T-Mux Port Loopback: displaying state .........................................................................268
1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Port Loopback: configuring...............................................................................269
1x45 Mbit/s T-Mux Port Loopback: displaying state.......................................................................269
1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Port Loopback: channel configuration ..............................................................270
1x45 Mbit/s T-Mux Port Loopback: displaying channel state.........................................................271
34/45 Mbit/s Port Loopback: configuring ........................................................................................271
34/45 Mbit/s Port Loopback: displaying state.................................................................................272
Loopback: displaying ......................................................................................................................272
TEST STATE: MANAGEMENT.........................................................................................................273
WIRING TEST: EXECUTION............................................................................................................273
Wiring Test: displaying information.................................................................................................274
MATRIX SUBRACK TEST: ACTIVATING (DXC 4/1).......................................................................276
Matrix Subrack Test: displaying information (DXC 4/1) .................................................................277
PORT/MATRIX SUBRACK LINK TEST: ACTIVATION (DXC 4/1) ..................................................277
Port/Matrix Subrack Link Test: displaying information (DXC 4/1)..................................................278
DATABASE TEST: ACTIVATION .....................................................................................................279
CCU FAULT HISTORY BUFFER: DISPLAYING .............................................................................279
CCU STATE: CONFIGURING ..........................................................................................................280

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 7 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

MANAGING CROSS-CONNECTIONS .............................................................................. 281


CROSS-CONNECTIONS: MANAGEMENT (DXC 4/1)....................................................................281
Concatenated Traffic Type .............................................................................................................282
Cross-Connection: configuring (DXC 4/1) ......................................................................................284
Cross-Connection: displaying information (DXC 4/1).....................................................................285
Cross-Connection: removing (DXC 4/1).........................................................................................285
Broadcast Cross-Connection: adding a leg (DXC 4/1) ..................................................................286
Broadcast Cross-Connection: removing a leg (DXC 4/1) ..............................................................287
Monitor Cross-Connection: adding (DXC 4/1)................................................................................287
Monitor Cross-Connection: displaying information (DXC 4/1) .......................................................288
Monitor Cross-Connection: removing (DXC 4/1)............................................................................289
Cross-Connection: managing the administrative state (DXC 4/1) .................................................289
Cross Connections: restoration (DXC 4/1) .....................................................................................290
Cross-Connection: forced deletion (DXC 4/1) ................................................................................292
Cross-Connection: displaying the port/matrix fail alarms (DXC 4/1)..............................................292
CROSS-CONNECTION: MANAGING LIST FILTERS (DXC 4/1)....................................................293
Cross-Connection: displaying list (DXC 4/1) ..................................................................................293
SNC PROTECTION: MANAGING (DXC 4/1) ...................................................................................293
SNC Protection: configuring (DXC 4/1) ..........................................................................................294
SNC Protection: displaying information (DXC 4/1).........................................................................295
SNC Protection: modifying (DXC 4/1) ............................................................................................296
SNC Protection: removing (DXC 4/1).............................................................................................296
SNC Protection: switching (DXC 4/1) .............................................................................................296
SNC Protection: setting the WTR period (DXC 4/1).......................................................................298
SNC Protection: swapping role (DXC 4/1) .....................................................................................298
SPLIT CROSS-CONNECTION: MANAGING (DXC 4/1) .................................................................300
Split Cross-Connection: configuring accesses (DXC 4/1)..............................................................300
Split Cross-Connection: displaying a list of accesses (DXC 4/1)...................................................302
Split Cross-Connection: removing an access (DXC 4/1) ...............................................................302
UNIDIRECTIONAL DROPPED CONNECTIONS: MANAGING (DXC 4/1) .....................................302
Unidirectional Dropped Connection: configuring (DXC 4/1)...........................................................302
Unidirectional Dropped Connection: selecting the drop leg channel (DXC 4/1)............................303
Unidirectional Dropped Connection: displaying information (DXC 4/1) .........................................304
Unidirectional Dropped Connection: removing (DXC 4/1) .............................................................304
Unidirectional Dropped Connection: switching (DXC 4/1) .............................................................304
TANDEM CONNECTION: MANAGING............................................................................................305
Tandem Connection: creating.........................................................................................................305
Tandem Connection: configuring....................................................................................................306
Tandem Connection: displaying .....................................................................................................308
AUXILIARY UNIT CONNECTION: MANAGING...............................................................................309
Auxiliary Unit Connection: configuring............................................................................................311
Auxiliary Unit Connection: removing...............................................................................................313
Auxiliary Unit Connection: displaying..............................................................................................313

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 8 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

MANAGING ALARMS ........................................................................................................ 314


ALARMS: MANAGING ATTRIBUTES (DXC 4/1).............................................................................314
Alarms: configuring attributes (DXC 4/1) ........................................................................................315
Alarms: displaying attributes (DXC 4/1)..........................................................................................315
ALARMS: MANAGING MONITORING STATE ................................................................................316
Alarms: configuring the monitoring state ........................................................................................317
Alarms: displaying monitoring state................................................................................................318
ALARM: FILTERING..........................................................................................................................318
ALARMS: CONFIGURING SOH BYTE PERSISTENCY .................................................................319
ALARMS: CONFIGURING REPORTING STATE ............................................................................320
ALARMS: FILTERING OF THE FREE PDH PORTS FAULT ..........................................................320
ALARMS: SERIAL LINK OFF INHIBITION.......................................................................................321
ALARMS: AIS / RDI MASKING .........................................................................................................321
ALARMS: PORT MODE....................................................................................................................321
ACTIVE ALARMS: FILTERING OF THE LIST .................................................................................323
Active Alarms: displaying ................................................................................................................323
ALARMS: DISPLAYING SUBRACKS/UNITS ACTIVE ALARMS ....................................................324
Alarms: displaying subrack active alarms.......................................................................................325
Active Alarms: acknowledgement push-button ..............................................................................325
Active Alarms: displaying alarmed unit...........................................................................................326
Active Alarms: displaying unit active alarms...................................................................................327
ALARMS: MANAGING THE EVENT HISTORY FILE ......................................................................327
Alarms: removing the selected file..................................................................................................328
Alarms: displaying the alarm history file .........................................................................................328
Alarms: removing all alarm history files ..........................................................................................328
ALARMS: DISPLAYING THE LOG FILE ..........................................................................................328
ALARMS: CONFIGURING THE LOG FULL THRESHOLD.............................................................328
ALARMS: CLEARING THE ALARM LOG ........................................................................................328
ALARMS: FAULT ACKNOWLEDGE ................................................................................................329
ALARMS: ENABLING/DISABLING PARKING MODE .....................................................................329
ALARMS: DISPLAYING SIGNAL DB LOG FILE..............................................................................329
ALARMS: RESETTING SIGNAL DB LOG FILE...............................................................................329
ALARMS: UPDATING ALARM COUNTERS....................................................................................329

PERFORMANCE MONITORING........................................................................................ 330


STM-1 AND PDH PORT PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS: CONFIGURING THRESHOLDS (DXC
4/1) .....................................................................................................................................................330
PERFORMANCE PARAMETER: MANAGING EXCEPTIONS THRESHOLDS .............................333
Performance Parameter: configuring exception thresholds...........................................................334
Performance Parameter: restoring default exception thresholds...................................................335
Performance Parameter: displaying the exception thresholds ......................................................335
PERFORMANCE: DATABASE USAGE...........................................................................................335
PERFORMANCE: LO LIMIT CONFIGURATION .............................................................................336
PERFORMANCE: LO CURRENT LOAD..........................................................................................336

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 9 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

PERFORMANCE: MANAGING DATA DISPLAYING ......................................................................337


Performance: displaying data .........................................................................................................338
PERFORMANCE: RESETTING ALL NE REGISTERS ...................................................................339
PERFORMANCE: RESETTING REGISTERS OF A SELECTED PORT........................................339
Performance: resetting register ......................................................................................................340
PERFORMANCE: MANAGING DATA COLLECTION.....................................................................340
Performance: start maintenance based collection .........................................................................341
Performance: stop maintenance based collection .........................................................................342
Performance: start service based collection...................................................................................343
Performance: stop service based collection...................................................................................344
Performance: modifying data collection parameter........................................................................344
Performance: displaying collection state ........................................................................................344
Performance: displaying started monitored entities .......................................................................345

SECURITY AND SYSTEM MANAGEMENT ..................................................................... 346


SECURITY: MODIFYING PASSWORD ...........................................................................................346
SECURITY: MODIFYING USER PASSWORD................................................................................346
SYSTEM: SETTING NE DATE AND TIME.......................................................................................346
SYSTEM: CONFIGURING TIMEOUT ..............................................................................................346
System: configuring session inactivity ............................................................................................347
System: configuring EM response time..........................................................................................347
System: configuring session database open time out....................................................................347
SYSTEM: LINE UP: MANAGING......................................................................................................347
Line Up: configuring ports (DXC 4/1)..............................................................................................348
Line Up: provisioning cross-connections (DXC 4/1).......................................................................348
Line Up: decommissioning the ports ..............................................................................................350
Line Up: removing cross-connections ............................................................................................350
SYSTEM: CHECKING THE SOFTWARE RELEASE ......................................................................351
System: checking subrack software release ..................................................................................351
System: checking equipment software details ...............................................................................352
SYSTEM: PERFORMING DATABASE BACKUP ............................................................................352
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW AND DB ON C&T SUBRACK......................................................353
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON COMMU.................................................................................354
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON MCU.......................................................................................354
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON PCU OF THE TYPE 2 SUBRACK ........................................355
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON PCU OF THE TYPE 5 SUBRACK ........................................355
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON PCU OF THE TYPE 3/6/7 SUBRACK ..................................356
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON PCU OF THE TYPE 4 SUBRACK ........................................357
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON PCU OF THE TYPE E SUBRACK........................................357
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON STM-4 UNIT...........................................................................358
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON STM-16 UNIT.........................................................................359
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON 2XSTM-1 UNIT ......................................................................359
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON 4XSTM-1 UNIT ......................................................................360
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON 4X140-155MBIT/S UNIT .......................................................361

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 10 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON AUXILIARY UNIT ..................................................................361


SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON 63X2MBIT/S UNIT.................................................................362
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON 4X34MBIT/S T-MUX UNIT ....................................................363
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON 3X34MBIT/S UNIT.................................................................363
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON 3X45MBIT/S UNIT.................................................................364
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON BOOSTER UNIT ...................................................................365
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON PREAMPLIFIER UNIT ..........................................................365
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON TYPE 3/6/7 MIU.....................................................................366
SYSTEM: DOWNLOADING SW ON TYPE E MIU ..........................................................................367
SYSTEM: SWITCHING THE FLASH MEMORY BANKS ................................................................368
System: switching banks on C&T subrack .....................................................................................368
System: switching banks on CommU.............................................................................................369
System: switching banks on MCU..................................................................................................369
System: switching banks on PCU of type 2 subrack......................................................................369
System: switching banks on PCU of type 5 subrack......................................................................370
System: switching banks on PCU of type 3/6/7 subrack................................................................370
System: switching banks on PCU of type 4 subrack......................................................................370
System: switching banks on PCU of type E subrack .....................................................................371
System: switching banks on STM-4 Unit........................................................................................371
System: switching banks on STM-16 Unit......................................................................................371
System: switching banks on 2xSTM-1 Unit....................................................................................372
System: switching banks on 4xSTM-1 Unit....................................................................................372
System: switching banks on 4x140-155Mbit/s Unit........................................................................373
System: switching banks on Auxiliary Unit .....................................................................................373
System: switching banks on 63x2Mbit/s Unit .................................................................................373
System: switching banks on 4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit......................................................................374
System: switching banks on 3x34Mbit/s Unit .................................................................................374
System: switching banks on 3x45Mbit/s Unit .................................................................................374
System: switching banks on Booster Unit ......................................................................................375
System: switching banks on Pramplifier Unit .................................................................................375
System: switching banks on Type 3/6/7 MIU .................................................................................376
System: switching banks on Type E MIU.......................................................................................376
SYSTEM: DISPLAYING COMMAND LOG DATABASE..................................................................376
SYSTEM: RESETTING COMMAND LOG DATABASE...................................................................376
SYSTEM: DECOMMISSIONING NE DATABASE ...........................................................................377
SYSTEM: PARTIAL DECOMMISSIONING OF NE DATABASE.....................................................377
SYSTEM: RESTARTING CCU .........................................................................................................378
SYSTEM: UPGRADING TEST FROM DXC 4/1 512X512 TO DXC 4/4..........................................378

REAL-TIME MONITOR WINDOW...................................................................................... 379


ALARM AREA....................................................................................................................................379
EVENT AREA ....................................................................................................................................379

FAULT DETECTION PROCEDURE .................................................................................. 385

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 11 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

SPI - SYNCHRONOUS PHYSICAL INTERFACE ALARMS............................................................385


TxClockFail (SPI) ....................................................................................................................385
RxClockFail (SPI) ....................................................................................................................385
FreqOutOfRange (SPI)...............................................................................................................386
TxLaserPwrHigh (SPI) ...............................................................................................................386
TxLaserPwrLow (SPI)................................................................................................................386
DescramblerFail (SPI) ...............................................................................................................387
ScramblerFail (SPI) ................................................................................................................387
LOS_LOF (SPI) .......................................................................................................................387
LOS (SPI)...............................................................................................................................387
LaserFail (SPI) .......................................................................................................................388
LaserDegrade (SPI) ................................................................................................................388
TxPulseLoss (SPI) ....................................................................................................................388
RS - REGENERATOR SECTION ALARMS.....................................................................................389
LOF (RS) ...............................................................................................................................389
DCCrLAPDDisconnected (RS)....................................................................................................389
RS-TIM (RS) ............................................................................................................................389
MS - MULTIPLEX SECTION ALARMS.............................................................................................390
MS-AIS (MS) [LC] .....................................................................................................................390
MS-RDI (MS) [LC] .....................................................................................................................390
MS-EXC (MS)........................................................................................................................390
MS-DEG (MS)........................................................................................................................391
SSMMismatch (MS) ................................................................................................................391
DCCmLAPDDisconnected (MS) .................................................................................................391
AU-4 / AU-3 - ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT ALARMS............................................................................392
AU-LOP (AU-4 / AU-3) .........................................................................................................392
AU-AIS (AU-4 / AU-3) [LC] ........................................................................................................392
TxAURejustFail (AU-4 / AU-3) ..................................................................................................392
RxAURejustFail (AU-4 / AU-3) ..................................................................................................393
AU-Mtx-LOP (AU-4 / AU-3) ......................................................................................................393
AU-Mtx-AIS (AU-4 / AU-3) ......................................................................................................393
VC-4 - HIGH ORDER VC ALARM ....................................................................................................394
HP-TIM (VC-4) .........................................................................................................................394
HP-PLM (VC-4).....................................................................................................................394
HP-LOM (VC-4).....................................................................................................................394
HP-RDI (VC-4) [LC] ..................................................................................................................395
HP-AIS (VC-4) [LC] ..................................................................................................................395
HP-DEG (VC-4).....................................................................................................................396
HP-EXC (VC-4).....................................................................................................................396
HP-UNEQ (VC-4).....................................................................................................................396
RDIPayload (VC-4) [LC] ...........................................................................................................397
RDIServer (VC-4) [LC] ..............................................................................................................397
RDIConnectivity (VC-4) [LC].......................................................................................................397
TC-ISF (VC-4) .........................................................................................................................398

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 12 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

TC-UNEQ (VC-4).....................................................................................................................398
TC-DEG (VC-4).....................................................................................................................398
TC-EXC (VC-4).....................................................................................................................399
RDI-OR (VC-4) .........................................................................................................................399
HO-V4-FAIL_A (VC-4)..............................................................................................................399
HO-V4-FAIL_B (VC-4)..............................................................................................................400
HO-LOM VCnV (VC-4)..............................................................................................................400
HO-SQM VCnV (VC-4)..............................................................................................................400
HO-LOA VCnV (VC-4)..............................................................................................................401
HO-LOA RecVCnV (VC-4) ........................................................................................................401
HO-INCJ1-Mism VCnV (VC-4) ...................................................................................................401
HO-UneqMtx (VC-4)..................................................................................................................402
TU3 / TU2 / TU12 - TRIBUTARY UNIT ALARMS.............................................................................402
LPOM-LOP (TU3 / TU2 / TU12) .............................................................................................402
LPOM-AIS (TU3 / TU2 / TU12) [LC] ...........................................................................................403
LPOM-DEG (TU3 / TU2 / TU12) [LC]........................................................................................403
LPOM-EXC (TU3 / TU2 / TU12) [LC]........................................................................................403
LPOM-UNEQ (TU3 / TU2 / TU12) [LC] ...................................................................................404
LPOM-RDI (TU3 / TU2 / TU12) [LC].......................................................................................404
LPOM-TIM (TU3 / TU2 / TU12) [LC].......................................................................................404
LPOM-PLM (TU3 / TU2 / TU12) [LC]........................................................................................405
V4-FAIL_A (TU3 / TU2 / TU12) ............................................................................................405
V4-FAIL_B (TU3 / TU2 / TU12) ............................................................................................405
TC-ISF (TU3 / TU2 / TU12) ....................................................................................................405
TC-UNEQ (TU3 / TU2 / TU12) ................................................................................................406
TC-DEG (TU3 / TU2 / TU12) ................................................................................................406
TC-EXC (TU3 TU2 TU12) ..................................................................................................407
VC-3 - LOW ORDER VC ALARMS...................................................................................................407
LP-TIM (VC-3) .........................................................................................................................407
LP-PLM (VC-3) .........................................................................................................................407
LP-LOM (VC-3).....................................................................................................................408
LP-RDI (VC-3) [LC] ..................................................................................................................408
LP-AIS (VC-3) [LC] ..................................................................................................................409
LP-DEG (VC-3).....................................................................................................................409
LP-EXC (VC-3) .........................................................................................................................409
LP-UNEQ (VC-3).....................................................................................................................410
RDIPayload (VC-3) [LC] ...........................................................................................................410
RDIServer (VC-3) [LC] ..............................................................................................................410
RDIConnectivity (VC-3) [LC].......................................................................................................411
VC-12 - LOW ORDER VC ALARMS.................................................................................................411
LP-LOP (VC-12) .......................................................................................................................411
LP-AIS (VC-12) [LC] ................................................................................................................411
LP-RDI (VC-12) [LC] ................................................................................................................412
LP-EXC (VC-12) .......................................................................................................................412

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 13 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

LP-DEG (VC-12)...................................................................................................................413
LP-PLM (VC-12) .......................................................................................................................413
LP-TIM (VC-12) .......................................................................................................................413
LP-UNEQ (VC-12)...................................................................................................................414
V4-FAIL_A (VC-12)...............................................................................................................414
V4-FAIL_B (VC-12)...............................................................................................................414
TU-TC-PATH-AIS (VC-12) .........................................................................................................414
TU-TC-PATH-UNEQ (VC-12)......................................................................................................415
TU-TC-PATH-RDI (VC-12).........................................................................................................415
TU-VC-PATH-RDI (VC-12).........................................................................................................415
TU-RFI (VC-12) .......................................................................................................................416
TU-NO-RxTraceId (VC-12).........................................................................................................416
TU-NO-RxSigLab (VC-12)..........................................................................................................416
2MB - 1.5 AND 2MBIT/S PDH INTERFACE ALARMS ....................................................................417
TxBufferContention (2Mb) ..........................................................................................................417
RxBufferContention (2Mb)..........................................................................................................417
PDH-LOS (2Mb) ......................................................................................................................418
PDH-AIS (2Mb) [LC] ...............................................................................................................418
PDH-EXC (2Mb) ......................................................................................................................418
PDH-DEG (2Mb) ......................................................................................................................419
PDH-LOF (2Mb) ......................................................................................................................419
CRC4Mismatch (2Mb)...............................................................................................................419
CRC4RAI (2Mb) [LC] ...............................................................................................................420
PDH-RAI (2Mb) [LC] ...............................................................................................................420
34MB - 34 AND 45MBIT/S PDH INTERFACE ALARMS .................................................................420
TxBufferContention (34Mb) ........................................................................................................420
RxBufferContention (34Mb)........................................................................................................421
PDH-LOS (34Mb) ....................................................................................................................421
PDH-AIS (34Mb) [LC] .............................................................................................................422
PDH-EXC (34Mb) ....................................................................................................................422
PDH-DEG (34Mb) ....................................................................................................................422
PDH-LOF (34Mb) ....................................................................................................................423
PDH-TxFail (34Mb).................................................................................................................423
PDH-INParityError (34Mb)..........................................................................................................423
PDH-INClockFail (34Mb) ...........................................................................................................424
45MbYellowSignal (34Mb)..........................................................................................................424
45MbIdleSignal (34Mb).............................................................................................................424
140MB - 140MBIT/S PDH INTERFACE ALARMS ...........................................................................425
TxBufferContention (140Mb) ......................................................................................................425
RxBufferContention (140Mb)......................................................................................................425
PDH-LOS (140Mb) ..................................................................................................................425
PDH-AIS (140Mb) [LC] .........................................................................................................426
PDH-EXC (140Mb) ..................................................................................................................426
PDH-DEG (140Mb) ..................................................................................................................426

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 14 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

PDH-LOF (140Mb) ..................................................................................................................427


PDH-TxFail (140Mb)...............................................................................................................427
PDH-INParityError (140Mb)........................................................................................................427
PDH-INClockFail (140Mb) .........................................................................................................427
PDH-RAI (140Mb) [LC] ...........................................................................................................428
RDI (140Mb) .........................................................................................................................428
8MBCH - ALARMS OF 8MBIT/S CHANNELS OF A T-MUX UNIT ................................................429
AIS (8MbCh) [LC] ..................................................................................................................429
LOF (8MbCh).........................................................................................................................429
EXC (8MbCh).........................................................................................................................429
DEG (8MbCh).........................................................................................................................429
RAI (8MbCh) [LC] ..................................................................................................................430
34MBCH - ALARMS OF 34MBIT/S CHANNELS OF A T-MUX UNIT ............................................430
AIS (34MbCh).......................................................................................................................430
LOF (34MbCh).......................................................................................................................430
EXC (34MbCh).......................................................................................................................431
DEG (34MbCh).......................................................................................................................431
RAI (34MbCh).......................................................................................................................431
VIDEOCOD - 34MBIT/S VIDEOCODEC INTERFACE ALARMS ....................................................432
TxBufferContention (VideoCod) .................................................................................................432
RxBufferContention (VideoCod).................................................................................................432
PDH-LOS (VideoCod) .............................................................................................................433
PDH-AIS (VideoCod) .............................................................................................................433
PDH-EXC (VideoCod) .............................................................................................................433
PDH-DEG (VideoCod) .............................................................................................................434
PDH-LOF (VideoCod) .............................................................................................................434
PDH-LOMF (VideoCod)..........................................................................................................434
VC2-5C - CONCATENATED VIRTUAL CONTAINER ALARMS.....................................................435
LP-LOP (VC2-5c) .....................................................................................................................435
LP-AIS (VC2-5c) [LC] ..............................................................................................................435
LP-EXC (VC2-5c) .....................................................................................................................436
LP-DEG (VC2-5c) .................................................................................................................436
LP-PLM (VC2-5c) .....................................................................................................................436
LP-UNEQ (VC2-5c) .................................................................................................................437
2MBPDHCH - ALARMS OF 2MBIT/S CHANNELS OF A T-MUX UNIT..........................................437
AIS (2MbPDHCh) [LC] ...........................................................................................................437
LOF (2MbPDHCh).................................................................................................................437
EXC (2MbPDHCh).................................................................................................................437
DEG (2MbPDHCh).................................................................................................................437
RAI (2MbPDHCh) [LC] ...........................................................................................................437
RxFailure (2MbPDHCh) .........................................................................................................438
ST
MX1STU - 1 STAGE MATRIX UNIT ALARMS..............................................................................438
MissingUnit (Mx1StU) .............................................................................................................438
UnitAddressError (Mx1StU)........................................................................................................439

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 15 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

RxSyncLoss (Mx1StU) .............................................................................................................439


RxClockLoss (Mx1StU) .............................................................................................................439
STM-1_nParityError (Mx1StU) ...................................................................................................439
TmngPulseLossn:n+1 (Mx1StU) ................................................................................................440
SyncPulseLossn:n+1 (Mx1StU) .................................................................................................440
MX2STU - 2ND STAGE MATRIX UNIT ALARMS..............................................................................440
MissingUnit (Mx2StU) .............................................................................................................440
UnitAddressError (Mx2StU)........................................................................................................440
RxSyncLoss (Mx2StU) .............................................................................................................441
RxClockLoss (Mx2StU) .............................................................................................................441
STM-1_nParityError (Mx2StU) ...................................................................................................441
MX3STU - 3RD STAGE MATRIX UNIT ALARMS..............................................................................442
MissingUnit (Mx3StU) .............................................................................................................442
UnitAddressError (Mx3StU)........................................................................................................442
RxSyncLoss (Mx3StU) .............................................................................................................442
RxClockLoss (Mx3StU) .............................................................................................................443
STM-1_nParityError (Mx3StU) ..................................................................................................443
TxSyncLoss1stHalf (Mx3StU) ....................................................................................................443
TxSyncLoss2ndtHalf (Mx3StU) ..................................................................................................443
MXIN - MATRIX INPUT SIDE ALARMS (FROM SIDE) ...................................................................444
UNEQAccess (MxIn) ..............................................................................................................444
MIUAddrError (MxIn) ..............................................................................................................444
UnitFail (MxIn) .........................................................................................................................444
MXOUT - MATRIX OUTPUT SIDE ALARMS (TO SIDE).................................................................445
UNEQAccess (MxOut) ...........................................................................................................445
UnitFail (MxOut).......................................................................................................................445
MCU - MATRIX CONTROL UNIT ALARMS.....................................................................................445
MxNotCnfg (MCU)..................................................................................................................445
AND(MxPSU)Fail (MCU) ............................................................................................................446
AND(MxBatt)Fail (MCU) ............................................................................................................446
Line_AFail (MCU).....................................................................................................................446
Line_BFail (MCU).....................................................................................................................446
Mx_AMx_BFail (MCU) .............................................................................................................447
MTX_CntrFail (MCU) .............................................................................................................447
MxBatt1..4Fail (MCU) .............................................................................................................447
UnitProtVerMism (MCU).............................................................................................................447
AND(MxBatt1-2)Fail (MCU)........................................................................................................447
AND(MxBatt3-4)Fail (MCU)........................................................................................................448
MTX_HwCntrFail (MCU).............................................................................................................448
SubrackAlarmAck (MCU) ...........................................................................................................448
MTU - MATRIX TIMING UNIT ALARMS...........................................................................................448
MissingUnit (MTU) ..................................................................................................................448
TSU_Aloss (MTU) ..................................................................................................................449
TSU_Bloss (MTU) ..................................................................................................................449

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 16 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

ClockOutLoss (MTU)..............................................................................................................449
SyncOutLoss (MTU) ..................................................................................................................449
UnitPowerFail (MTU)..............................................................................................................450
MPSU - MATRIX POWER SUPPLY ALARMS.................................................................................450
MissingUnit (MPSU) ...............................................................................................................450
UnitFail (MPSU).......................................................................................................................450
BattFail (MPSU).......................................................................................................................451
MX13STU_86 - 1ST/3RD STAGE MATRIX UNIT ALARMS ...............................................................451
MissingUnit (Mx13StU_86).....................................................................................................451
UnitAddressError (Mx13StU_86)................................................................................................451
RxSyncLoss (Mx13StU_86).....................................................................................................452
RxClockLoss (Mx13StU_86).....................................................................................................452
UnitDistrClockLoss (Mx13StU_86).............................................................................................452
UnitPowerFail (Mx13StU_86).................................................................................................452
I/OmoduleMissingUnit (Mx13StU_86)........................................................................................452
I/OModulePowerFail (Mx13StU_86) ...........................................................................................453
STM-1_I_nParityError (Mx13StU_86) .........................................................................................453
STM-1_III_nParityError (Mx13StU_86) .......................................................................................453
TmngPulseLossn:n+1 (Mx13StU_86) .........................................................................................453
SyncPulseLossn:n+1 (Mx13StU_86) ..........................................................................................454
SignalLossn:n+1 (Mx13StU_86) ................................................................................................454
TxSyncLoss1stHalf (Mx13StU_86) .............................................................................................454
TxSyncLoss2ndtHalf (Mx13StU_86) ...........................................................................................454
TxClockFail1stHalf (Mx13StU_86) ..............................................................................................455
TxClockFail2ndHalf (Mx13StU_86) .............................................................................................455
MX2STU_86 - 2ND STAGE MATRIX UNIT ALARMS .......................................................................455
MissingUnit (Mx2StU_86)........................................................................................................455
UnitAddressError (Mx2StU_86)...................................................................................................456
RxSyncLoss (Mx2StU_86)........................................................................................................456
RxClockLoss (Mx2StU_86)........................................................................................................456
UnitDistrClockLoss (Mx2StU_86)................................................................................................456
UnitPowerFail (Mx2StU_86)....................................................................................................457
STM-1_nParityError (Mx2StU_86) ..............................................................................................457
MX1STU_91 - 1ST STAGE MATRIX UNIT ALARMS........................................................................457
MissingUnit (Mx1StU-91).........................................................................................................457
UnitAddressError (Mx1StU_91)...................................................................................................458
RxSyncLoss (Mx1StU_91)........................................................................................................458
RxClockLoss (Mx1StU_91)........................................................................................................458
STM-1_nParityError (Mx1StU_91) ..............................................................................................458
TmngPulseLossn:n+1 (Mx1StU_91) ...........................................................................................459
SyncPulseLossn:n+1 (Mx1StU_91) ............................................................................................459
MX2STU_91 - 2ND STAGE MATRIX UNIT ALARMS .......................................................................459
MissingUnit (Mx2StU_91)........................................................................................................459
UnitAddressError (Mx2StU_91)...................................................................................................460

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 17 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

RxSyncLoss (Mx2StU_91)........................................................................................................460
RxClockLoss (Mx2StU_91)........................................................................................................460
STM-1_nParityError (Mx2StU_91) ..............................................................................................460
MX3STU_91 - 3RD STAGE MATRIX UNIT ALARMS .......................................................................461
MissingUnit (Mx3StU_91)........................................................................................................461
UnitAddressError (Mx3StU_91)...................................................................................................461
RxSyncLoss (Mx3StU_91)........................................................................................................461
RxClockLoss (Mx3StU_91)........................................................................................................462
STM-1_nParityError (Mx3StU_91) ..............................................................................................462
STM-1_1:16TxSyncLoss (Mx3StU_91) ......................................................................................462
STM-1_17:32TxSyncLoss (Mx3StU_91) ....................................................................................462
MXIN_91 - MATRIX INPUT SIDE ALARMS (FROM SIDE) .............................................................463
UNEQAccess (MxIn_91).........................................................................................................463
MIUAddrError (MxIn_91).........................................................................................................463
UnitFail (MxIn_91) ...................................................................................................................463
MXOUT - MATRIX OUTPUT SIDE ALARMS (TO SIDE).................................................................464
UNEQAccess (MxOut_91)......................................................................................................464
MIUAddrError (MxOut_91)......................................................................................................464
UnitFail (MxOut_91) ................................................................................................................464
MCU - MATRIX CONTROL UNIT ALARMS.....................................................................................465
MissingUnit (MCU_91) ............................................................................................................465
UnitFail (MCU_91)...................................................................................................................465
MxNotCnfg (MCU_91) ............................................................................................................465
AND(MxPSU)Fail (MCU_91)......................................................................................................466
AND(MxBatt)Fail (MCU_91) .......................................................................................................466
Line_AFail (MCU_91)................................................................................................................466
Line_BFail (MCU_91)................................................................................................................466
Mx_A_Mx_BFail (MCU_91)........................................................................................................466
Line_A_Line_BFail (MCU_91).....................................................................................................467
MasterSlaveFail (MCU_91) ........................................................................................................467
MasterSlaveLinkOff (MCU_91) ...................................................................................................467
MTU_91 - MATRIX TIMING UNIT ALARMS ....................................................................................467
MissingUnit (MTU_91).............................................................................................................467
TSU_Aloss (MTU_91)............................................................................................................468
TSU_Bloss (MTU_91)............................................................................................................468
ClockOutLoss (MTU_91).........................................................................................................468
SyncOutLoss (MTU_91).............................................................................................................468
MPSU_91 - MATRIX POWER SUPPLY ALARMS...........................................................................469
MissingUnit (MPSU_91) ..........................................................................................................469
UnitFail (MPSU_91).................................................................................................................469
BattFail (MPSU_91).................................................................................................................469
PORTUNIT - PORT UNIT ALARMS .................................................................................................470
MissingUnit (PortUnit)..............................................................................................................470
UnitTypeMismatch (PortUnit) ......................................................................................................470

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 18 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

UnitFail (PortUnit) ....................................................................................................................470


CntrlBusFail (PortUnit)..............................................................................................................470
MxASignalFail (PortUnit).........................................................................................................471
MxBSignalFail (PortUnit).........................................................................................................471
Mx_AClockFail (PortUnit)..........................................................................................................471
Mx_BClockFail (PortUnit)..........................................................................................................471
TxOHBusDispFail (PortUnit)........................................................................................................471
SelfTestFail (PortUnit)..............................................................................................................472
UnexpUnit (PortUnit) .................................................................................................................472
UnitHWMismatch (PortUnit) .......................................................................................................472
PwrFail (PortUnit) ....................................................................................................................472
SyncSrcFail (PortUnit)..............................................................................................................473
AsicFail (PortUnit) ....................................................................................................................473
5VNegFail (PortUnit) .................................................................................................................473
RxRegClockFail (PortUnit)..........................................................................................................473
PowerProblem (PortUnit)..........................................................................................................474
UnitError (PortUnit) .................................................................................................................474
LTU-Fail (PortUnit) ................................................................................................................474
LTU-Mismatch (PortUnit)........................................................................................................474
CK-OOF (PortUnit) ................................................................................................................475
TmpOutOfRange (PortUnit)......................................................................................................475
BiasOutOfLimits (PortUnit) .......................................................................................................475
PumpLaserFail (PortUnit)........................................................................................................475
AlsApsdActive (PortUnit)........................................................................................................476
EmissionPwrOut (PortUnit).......................................................................................................476
PCU - PORT CONTROL UNIT ALARMS .........................................................................................476
MissingUnit (PCU) ...................................................................................................................476
UnitFail (PCU)..........................................................................................................................477
UnitProtVerMism (PCU)..............................................................................................................477
OR(Batt)Fail (PCU) ...................................................................................................................477
PCU_A_PCU_BFail (PCU)..........................................................................................................477
CtrlBusFault (PCU) ...................................................................................................................477
FailFan (PCU)..........................................................................................................................478
ANDFailFanContr (PCU) ..........................................................................................................478
ORFailFanContr (PCU) ............................................................................................................478
OverT (PCU)..........................................................................................................................478
MissingFan (PCU) .................................................................................................................479
S3Mismatch (PCU) .................................................................................................................479
NoAdjacency (PCU) .................................................................................................................479
PPSU - PORT SUBRACK POWER SUPPLY ALARMS ..................................................................480
MissingUnit (PPSU) .................................................................................................................480
PSUFail (PPSU) .......................................................................................................................480
IDU - IDENTIFICATION UNIT ALARMS...........................................................................................481
MissingUnit (IdU) .....................................................................................................................481

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 19 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

SubrackIdMismatch (IdU) ............................................................................................................481


SubrackTypeMismatch (IdU).......................................................................................................481
AUXU - AUXILIARY UNIT ALARMS.................................................................................................482
MissingUnit (AuxU) ..................................................................................................................482
UnitTypeMismatch (AuxU)...........................................................................................................482
UnitFail (AuxU) ........................................................................................................................482
CntrlBusFail (AuxU) ..................................................................................................................483
SelfTestFail (AuxU) ..................................................................................................................483
UnexpUnit (AuxU) .....................................................................................................................483
MIU - TRIB./MATRIX INTERFACE UNIT ALARMS .........................................................................484
MissingUnit (MIU) ....................................................................................................................484
WrongUnit (MIU)........................................................................................................................484
UnitFail (MIU)...........................................................................................................................484
CntrlBUSFail (MIU) ....................................................................................................................485
Clock_AFail (MIU) ....................................................................................................................485
Clock_BFail (MIU) ....................................................................................................................485
SyncFail (MIU).......................................................................................................................485
PLLOutSyncFail (MIU)................................................................................................................486
SyncPortClockFail (MIU) .............................................................................................................486
ASIC_1Fail (MIU) ...................................................................................................................486
ASIC_2Fail (MIU) ...................................................................................................................487
NegPwrFail (MIU) ....................................................................................................................487
MIUSelfTestFail (MIU) ................................................................................................................487
Clock_A_Clock_BFail (MIU) ........................................................................................................488
HWMismatch (MIU) ....................................................................................................................488
PLL388MhzUnlock (MIU) ............................................................................................................488
388MHz_I/O_ModA..EFail (MIU).................................................................................................488
MIUMX - MATRIX INTERFACE / MATRIX ACCESS ALARMS.......................................................489
FrameSyncFail (MIUMx) ...........................................................................................................489
MxClockFail (MIUMx) ...............................................................................................................489
ParityError (MIUMx)...................................................................................................................489
DestinationAddrError (MIUMx) ....................................................................................................489
AccLOS (MIUMx)......................................................................................................................489
MIUPORT - MATRIX INTERFACE / STM-1 PORT ACCESS ALARMS .........................................490
DispFail (MIUPort) ....................................................................................................................490
MIU_MSP - MATRIX INTERFACE MSP ALARMS ..........................................................................490
MSP_INV (MIU_MSP) .............................................................................................................490
MSP_PAM (MIU_MSP) .........................................................................................................491
MSPModeMismatch (MIU_MSP) ................................................................................................491
MIU_T3/6/7 - TRIB./MATRIX INTERFACE UNIT ALARMS.............................................................491
MissingUnit (MIU_T3/6/7)........................................................................................................491
WrongUnit (MIU_T3/6/7) ...........................................................................................................492
UnitFail (MIU_T3/6/7) ..............................................................................................................492
CntrlBUSFail (MIU_T3/6/7)........................................................................................................492

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 20 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

Clock_AFail (MIU_T3/6/7)........................................................................................................492
Clock_BFail (MIU_T3/6/7)........................................................................................................493
SyncPortClockFail (MIU_T3/6/7).................................................................................................493
NoMonitClock (MIU_T3/6/7)....................................................................................................493
PLLOutSyncFail (MIU_T3/6/7) ...................................................................................................494
SyncFail (MIU_T3/6/7) ..........................................................................................................494
ClockOutOfFrequency (MIU_T3/6/7) ..........................................................................................494
MasterSlaveLinkFail (MIU_T3/6/7)..............................................................................................494
ASIC_1Fail (MIU_T3/6/7).......................................................................................................495
ASIC_2Fail (MIU_T3/6/7).......................................................................................................495
BackPanelUnknown (MIU_T3/6/7)..............................................................................................495
MIUSelfTestFail (MIU_T3/6/7)....................................................................................................495
Clock_A_Clock_BFail (MIU_T3/6/7)............................................................................................496
HW_Mismatch (MIU_T3/6/7)....................................................................................................496
388MHz_I/O_ModA..EMiss (MIU_T3/6/7) .................................................................................496
388MHz_I/O_ModA..EPowerFail (MIU_T3/6/7)..........................................................................496
ImSwDownloading (MIU_T3/6/7) ................................................................................................496
ImSwDownloadingFail (MIU_T3/6/7) ..........................................................................................497
MIU_6E - TRIB./MATRIX INTERFACE UNIT ALARMS...................................................................497
MissingUnit (MIU 6E_7E) ........................................................................................................497
WrongUnit (MIU 6E_7E) ...........................................................................................................497
UnitFail (MIU 6E_7E)...............................................................................................................498
CntrlBUSFail (MIU 6E_7E) ........................................................................................................498
Clock_AFail (MIU 6E_7E) ........................................................................................................498
Clock_BFail (MIU 6E_7E) ........................................................................................................498
SyncPortClockFail (MIU 6E_7E) .................................................................................................499
NoMonitClock (MIU 6E_7E) ....................................................................................................499
PLLOutSyncFail (MIU 6E_7E)....................................................................................................499
SyncFail (MIU 6E_7E) ..........................................................................................................500
ClockOutOfFrequency (MIU 6E_7E)...........................................................................................500
MasterSlaveLinkFail (MIU 6E_7E) ..............................................................................................500
ASIC_1Fail (MIU 6E_7E) .......................................................................................................500
ASIC_2Fail (MIU 6E_7E) .......................................................................................................501
BackPanelUnknown (MIU 6E_7E) ..............................................................................................501
MIUSelfTestFail (MIU 6E_7E) ....................................................................................................501
Clock_A_Clock_Bfail (MIU 6E_7E) ............................................................................................501
HW_Mismatch (MIU 6E_7E) ....................................................................................................502
388MHz_I/O_ModA..EMiss (MIU 6E_7E)..................................................................................502
388MHz_I/O_ModA..EPowerFail (MIU 6E_7E) ..........................................................................502
ImSwDownloading (MIU 6E_7E).................................................................................................502
ImSwDownloadingFail (MIU 6E_7E)...........................................................................................502
CCU - CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT ALARMS ..................................................................................503
MissingUnit (CCU) ...................................................................................................................503
CCULinkOff (CCU) ...................................................................................................................503

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 21 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

Download_Failed (CCU).............................................................................................................503
NMS_LinkOff (CCU) ...................................................................................................................504
MEMU - MEMORY EXPANSION UNIT ALARMS............................................................................504
MissingUnit (MemU) ................................................................................................................504
MemUWriteError (MemU)...........................................................................................................504
ChecksumError (MemU) ............................................................................................................505
SizeRegisterError (MemU) ..........................................................................................................505
SIOU - SERIAL EXPANSION UNIT ALARMS..................................................................................505
MissingUnit (SIOU) ..................................................................................................................505
EthLinkOff (SIOU) .....................................................................................................................506
SIOU_A_SIOU_BFail (SIOU) ......................................................................................................506
SIOLINE - SERIAL I/O LINE ALARMS .............................................................................................506
SerialLinkOff (SIOLine)..............................................................................................................506
COMMU - COMMUNICATION AND Q INTERFACE UNIT ALARMS .............................................506
MissingUnit (CommU) .............................................................................................................506
EthLinkOff (CommU).................................................................................................................507
CommU_A_CommU_BFail (CommU) ........................................................................................507
No Adjacencies (CommU) .........................................................................................................507
TSU - TIMING SELECTOR OSCILLATOR UNIT ALARMS.............................................................508
MissingUnit (TSU)....................................................................................................................508
ExtSrc_1Fail (TSU)....................................................................................................................508
ExtSrc_2Fail (TSU)....................................................................................................................508
SystemOscFail (TSU)................................................................................................................509
ExtOutOscFail (TSU)................................................................................................................509
SystemOscDEG (TSU)...............................................................................................................509
PwrFail (TSU) ..........................................................................................................................510
FuseFail (TSU)......................................................................................................................510
TDULinkFail (TSU)....................................................................................................................510
TSU_A_TSU_BFail (TSU)...........................................................................................................510
UnitFail (TSU) ..........................................................................................................................511
ExtOutSqlchDisabled (TSU) ........................................................................................................511
ExtSrc1OOF (TSU)....................................................................................................................511
ExtSrc2OOF (TSU)....................................................................................................................511
Ext1/2 AIS (TSU).......................................................................................................................511
Ext1/2 LOS (TSU)...................................................................................................................512
TDU - TIMING DISTRIBUTOR UNIT ALARMS................................................................................512
MissingUnit (TDU) ...................................................................................................................512
LocalTSUMissing (TDU)..............................................................................................................512
RemoteTSUMissing (TDU)..........................................................................................................512
OutClockFail (TDU) ...................................................................................................................513
OutSyncFail (TDU) ...................................................................................................................513
CTPSU - CONTROL AND TIMING EQPT. POWER SUPPLY ALARMS........................................513
MissingUnit (CTPSU)...............................................................................................................513
CTPSUFail (CTPSU)..............................................................................................................514

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 22 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

SYNCSRC - TIMING SELECTOR-OSCILLATOR UNIT SYNCH SOURCES ALARMS ................514


SyncSourceFail (SyncSrc) .........................................................................................................514
TSU_OOF (SyncSrc).................................................................................................................514
PARU - PARALLEL INTERFACE UNIT ALARMS ...........................................................................515
MissingUnit (ParU)...................................................................................................................515
AND(PortSubPSU)Fail (ParU).....................................................................................................515
AND(PortSubBatt)Fail (ParU)......................................................................................................515
OR(CT_A_PSU)Fail (ParU).........................................................................................................515
OR(CT_B_PSU)Fail (ParU).........................................................................................................516
AND(CT_B_PSU)Fail (ParU) ......................................................................................................516
OR(CT_A_Batt)Fail (ParU)..........................................................................................................516
SPI_STM4 - STM-4 SYNCHRONOUS PHYSICAL INTERFACE ALARMS....................................516
DescramblerFail (SPI_STM4).....................................................................................................516
ScramblerFail (SPI_STM4) .....................................................................................................516
LaserFail (SPI_STM4) ............................................................................................................517
LaserDegrade (SPI_STM4) .....................................................................................................517
LOS (SPI_STM4)..................................................................................................................517
LaserAtlX50 (SPI_STM4) .........................................................................................................518
LaserTxPowThrHigh (SPI_STM4)............................................................................................518
LaserTxPowThrLow (SPI_STM4) ............................................................................................518
LaserHighTemp (SPI_STM4) ..................................................................................................518
TimingProblems (SPI_STM4)..................................................................................................519
SPI_NXSTM1 - NXSTM-1 SYNCHRONOUS PHYSICAL INTERFACE ALARMS .........................519
DescramblerFail (SPI_NxSTM1) ................................................................................................519
ScramblerFail (SPI_NxSTM1).................................................................................................519
LaserFail (SPI_NxSTM1)........................................................................................................520
LaserDegrade (SPI_NxSTM1).................................................................................................520
LOS (SPI_NxSTM1) .............................................................................................................520
TxFail (SPI_NxSTM1) ..........................................................................................................521
LaserAtlX50 (SPI_NxSTM1).....................................................................................................521
LaserTxPowThrHigh (SPI_NxSTM1) ..........................................................................................521
LaserTxPowThrLow (SPI_NxSTM1)...........................................................................................521
LaserHighTemp (SPI_NxSTM1) ................................................................................................522
LineCardError (SPI_NxSTM1).................................................................................................522
TimingProblem (SPI_NxSTM1).................................................................................................522
MxACKFail (SPI_NxSTM1).....................................................................................................522
MxBCKBFail (SPI_NxSTM1).....................................................................................................523
OHBusFail (SPI_NxSTM1)........................................................................................................523
SPI_STM16 - STM-16 SYNCHRONOUS PHYSICAL INTERFACE ALARMS ...............................523
DescramblerFail (SPI_STM16) ..................................................................................................523
ScramblerFail (SPI_STM16) ...................................................................................................524
LaserFail (SPI_STM16) ..........................................................................................................524
LaserDegrade (SPI_STM16) ...................................................................................................524
LOS (SPI_STM16)................................................................................................................524

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 23 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

TxFail (SPI_STM16).............................................................................................................525
LaserAtlX50 (SPI_STM16) .......................................................................................................525
LaserTxPowThrHigh (SPI_STM16).............................................................................................525
LaserTxPowThrLow (SPI_STM16) .............................................................................................525
LaserHighTemp (SPI_STM16) .................................................................................................526
TimingProblems (SPI_STM16)................................................................................................526
WaveLenghtDrift (SPI_STM16)...................................................................................................526
RS_STM4 - STM-4 REGENERATOR SECTION ALARMS.............................................................527
LOF (RS_STM4)...................................................................................................................527
RS-TIM (RS_STM4) ................................................................................................................527
DCCrLAPDDisconnected (RS_STM4)........................................................................................527
RS_NXSTM1 - NXSTM-1 REGENERATOR SECTION ALARMS ..................................................528
LOF (RS_NxSTM1) ..............................................................................................................528
RS-TIM (RS_NxSTM1)............................................................................................................528
DCCrLAPDDisconnected (RS_NxSTM1) ...................................................................................528
RS-UAT_Eve (RS_NxSTM1) .................................................................................................528
RS_STM16 - STM-16 REGENERATOR SECTION ALARMS.........................................................529
LOF (RS_STM16) ................................................................................................................529
RS-TIM (RS_STM16) ..............................................................................................................529
DCCrLAPDDisconnected (RS_STM16)......................................................................................529
MS_STM4 - STM-4 MULTIPLEX SECTION ALARMS ....................................................................530
MS-AIS (MS_STM4) [LC] ..........................................................................................................530
MS-RDI (MS_STM4) [LC] ..........................................................................................................530
MS-EXC (MS_STM4)............................................................................................................530
MS-DEG (MS_STM4)............................................................................................................531
DCCmLAPDDisconnected (MS_STM4) .....................................................................................531
MS_NXSTM1 - NXSTM-1 MULTIPLEX SECTION ALARMS ..........................................................532
MS-AIS (MS_NxSTM1) [LC]......................................................................................................532
MS-RDI (MS_NxSTM1) [LC]......................................................................................................532
MS-EXC (MS_NxSTM1) .......................................................................................................532
MS-DEG (MS_NxSTM1) .......................................................................................................533
DCCmLAPDDisconnected (MS_NxSTM1).................................................................................533
MS-UAT_Eve (MS_NxSTM1).................................................................................................533
S1-Change (MS_NxSTM1) ....................................................................................................533
MS_STM16 - STM-16 MULTIPLEX SECTION ALARMS ................................................................534
MS-AIS (MS_STM16) [LC] ........................................................................................................534
MS-RDI (MS_STM16) [LC] ........................................................................................................534
MS-EXC (MS_STM16)..........................................................................................................534
MS-DEG (MS_STM16)..........................................................................................................535
DCCmLAPDDisconnected (MS_STM16) ...................................................................................535
NXSTM1_140 - 140MBIT/S PDH INTERFACE ALARMS (4X140-155MBIT/S UNIT) ....................536
LOF (NxSTM1_140) .............................................................................................................536
LOS (NxSTM1_140) .............................................................................................................536
AIS (NxSTM1_140) [LC] ......................................................................................................536

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 24 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

EXC (NxSTM1_140) .............................................................................................................537


DEG (NxSTM1_140) .............................................................................................................537
ATL (NxSTM1_140) .............................................................................................................537
PRBS-ERR (NxSTM1_140) ...................................................................................................538
DS2 - ALARMS OF 6MBIT/S CHANNELS OF A T-MUX UNIT ......................................................538
AIS (DS2) ...........................................................................................................................538
LOF (DS2) ............................................................................................................................538
RAI (DS2) ...........................................................................................................................538
DS3 - 45MBIT/S PDH INTERFACE ALARMS..................................................................................539
LOS (DS3) ............................................................................................................................539
LOF (DS3) ............................................................................................................................539
AIS (DS3) ...........................................................................................................................539
RAI (DS3) ...........................................................................................................................540
INPUT-DEG (DS3)....................................................................................................................540
INPUT-EXC (DS3)....................................................................................................................540
IDLE-SIGNAL (DS3)................................................................................................................541
AIC-MISM (DS3) .......................................................................................................................541
RxClockFail (DS3)....................................................................................................................541
TxClockFail (DS3)....................................................................................................................542
NE-EQP-FAIL-SA (DS3).............................................................................................................542
NE-EQP-FAIL-NSA (DS3)...........................................................................................................542
NE-LOS (DS3) ......................................................................................................................543
NE-LOF (DS3) ..........................................................................................................................543
NE-HBER (DS3) .......................................................................................................................543
NE-AIS (DS3) ..........................................................................................................................543
NE-IDLE (DS3) ......................................................................................................................543
RE-EQP-FAIL-SA (DS3).............................................................................................................543
RE-EQP-FAIL-NSA (DS3)...........................................................................................................544
RE-LOS (DS3) ......................................................................................................................544
RE-LOF (DS3) ..........................................................................................................................544
RE-AIS (DS3) ..........................................................................................................................544
RE-IDLE (DS3) ......................................................................................................................545
63X2MBPDHCH - 1.5 AND 2MBIT/S PDH INTERFACE ALARMS.................................................545
TxBufferContention (63x2MbPDHCh)........................................................................................545
RxFailure (63x2MbPDHCh)....................................................................................................545
PDH-LOS (63x2MbPDHCh)....................................................................................................546
PDH-AIS (63x2MbPDHCh) [LC] .............................................................................................546
PDH-EXC (63x2MbPDHCh)....................................................................................................546
PDH-DEG (63x2MbPDHCh)....................................................................................................547
PDH-LOF (63x2MbPDHCh)....................................................................................................547
InputCRC4Mismatch (63x2MbPDHCh) .....................................................................................547
FAW-EXC (63x2MbPDHCh) [LC] .............................................................................................548
PDH-RAI (63x2MbPDHCh) [LC] .............................................................................................548
TxFail (63x2MbPDHCh) [LC] .................................................................................................548

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 25 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

FAW-DEG (63x2MbPDHCh) [LC] .............................................................................................548


OutgoingPDH-LOF (63x2MbPDHCh) [LC] .................................................................................549
OutgoingCRC4Mismatch (63x2MbPDHCh) [LC] .........................................................................549
OutgoingPDH-AIS (63x2MbPDHCh) [LC]...................................................................................550
OutgoingCRC4EXC (63x2MbPDHCh) [LC] .................................................................................550
OutgoingCRC4DEG (63x2MbPDHCh) [LC] ................................................................................550
4X34MBPDHCH - 34MBIT/S T-MUX PDH INTERFACE ALARMS.................................................551
PDH-LOS (4x34MbPDHCh)....................................................................................................551
PDH-AIS (4x34MbPDHCh) [LC] .............................................................................................551
PDH-EXC (4x34MbPDHCh)....................................................................................................551
PDH-DEG (4x34MbPDHCh)....................................................................................................552
PDH-LOF (4x34MbPDHCh)....................................................................................................552
TxFail (4x34MbPDHCh) [LC] .................................................................................................552
PDH-RAI (4x34MbPDHCh) [LC] .............................................................................................553
PDH-INClockFail (4x34MbPDHCh) [LC] ....................................................................................553
3X34_45MB_VC3 - LOW ORDER VC ALARMS (3X34_45MB_VC3) ............................................553
LOP (3x34_45Mb_VC3) .........................................................................................................553
AIS (3x34_45Mb_VC3) [LC] ..................................................................................................554
FERF (3x34_45Mb_VC3) [LC] ..............................................................................................554
EBER (3x34_45Mb_VC3).....................................................................................................555
DEG (3x34_45Mb_VC3) .........................................................................................................555
PLM (3x34_45Mb_VC3) .........................................................................................................555
TIM (3x34_45Mb_VC3) .........................................................................................................556
UNEQ (3x34_45Mb_VC3).....................................................................................................556
V4-FAIL_A (3x34_45Mb_VC3).............................................................................................556
V4-FAIL_B (3x34_45Mb_VC3).............................................................................................556
34 AND 45MBIT/S PDH INTERFACE ALARMS (3X34_45MBPDHCH) .........................................557
RxBufferContention (3x34_45MbPDHCh) .................................................................................557
PDH-LOS (3x34_45MbPDHCh) .............................................................................................557
PDH-AIS (3x34_45MbPDHCh) [LC].......................................................................................558
PDH-EXC (3x34_45MbPDHCh) .............................................................................................558
PDH-DEG (3x34_45MbPDHCh) .............................................................................................558
PDH-LOF (3x34_45MbPDHCh) .............................................................................................558
PDH-45Mb-LOMF (3x34_45MbPDHCh) ...................................................................................559
PDH-TxFail (3x34_45MbPDHCh) ..........................................................................................559
PDH-INClockFail (3x34_45MbPDHCh) ....................................................................................560
45MbYellowSignal (3x34_45MbPDHCh) ...................................................................................560
45MbIdleSignal (3x34_45MbPDHCh) ......................................................................................560
VIRTUAL CONCATENATED ALARM ..............................................................................................561
HP-TIM (VC4_4V)....................................................................................................................561
LOM (VC4_4V)........................................................................................................................561
HP-RDI (VC4_4V)....................................................................................................................561
AU-AIS (VC4_4V)....................................................................................................................562
HP-DEG (VC4_4V) ...............................................................................................................562

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 26 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

HP-EXC (VC4_4V) ...............................................................................................................562


HP-UNEQ (VC4_4V) ...............................................................................................................563
TC-ISF (VC4_4V)....................................................................................................................563
TC-UNEQ (VC4_4V) ...............................................................................................................563
TC-DEG (VC4_4V) ...............................................................................................................564
TC-EXC (VC4_4V) ...............................................................................................................564
HO-V4-FAIL_A (VC4_4V) .......................................................................................................565
HO-V4-FAIL_B (VC4_4V) .......................................................................................................565
HO-LOM_VCnV (VC4_4V).......................................................................................................565
HO-SQM_VCnV (VC4_4V) ......................................................................................................565
HO-LOA_VCnV (VC4_4V) .......................................................................................................566
HO-LOA_RecVCnV (VC4_4V).................................................................................................566
HO-INC_J1_MismVCnV (VC4_4V)..........................................................................................566
HO-UneqMtx (VC4_4V) ...........................................................................................................567
HP-TIM (VC4_16V)..................................................................................................................567
LOM (VC4_16V)......................................................................................................................567
HP-RDI (VC4_16V)..................................................................................................................568
AU-AIS (VC4_16V)..................................................................................................................568
HP-DEG (VC4_16V) .............................................................................................................569
HP-EXC (VC4_16V) .............................................................................................................569
HP-UNEQ (VC4_16V) .............................................................................................................569
TC-ISF (VC4_16V)..................................................................................................................570
TC-UNEQ (VC4_16V) .............................................................................................................570
TC-DEG (VC4_16V) .............................................................................................................570
TC-EXC (VC4_16V) .............................................................................................................571
HO-V4-FAIL_A (VC4_16V) .....................................................................................................571
HO-V4-FAIL_B (VC4_16V) .....................................................................................................572
HO-LOM_VCnV (VC4_16V).....................................................................................................572
HO-SQM_VCnV (VC4_16V) ....................................................................................................572
HO-LOA_VCnV (VC4_16V) .....................................................................................................573
HO-LOA_RecVCnV (VC4_16V)...............................................................................................573
HO-INC_J1_MismVCnV (VC4_16V)........................................................................................573
HO-UneqMtx (VC4_16V) .........................................................................................................574
CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ALARM SOURCE TYPE AND CARD TYPE...........................574
TROUBLE SHOOTING BLOCK DIAGRAMS...................................................................................576
Data Interconnection Diagram (DXC 4/1).......................................................................................578
Data Interconnection Diagram (DXC 4/4 512x512) .......................................................................586
Synchronization Distribution Diagram (DXC 4/1 128x128 - DXC 4/1 256x256 - DXC 4/1 512x512)588
Synchronization Distribution Diagram (DXC 4/4 512x512)............................................................589
Synchronization Distribution Diagram (DXC 4/1 32x32) ................................................................590
Control Architecture Diagram (DXC 4/1 128x128 - DXC 4/1 256x256 - DXC 4/1 512x512) ........591
Control Architecture Diagram (DXC 4/4 512x512) .........................................................................592
Control Architecture Diagram (DXC 4/1 32x32) .............................................................................593
TROUBLE SHOOTING PROCEDURES ..........................................................................................594

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 27 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

Unit Internal Fault Trouble Shooting Procedure.............................................................................594


Bit Error Rate Trouble Shooting Procedure....................................................................................594
Database Failure Trouble Shooting Procedure (DXC 4/4) ............................................................597
Database Failure Trouble Shooting Procedure (DXC 4/1) ............................................................598

DATA DICTIONARY & MESSAGES.................................................................................. 600


OPERATIVE STATES .......................................................................................................................600
Administr. State...............................................................................................................................600
Availability State..............................................................................................................................600
Active Bank .....................................................................................................................................601
Boot EPROM Software Details.......................................................................................................601
Bank 1 Software Details..................................................................................................................601
Bank 2 Software Details..................................................................................................................601
Unit ID..............................................................................................................................................601
Matrix Unit ID...................................................................................................................................602
Controller & Timing Units ID ...........................................................................................................602
Unit Type - Control & Timing Subrack ............................................................................................603
Unit Type - Matrix Subrack .............................................................................................................604
Unit Type - Port Subrack.................................................................................................................604
Cross-connection Channel Role.....................................................................................................606
Conf. State ......................................................................................................................................608
Connected Unit ...............................................................................................................................608
Conn.ed Subrack ............................................................................................................................608
From Side........................................................................................................................................608
Line Id..............................................................................................................................................609
Loopback State ...............................................................................................................................609
Mapping Loopback State ................................................................................................................609
Monitor Status .................................................................................................................................609
Num. of Tribut..................................................................................................................................610
Num.................................................................................................................................................610
Operational State ............................................................................................................................610
Path Protection................................................................................................................................610
Protection Mode ..............................................................................................................................611
Switching Commands .....................................................................................................................611
Protection Role................................................................................................................................611
Protection Status.............................................................................................................................612
Protection Type ...............................................................................................................................614
Report Note.....................................................................................................................................616
Report Type ....................................................................................................................................617
SDH Traffic Type.............................................................................................................................618
SUBRACK ID ..................................................................................................................................618
To Side ............................................................................................................................................618
X Connection Kind ..........................................................................................................................619
Signal Type .....................................................................................................................................619

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 28 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

Subrack Type ..................................................................................................................................619


Standby State..................................................................................................................................620
Synch Source..................................................................................................................................620
ALARMS ............................................................................................................................................621
Alarm Sources.................................................................................................................................621
Alarms Category .............................................................................................................................625
Alarms States..................................................................................................................................626
Alarms Types ..................................................................................................................................626
PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT ...................................................................................................627
COMPLIANCE MESSAGES .............................................................................................................627
ERROR MESSAGES ........................................................................................................................638
WARNING MESSAGES....................................................................................................................642

COMMUNICATION.............................................................................................................. 644
COMMUNICATION: BACKUP AND RESTORE ..............................................................................645
COMMUNICATION: OSI RESET DEFAULT....................................................................................645
COMMUNICATION: SET GLOBAL PARAMETERS........................................................................645
Communication: routing mode........................................................................................................646
Communication: ethernet parameters ............................................................................................646
Communication: router parameters................................................................................................649
COMMUNICATION: SETTING INTERNAL CIRCUIT STATE .........................................................651
COMMUNICATION: CONFIGURING DCC ......................................................................................651
COMMUNICATION: ENABLING.......................................................................................................655
STATIC ROUTE.................................................................................................................................655
RAP Table.......................................................................................................................................655
MESA Table ....................................................................................................................................656
MESA Range Table ........................................................................................................................656
Communication: add RAP ..............................................................................................................658
Communication: add MESA ...........................................................................................................660
Communication: add MESA/RANGE .............................................................................................661
Communication: delete RAP/MESA...............................................................................................662
COMMUNICATION: DCC PROFILES CONFIGURATION..............................................................662
Communication: manage DCC profile............................................................................................663
COMMUNICATION: ETHERNET PROFILES CONFIGURATION ..................................................665
Communication: manage ethernet profile ......................................................................................666
COMMUNICATION: ROUTER PROFILES CONFIGURATION ......................................................668
Communication: manage router profile ..........................................................................................669
COMMUNICATION: TRANSPORT PROFILES CONFIGURATION ...............................................671

EM DATABASE: MANAGING DXC................................................................................... 673


EM DATABASE: UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING............................................................................673
EM DATABASE: PASSING THROUGH MODE...............................................................................675
EM DATABASE: CHECKING ALIGNMENT .....................................................................................676
ISSUE OF EM MESSAGES TOWARDS THE NES.........................................................................676

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 29 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
GENERAL INDEX

PORT LABEL MANAGEMENT .........................................................................................................677

HOW TO............................................................................................................................... 680


CONFIGURATIONS ..........................................................................................................................680
Commission the System .................................................................................................................680
Configure the Synchronization........................................................................................................683
Configure Communication Parameter ............................................................................................684
Manage Cross-Connections ...........................................................................................................685
Manage Alarms...............................................................................................................................685
Configure Performance Monitoring.................................................................................................686
HOW TO SELECT OBJECTS ........................................................................................................687
How To Print Information ................................................................................................................689
How To Select a File.......................................................................................................................691
How to save the alarm log files in word format...............................................................................691

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 30 Book Contents
Issue:1
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

This Chapter describes the type of symbols and conventions that have been used in describing the
Local Controller software.

INTRODUCTION
Contents of handbook
The Local Operator's Handbook describes the operating procedures used for accessing options
available for managing the DXC.

Conventions used in this handbook


<Key> Indicates that a key must be pressed to execute the action currently discussed in the text,
e.g.: <Return> means that the Return key must be pressed. This type of convention is used within
the text.
The symbol * followed by text indicates an action that must be performed by the Operator. For
example.
* Select option SEARCH.
Indicates that the Operator must select the option SEARCH on the menu displayed.
The [LC] symbol indicates that the relevant option is available only for the Local Controller Application
and it can not be managed by the Network Management Centre. The [NM] symbol indicates that the
relevant option is available for the Network Management Centre only.

HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The Local Controller can be supplied either for use in a Windows NT based system or a Unix based
system. In the following text, the hardware requirements for both platforms are presented.

Hardware Platform
The application operates on Personal Computers with the following suggested configuration:
For a Desktop following requirement must be housed:
Processor Intel PENTIUM or Celeron 233 MHz
Display 17 1024x768 SVGA (256 colour)
Graphic Card SVGA GRAPHICAL ADAPTER 1024x768 resolution 256 colors with
external output
Memory 64Mbytes (minimum) for Unix Operating System or 128Mbytes
(suggested) for Windows NT, 2000 Operating System
Hard disk 1 GIGABYTES HARD DISK (minimum)
Floppy disk 3.5" FLOPPY DISK DRIVER
Others disk CD ROM Drive
External ports n. 1 SERIAL INTERFACE RS232 (9 pin, at least 19200 bps)

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

Interfaces: - one parallel port (Centronics) for the printer


- one RS232 serial port for the mouse (if the mouse does not have a
dedicated port)
- one dedicated RS232 serial port for the connection to the DXC
- one Ethernet Card (suggested SMC 8003 or 8013 series) if the
connection of the Local Controller via Q interface is needed. (for Unix
O.S. only)
Input / Output - Printer
device
- Keyboard
- Mouse
For a NOTEBOOK PC the following requirement must be housed:
Processor PENTIUM (minimum 120Mhz) or Celeron (minimum 233Mhz)
Display 10" COLOR MONITOR (resolution 800x600)
Graphic Card SVGA GRAPHICAL ADAPTER 1024x768 resolution 256 colors with
external output
Memory 32 MBYTES RAM (minimum) - 64 Mb recommended
Hard disk 1 GIGABYTES HARD DISK (minimum)
Floppy disk 3.5" FLOPPY DISK DRIVER
Others disk CD ROM Drive
External ports n. 1 SERIAL INTERFACE RS232 (9 pin, at least 19200 bps)
n. 1 PARALLEL INTERFACE
Input device TRACKBALL (OR MICROSOFT MOUSE)
keyboard US/GB KEYBOARD

SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The Local Controller can be supplied for a Unix based system or for a Windows NT / 2000 based
system. In the following text, the software requirements for both platforms are presented separately.

Local Controller for Unix Operating System


The following programs have to be installed on the Personal Computer:
n SCO/Unix ODT Lite rel. 3.x or SCO/Unix Open Server rel. 5.x
n SCO/RETIX LT-610 version 2.31 (only if the Remote Login via Q interface is required); this
software works coupled with SCO/Unix ODT Lite rel. 3.0

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 32 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

Local Controller for Windows NT Operating System


The following programs have to be installed on the Personal Computer:
n Windows NT Version 4.0 (Workstation or Server);
n X-NutCracker v. 2.1.315 or equivalent X-Window emulator;
n X-NutCracker RunTime Library rel. 3.0 (user distribution version 1.3 is recommended).

IMPORTANT If you do not use X-NutCraker but an equivalent emulator, ensure that the X-
Window emulator is active after the system start-up.

Local Controller for Windows 2000 Operating System


The following programs have to be installed on the Personal Computer:
n Windows 2000
n X-Nut Cracker rel. 3.0
n Exceed rel. 6.2

IMPORTANT If you do not use X-NutCraker but an equivalent emulator, ensure that the X-
Window emulator is active after the system start-up.

NOTICE Exceed rel 6.2 has only been tested under Windows 2000.

Year 2000
Be sure that the software installation is 100% year 2000 compliant. Contact SCO (www.SCO.com)
or MICROSOFT (www.microsoft.com) for the latest news about their products.
In the following the proper patches are listed:
n Windows NT 4.0: Service Pack 4.0
n SCO 3.0: UOD426D
n SCO 5.0.0: OSS603A
n SCO 5.0.2/5.0.4: OSS601A
n SCO 5.0.5: No patches

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION OF THE PC TO THE EQUIPMENT


Personal Computer Installation
The PC should be installed in accordance with the manufacturers installation instructions.

INSTALLATION OF SOFTWARE PLATFORM


Unix Operating System with OSF/MOTIF
The Personal Computer must be configured by means of System-Setup procedure in accordance
with the computer installation manual before installing SCO.
SCO is installed as described in the SCO Installation Handbook. Different configurations are
possible, depending on the type of available devices (monitor, keyboard, mouse).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 33 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

Starting Up the UNIX System


* Switch on the monitor and then switch on the computer.
* After the prompt, the following messages are displayed:
SCO System V/386
BOOT
...
...
<Return>
* After prompt:
INIT SINGLE USER MODE
Type CONTROL-d to proceed with normal startup,
(or give root password for system maintenance):<Ctrl-D>
* After prompt:
Current System Time ...
Enter New Time ([yymmdd]hhmm):<Return>
* After login prompt:
login: root<Return>
password:
Configuring a Printer
A printer must be configured in Unix in order to print reports from the Local Controller. The printer is
connected to the parallel port (/dev/ip0); use the sysadmsh command to create the printer (refer
to the SCO Unix Handbook for a detailed description of the installation).

Retix LT610
Install LT610 following the instructions given with the Retix documentation.

Windows NT / 2000 Operating System


Install Windows NT / 2000 following the instructions given within the Microsoft Windows NT /2000
documentation. Different configurations are possible, depending on the type of available devices
(monitor, keyboard, mouse).
Configuring a printer
A printer must be configured in order to print reports from the Local Controller. The printer is
connected to the parallel port LPT1.
To configure the printer use the following menu of Windows NT / 2000: Start -> Settings -> Control
Panel -> [Printers] -> [Add Printer]
Refer to the Windows NT / 2000 handbook and to the printer documentation for a detailed
description both of the procedure and of the parameters to be set.

X-NutCracker
Install the X-NutCracker emulator for X-Window on the Windows NT / 2000 platform, follow the
installation rules given with the NutCracker and the Windows NT / 2000 documentation.
Note X-NutCracker emulator is included in the installation CD ROM of the Local Controller.
It is suggested to select the Express Installation model when requested by the X-
NutCracker installation procedure.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 34 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

IMPORTANT If the Nutcracker libraries are installed into a PC where Windows NT 4.0 Service
Pack 6 is loaded, the system can not use these libraries and a Fatal Error
window will appear. To solve this problem the Operating System must be
installed in manual mode, and the NutCracker libraries have to be loaded before
the Service Pack 6. You have not this problem if you have another Service Pack
(e.g. SP 4) and after installing the NutCracker libraries you upgrade the Service
Pack.

INSTALLATION OF LOCAL CONTROLLER


In the following the installation procedure for the Local Controller, both for SCO/Unix and Windows
NT / 2000 operating systems, are given. In both cases the installation of the Local Controller is
supported by a specific installation program.

Local Controller for SCO/Unix


The Local Controller application is an OSF MOTIF application completely compatible with OSF
MOTIF Style Guide. It is integrated into SCO Open Desktop and can be installed using the Unix
standard environment.
The installation procedure must be performed by the system administrator of the Unix Operating
System (root).
To activate the automatic boot procedure, after the starting up of the PC, type at the system prompt
the following command: unix auto.

Users and Directories


The figure below shows the organization of directories of the Local Controllers environment.

The directory /u/DXC41_XY/script contains the C-shell script necessary for the correct running of
the local controller application, which are added to the users .Xdefaults.<hostname> file used by
the LC application.
The directory /u/DXC41_XY/DM_script contains the Desktop shell script necessary to start the LC
process from the Desktop Manager and the LC_r X.Y icon file.
All the executable files are contained in the /u/DXC41_XY/exe.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 35 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

The databases are contained in the /u/DXC41_XY/exe/DB directory.


The OSI configuration files are contained in the /u/DXC41_XY/exe/OSI_cnf directory.
The /u/DXC41_XY/exe/BM directory contains all the bitmaps displayed by the LC application.
The log application errors file LC_LOG is stored is in the <user home directory>/log sub-directory.
The file soft_ver_dxc.cnf copied in the authorized users home directory by the installation
procedure, list the unit software releases compatible with the current equipment release. It is read
when the Local Controller issues the command: System - > Check SW Release
Note After a release upgrading, remind to update the file soft_ver_dxc.cnf (for further
information refer to the Equipment Manual, section "Release Upgrading").
The English catalogue files are contained in the /u/DXC41_XY/exe/EngCat directory.
The Italian catalogue files are contained in the /u/DXC41_XY/exe/ItaCat directory.
The osi_set.msg file, which is copied in the OSI_cnf sub-directory of the Local Controller
authorized user, contains the list of the OSI files that must be sent to the Communication Unit to set
the OSI protocol configuration parameters.
When the local Controller start-up procedure fails, open the file LC_LOG by double clicking on the
corresponding icon in the log sub-directory window.

Installation Procedure for SCO/Unix


The installation procedure is based on the custom facility and it consists of the following steps:
* Configuration of the Local Controller user in Unix Operative System.
* Configuration of RS232 connections.
* Installation of the Local Controller application files.
Configure a New LC User for SCO Lite Rel. 3.0
In the following the user YYYY is added as a new Local Controllers user. His account must be
created using the procedure below:
* Login as root.
* Run the sysadmsh command.
* Select Accounts -> User -> Create
Username : [YYYY ]
Comment : [ ............]
Modify defaults? Yes
and in the next mask:
Login group : Default
Login shell : Specify
[/bin/csh ]
Home directory : Default (or specify)
[ Create home ]
User ID number : Default
Type of user : Default
and at the end confirm the creation. After the creation define the password for the user.
* Exit the sysadmsh shell pressing the <F2> key.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 36 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

Configure a New LC User for SCO Open Server Rel. 5.0


In the following the user YYYY is added as a Local Controllers new user. His account must be
created using the procedure below:
* Login as root.
* Start the Desktop Manager with the command startx
* Choose the System Administrator icon
* Choose the Account Manager
* Choose Users -> Add new user from the menu bar
Login : [YYYY ]
Comment : [ ............]
Login group : Default (or specify)
Login shell : Select csh using the button on the right side
Home directory : Default (or specify)
User ID number : Default
Type of user : Default
and at the end confirm the creation. After creation define the password for the user.
* Exit the System Administrator closing all the opened windows.
Installation of the Local Controller Files
The installation procedure is based on the Unix custom facility. Since the Local Controller installation
does not overwrite the installation of previous releases the user decides to remove or to keep them.
For the de-installation procedure of previous releases refer to the related documentation. Old
releases cannot be active at the same time as the new one. The current release of the Local
Controller application runs only with the current release of the DXC Network Element.
During the installation procedure the Operator is asked to type the authorized Local Controller
application user name, created before running the installation procedure. The Local Controller user
must be different from the Local Controller user of the previous releases in order to keep the old and
the new releases.

In order to install the local controller application it is necessary to execute the


following steps.
* Login the system as root, and enter the command custom from the root home directory.
* For SCO Lite rel 3.x, select:
Install -> A New Product -> Entire Product
else for SCO Open Server rel 5.x
Software -> Install New -> from <host> -> select media -> Full Installation
* If You use floppy disk kit, insert floppy disk volume number 1 in the correct drive and
press return to continue.
The custom facility displays the information about the data compressed in the floppy disks.
* Insert all the floppy disks containing the LC software when the Unix prompt requests
them.
* If You use CD kit, select the installation directory (for further information refer to the
"readme.txt" file contained in the CD).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 37 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

At the end of the decompression procedure another procedure automatically starts in order to
control the Unix Operating System version and other environment configurations that must be set up
for the Local Controller application. If these requirements are not fulfilled the procedure fails and the
installation is aborted, conversely the content of the floppy disks is loaded.
After that all the LC files are copied from the floppy disks and the initialization procedure is
executed, it asks the operator to type the authorized LC users name, then check the presence of
the user.
When an error occurs (the user does not exist or his login shell is different from /bin/csh), the
initialization procedure asks the operator to interrupt the installation or to insert a correct user name.
The installation procedure copies the .Xdefaults-<hostname> file used by the Local Controller
application in the home directory of the authorized user. If this file already exists in the user home
directory the installation procedure copies the Local Controller default settings to the .Xdefaults-
<hostname> file, saving the old files in .Xdefaults.sav.
If the user home directory contains a .startxrc, .cshrc, .mwmrc or .login file, they are saved in
.startxrc.sav, .cshrc.sav, .mwmrc.sav, .login.sav in order to avoid conflicts with the correct start
up of the Local Controller application. The directory LC_r X.Y.obj, is created, the DXC41_LC icon
file and the Desktop shell script to start the Local Controller application from Open Desktop Window
are copied into it.
* If necessary, customize the Local Controller by configuring:
- local controller baud rate (9600,19200, 38400). Serial speed configuration must be
changed by the system administrator according to this baudrate parameter;
- monochromatic or colour screen;
- type of connection used by the local controller (See details below).
The Local Controller can be connected to the DXC via a RS232 dedicated line or using an ethernet
LAN, via Q interface. Choosing the RS232 connection type, the correct device name associated to
the configured serial port must be inserted (or the default value /dev/tty1a associated to the COM1
can be kept).
If only the COM2 serial port is available, enter the correct tty associated to the Local Controller
serial port.
For the Ethernet connection define the PC address (or keep the default one). If you define a new
address, the script will restart the OSI stack.
During this phase of the installation, the mkdev dxc41_XY command is executed. The same
command can be executed later by the system administrator to change the Local Controller
application configuration. For example to enable the Local Operator to use the Ethernet or the serial
connection alternatively, to set the colour or monochromatic monitor, to define the serial baudrate or
to choose Italian or English Local Controller application language.
A new kernel will be created and this will be used as default kernel answering Y(es) at the following
questions:
Do you want this kernel to boot by default?
Do you want the kernel environment rebuilt?
A system reboot must be performed exiting from the installation procedure.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 38 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

It is possible to exit from the installation procedure of any moment by typing Q (quit), when the
preparation or initialization script is running.
After the completion of the installation procedure it is necessary to reboot the system in order to
activate the new OS configuration tuning according to LC requirements. In order to do that it is
necessary to issue two times the command sync and then the command reboot.
Removal of the Local Controller files
In order to remove the LC application it is necessary to execute the following steps:
* Log in the system as root, and enter the command custom from the root home directory.
* Select Remove
* Select DXC41_XY LC product
* Select Entire Product
* Insert the authorized LC application user name
* Answer Y if you want remove script to delete the users file .Xdefaults.<hostname>
(modified by the local controller application installation procedure), N otherwise.
For SCO Open Server rel.5.0 select the DXC41_XY LC product before selecting the Software
Remove operation. To do so use the <tab> key to move between the menu bar and the product list,
the arrow keys to scroll the product list and the <enter> key to select the product (if you run custom
from the ScoLogin the mouse pointer can be used).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 39 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

Local Controller for Windows NT / 2000


The Local Controller application must be integrated into Windows NT / 2000 Desktop, in order to
obtain a Local Controller entry in the menu Start -> Programs. At the end of the installation
procedure the Local Controller can be activated using the following command: Start -> Programs -
> SDH Local Controllers -> LC DXC v xx.yy -> Local Controller
The installation procedure must be carefully followed, in order to properly install the Local Controller
application into the Windows NT / 2000 Desktop environment. This procedure can only be
performed by the system administrator of the Windows NT system, named Administrator.
Users and Directories
The figure below shows the organization of directories of the Local Controllers environment.

<Installation Directory> is where the SDH Local Controller is installed. The default path is:
"C:\Program Files\SDH_LC\DXC"

NOTICE In the DXC directory is installed the DataFocus NuTCracker RunTimeLib v3.0

The directory UTIL contains the Korn-Shell script and the Batch file necessary for the correct restart
of the Local Controller application if problems occur. The sub-directory CMD contains the
commands to manage text files; read/write and convert them into Unix format.
The directory EXE contains all the executable files and the desktop batch file to start the Local
Controller from the LC DXC menu.
Note Within this directory (C:\Program Files\SDH_LC\DXC\Rel<xxyy>\EXE by default) is
located the file soft_ver_dxc.cnf (to be substituted each release updating). This file is
not recognise as an internal registered file type, anyway it can be opened and
modified by means of a generic text editor (notepad or wordpad, for example).
Refer To:
Equipment Description, section "Maintenance", chapter "Release Upgrading"

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 40 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

The EXE/BM directory contains all the bitmaps displayed by the application.
The EXE/bin directory contains all the named pipes used by the application.
The EXE/log directory contains all the log files where the application errors are stored and all the
Local Controller configuration files.
The EXE/DB directory contains all the alarm log files and the archive files (history files and NE
configuration).
The EXE/Eng and the EXE/Ita directories contain the strings catalogue for English and Italian
Languages.
The OSI directory contains the OSI configuration files and the osi_set.msg file. The latter file
contains the list of the OSI files that must be sent to the Communication Unit to set the OSI protocol
configuration parameters.

Installation Procedure for Windows NT / 2000


Depending on Windows NT / 2000 security management, the suggested sequence to install the SW
module is:
1. Login the system as Administrator;
2. Define a new user account;
Note This operation is not mandatory but it is suggested in order to define an user
belonging to the "Users" group.
3. Install NuTC Xserver;
4. Install NuTC library;
5. Install DXC Local Controller;
6. At the end of the installation a computer restart is suggested.
The product can be delivered using the following media:
n floppies;
n CD ROM;
n Exe files.
Depending on the media used the DXC Local Controller installation can be different. Refer to the
appropriate procedure.

IMPORTANT In the following the [xxxx] represents the icon whose name is xxxx

Creating a New User Account


The steps described in the following allow to define a new user belonging to the "Users" group. This
operation is not mandatory.

IMPORTANT This procedure has to be performed during the installation of the Local
Controller. It is not necessary during the upgrading.

* Activate the User Manager window selecting Start -> Programs -> Administrative
Tools (Common) -> User Manager

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 41 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

* Create the New user selecting the menu User -> New User
* Enter user data (suggested user account lcdxc)

* Click on Profile

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 42 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

* Select the Local Path (i.e.: C)


* Close all the windows, pressing the OK buttons and exiting the User Manager.
Installing the NutCracker Run Time Library
IMPORTANT This procedure must be performed during the installation of the Local Controller.
It is not necessary during the upgrading.

* Insert the floppy disk labelled NutCRACKER Run Time Lib v3.0 #1 (S38-0546/01.03,
K38-0174/01.03) in the correct drive.
* Double click on [My Computer] -> [3 1/2 Floppy (A:)]
* Double click on the [setup.bat] icon.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 43 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

* The product is installed successfully only if you press: YES,OK or Next and never
CANCEL or NO. The installation wizard displays the information about the software in the
floppy diskettes and asks if you want to continue the installation. If you continue with the
installation you can see successive confirmation windows. When asked from installation
wizard, insert required floppy disks (disk n.2).
Installing the Local Controller Software from Floppies
* Insert the floppy disk labelled Local Controller num. 1 in the correct drive.
* Double click on [My Computer] -> [3 1/2 Floppy (A:)]
* Double click on the executable [Setup] icon.

* The product is installed successfully only if you press: YES, OK or Next and never
CANCEL or NO. The installation wizard displays the information about the software in the
floppy diskettes and asks if you want to continue the installation. If you continue with the
installation you can see successive confirmation windows. When asked from installation
wizard, insert required floppy disks ("Local Controller" disk from n.2 to n.5)
This operation copies some few files onto your system. Refer to "install.log" file for further
information.
* Choice Italian or English language when the procedure asks you. This installs Local
Controller language-depending files.
* At the end of the procedure remove the last floppy disk and reboot the system.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 44 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

Installing the Local Controller Software from CD ROM


* Insert the CD.
* Select the Local Controller to be installed.
The automatic installation will start.
* The product is installed successfully only if you press: YES, OK or Next and never
CANCEL or NO. The installation wizard displays the information about the software in the
floppy diskettes and asks if you want to continue the installation. If you continue with the
installation you can see successive confirmation windows.
If the automatic installation doesn't work, browse the CD, select the appropriate folder and double
click on the "setup" icon. See documentation onboard CD ROM (readme.txt) for further information.

IMPORTANT If the CD contains only the self extracting files, refer to the following " Installing
the Local Controller Software from Exe Files" procedure.

Installing the Local Controller Software from Exe Files


Having the EXE auto-extracting files (i.e. obtained from E-mail or downloaded from Web page):
* Extract all the EXE files in a temporary folder simply by clicking on them or dragging them
using the right click of the mouse.
* Open the temporary folder then double click on [setup.exe] icon.
* The product is installed successfully only if you press: YES, OK or Next and never
CANCEL or NO. The installation wizard displays the information about the software in the
floppy diskettes and asks if you want to continue the installation. If you continue with the
installation you can see successive confirmation windows.
* Delete content of temporary folder
Removal of the Local Controller Files
In order to remove a specific version of the LC application it is necessary:
* Make sure the application is not running.
* Double click on [My Computer] -> [Control Panel] -> [Add/Remove Program] icon.
* Double click on "SDH LC DXC v.xxyy" item.
The same result can be obtained using the menu:
[Start] -> [Programs] -> [SDH Local Controllers] -> [DXC v.xxyy] -> [Uninstall]
Removal of the NutCracker Files
In order to remove NutCracker application it is necessary:
* Make sure the application is not running.
* Double click on [My Computer] -> [Control Panel] -> [Add/Remove Program] icon.
* Double click on "NutCracker" item.
NutCracker is active at the computer startup then some in use file will not be removed by the
uninstall facility. To delete them the Operator has to:
* Perform a computer restart
(the application has been removed then is not started).
* Delete manually the following files:
- nutconf.cpl

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 45 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

- X11.dll
- ncmsgs.dll
- nutc.dll
- nutcom.dll
- socket.dll
- dxelmsgs.dll
How to Install Add-On Files
The following modules can be added to the product:
n Nationalisation,
n Equipment downloadable files.
These modules are delivered as self-extracting files.

To install the self extracting files:


Follow the procedure described in: Installing the Local Controller Software from Exe Files

Customizing the LC Configuration for SCO/Unix Version


Configuration of the RS232 Serial Port
Current configuration of the serial lines of the UNIX system can be checked and modified by the
system administrator. The following procedure describes how to configure a new serial board.
* Login the system as root and enter the command mkdev serial (A list of the currently
configured serial line ports is displayed).
* If needed, define a new serial line selecting the option Install a new serial board.
* Answer the following questions as described:
Would you like to install:
1. one port card
The card is configured as:
1. COM1
or
2. COM2
Choose the number relevant to the card to be configured
Which card do you have:
1. IBM-COM2
Please enter the baud rate to be used on the modem device :
<baudrate>
The following /etc/gettydefs (F) entries support <baudrate> baud
lines:
1. <baudrate> (where baudrate must be 9600 - 19200 - 38400)
Choose the baudrate 9600bit/s
Modify the system file ? yes

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 46 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

* Relink the kernel and run the new one issuing two times the command sync and then the
command reboot
Utility mkdev
Current configuration of the Local Controller can be checked and modified by the system
administrator. The following procedure describes how to set a new configuration.
1. Login as root.
2. If you are in graphic mode, open a UNIX shell.
3. Digit the command:
mkdev dxc41_<LC version>
Example:
mkdev dxc41_63
4. Follow the program instructions to configure the parameters:
- baud rate (9600 bit/s)
- monitor (monochromatic or colour)
- serial interfaces tty1a (COM1) or tty2a (COM2)
- language (English or Italian)

Customizing the LC Configuration for Windows NT / 2000 Version


Utility Tools
IMPORTANT Use of these tools is recommended only to a skilled operator.

The following tools are available selecting the menu:


Start -> Programs -> LOCAL CONTROLLERS -> UTILITY
1. SET_ENVVAR: Edits envvar.bat file in order to set some environmental values.

IMPORTANT If wrong values are set, Local Controller will not work properly.
A copy of the previous envvar.bat file is available as envvar.bak.

2. TAIL: Dragging a text file over this icon, it displays the last rows of the file, while they are
written (like the tail f Unix command).
3. ALARMTAIL: Performs tail operation over alarm.dat file.
Note Only for expert users or Marconi personnel.
4. EDIT: This is the old edit of the DOS system. It can read a UNIX file dragging a unix-formatted
text file on its icon. After the save command, the editor automatically produces a the file in
DOS format.
5. DOS2UNIX: If You want export a file in Unix format, dragging it over this icon. Your file will be
reformatted in Unix mode and Unix computer will be able to read this.
6. README: shows the readme.txt file.
Setting the Language of the LC
At every time, after installation, you can change selected language, simply by click [Set Italian] or
[Set English] icons from Start menu ([Start] -> [Programs] -> [SDH Local Controllers] -> [DXC
v.xxyy] -> [Set English / Italian]). If it doesn't work, try to execute "ita.bat" and "eng.bat" files in a

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 47 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

"DOS shell" window. The files are located in the selected installation directory: by default it's
C:\Program Files\SDH_LC\DXC\rel<xxyy>
Configuration of the RS232 Serial Port
The default serial line is COM2; if it is necessary to use another COM the operator will have to open,
by an ASCII editor (like notepad), the file envvar.bat in the local controller directory EXE; then he
must look for the row set TTY_A_NAME=COM2 and change it consequently (i.e. set
TTY_A_NAME=COM1).
* Activate the window for port configuration. double clicking on [My Computer] -> [Control
Panel] -> [Ports]

* Set the correct values for the COM2 serial port by pressing the button Settings
* Set the Baud Rate to 9600, the Data Bits to 8, the Parity to None, the Stop Bits to
1, the Flow Control to None, as shown in the following picture.

* Close all the windows, pressing the OK and Close buttons.


Setting the Screen Resolution
Make sure you have a sufficient screen resolution (we suggest a 256-colour - 1024x768 pixel
resolution). To set this parameter select [My Computer] -> [Control Panel] -> [Display] and the
Settings option.
If you cannot use a 1024x768 resolution we strongly recommend at least a 800x600 resolution. In
such case select the option Always on top in the Taskbar Property menu.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 48 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

Connect the Personal Computer to the Equipment


The DXC can be connected to the Personal Computer in two different ways:
n Using the serial port (F interface)
n Using the Communication Unit through the Q interface. (Only for the Local Controller
based on Unix O.S.)
F Interface
The connection of the equipment to the PC can be obtained using the serial port 1 (COM1; tty1a) or
serial port 2 (COM2; tty2a).
Information relevant to the assignment of the serial ports is given in the PC Operating Instruction
Manual. The PC serial interface must be connected to the F interface connector of the DXC 4/1
128x128, DXC 4/1 256x256, DXC 4/4 512x512, DXC 4/4 1024x1024 (Fig. 1) or DXC 4/1 32x32
(Fig. 2).
The cable and the connectors used in order to prepare the PC cable for the F interface, together
with the relevant cabling instructions, are described in the Equipment Manual in Section 2
Installation.
Q Interface
The connection via Q interface (Remote Login) can be used only if the Personal Computer is
equipped with an ethernet card and the software for the management of the OSI communication
(Retix LT610) has been installed.
Connection is made by means of an ethernet cable connecting the ethernet interface of the
Personal Computer to the BNC connector (10 BASE 2) available on the front panel of the
Communication Unit of the DXC (Fig. 3).
There is also available a 10 BASE 5 interface that can be activated using hardware settings on the
Communication Unit (Fig. 1, Fig. 2 and Fig. 3).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 49 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

Fig. 1 Connection of the Personal Computer to


DXC 4/1 128x128, DXC 4/1 256x256, DXC 4/4
512x512, DXC 4/4 1024x1024

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 50 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

Fig. 2 Connection of the Personal Computer to


DXC 4/1 32x32

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 51 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

Fig. 3 Connection of the Personal Computer to the


DXC via Q Interface (10 BASE 2)

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 52 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

Connect Personal Computer to a Printer


The printer should be connected to parallel port 1 (UNIT 0; dev/lp0 for the Unix operating System) of
the PC (see Fig. 1 and Fig. 2). Information about the assignment of the ports can be found in the PC
Operating Instructions.
The parallel (Centronics) interface on the printer has to be used. Check whether the printer interface
is correctly configured. Information about this can be found in the operating instructions for the
printer.
Connection Centronics cable (commercial).
Assignment Centronics standard.

IMPORTANT The printer must be configured before being accessed. Instructions to configure
the printer under Unix or Windows NT operating systems can be found in the
respective documentation.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 53 Book Contents
Issue:1
USERS INTERFACE

WORKING AREA
The OSF/Motif Desktop forms the LC work area. The organisation of the facilities offered by the
desktop can be divided into four basic areas (Fig. 4):
1. Main Menu: which makes available all the options of LC.
2. Selection Window: used to select subracks and units.
3. Dialog Box: used to write or read data.
4. Real Time Monitor Window: used to alarm and event monitoring.
Main Menu

Selection Window

Dialog Box

Real Time Monitoring Window

Fig. 4 LC Working Area

Each operation opens a window in the Working Area displaying the data relevant to the operation.
More than one window can be opened on the Working Area depending on the type of operation to
be executed.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
USERS INTERFACE

How to Move a Window in the Working Area


Since more than one window can be opened in the Working Area it can be necessary to move a
window in order to display information which are hidden by other windows.

To move a window proceed as follows:


* Position the mouse on the Title Bar of the window (Fig. 5).
* Click the left-hand button of the mouse and drag the window to the new position.

Fig. 5 Move Window: 1 step

* Release mouse button when You are in the desired position. The window has been
moved to the new position (Fig. 6).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 55 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
USERS INTERFACE

Fig. 6 Move Window: 2 step

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 56 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
USERS INTERFACE

How to Move a Window to the Front


When many windows are displayed on the Working Area can be necessary to access a window that
is not completely displayed.

To move a window proceed as follows:


* Position the mouse on one (visible) border of the window (Fig. 7) which is back.
* Click the left-hand button of the mouse. The window is moved to the front (Fig. 8).

Fig. 7 Move a window to the front: 1 step

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 57 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
USERS INTERFACE

Fig. 8 Move a window to the front: 2 step

Menu Selection
In each Selection Window is available an option bar (Menu Selection) containing the options which
are made available after an object selection.

Options can be selected using the mouse.


Only options available for the current action can be selected (options not selectable are greyed).
The option File-Exit is used to close the Selection Window and return to the main menu.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 58 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
USERS INTERFACE

Information Boxes
Selection Windows contains some areas (Information Boxes) where are displayed information
about the operational states of the objects shown.

Normally the operational states are displayed using a scroll box (the information displayed can be
scrolled up or down using the scroll-bar). The information are read-only and no modifications can be
made.

Also the lists are considered as Information Boxes which are used to display the status of the
object which is going to be selected.
There are many different operational states available for the Information Boxes depending on the
action to be performed (e.g.: Equipment Commissioning, Alarms, etc.).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 59 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
USERS INTERFACE

DIALOG BOXES
A menu command opens a Dialog Box. A dialog box is a convenient way to view and set multiple
options.
When youre selecting options in dialog boxes, you work with seven basic types of on screen
controls: command buttons, lists, pull-down options, sliders, arrow buttons, text boxes and card
active alarm buttons.
Text boxes Card Active Alarm Push Button

Lists Scroll bar

Pull-down options

Text box
Command buttons
Slider

Arrow button

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 60 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
USERS INTERFACE

Command Buttons

The dialog boxes in the example have two command buttons: APPLY and CLOSE. If you choose
APPLY, LC will execute the command using the data entered. If you choose CLOSE the dialog box
is put away (nothing changes and no action occurs).
Lists

Information can be displayed in a list. List can be scrolled using a scroll bar if the contents do not fit
in the space provide (see also Scroll-bars).
Pull-Down Options

A pull-down option makes available a list of fixed values for a certain field.

To select a value:
* Position the mouse on the pull-down option (e.g.: System Oscillator Frequency (38.88
MHz)).
* Click the left-hand mouse button.
* Choose the desired option and confirm by clicking again.

Sliders

In this case positioning the cursor on the bar, pressing the left-hand button of the mouse and sliding
the mouse can modify data values.
The value of the field will be one reached when the button is released. The value is indicated in the
text box near to the slider.
Arrow Buttons

The arrow button is used to increase or decrease a numerical value that is displayed in a text box
near the arrow itself.
To modify the value click with the left-hand mouse button on the up arrow (to increase) or on the
down arrow (to decrease).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 61 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
USERS INTERFACE

Text Boxes

There are two different types of text boxes: read-only text box and keyboard input text box.
A read-only text box is used to display a value (the Operator cannot modify or type data in these
types of boxes).
In the case of a keyboard input text box the data are entered by position the mouse onto the
specific field and clicking the left-hand mouse button. A cursor will appear and the Operator can type
the desired value.

Card Active Alarm Push Button

This facility displays the list of the active alarms detected in the selected unit/ subrack.
See Also:
Alarms: displaying subrack active alarms, Active Alarms: displaying unit active
alarms

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 62 Book Contents
Issue:1
STARTING LOCAL CONTROLLER

This Chapter describes the procedures for starting the SDH Local Controller.

SCO/UNIX VERSION
* Login as Local Controller User
Username:
Password:
The SCO Login can be enabled or disabled.
If SCO Login is disabled the user must log into the system and then must type the command startx
to start the Desktop Manager.

* Double-click on the authorised users directory icon of the Local Controller (e.g.
DXC41_XY).
* Double-click on the LC_r X.Y icon (where X.Y is the current release of the Local
Controller).
The SDH Local Controller Main menu will be displayed.
Troubleshooting
The following advices can be used whenever there are problems in the installation or starting up of
the Local Controller.
Installing the Local Controller, after activating the installation of the Local Controllers files
(Software menu of the custom application), nothing happens.
Wait. In some computers (notebook) the identification of the floppy disk driver as a media for the
installation can take some minutes.
At the end of the installation procedure, a warning message about a validation error appears.
Dont worry about this message. The installation procedure modifies some files to make them
compatible with the Local Controller: this causes a failure in their integrity check.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
STARTING LOCAL CONTROLLER

WINDOWS NT / 2000 VERSION


After the installation, the Local Controller is initialized with default values in the NE configuration file.
If changes in the default values are needed, follow the first starting up procedure.

IMPORTANT Be sure that the X-Window emulator is already installed and active at the system
start-up

Starting Up Procedure
* Login the system as Local Controller user (if created).
* Start the Local Controller selecting
Start -> Programs -> SDH Local Controllers -> DXC v.xxyy -> Local Controller
* When a black DOS window appears, minimize it.
* Activate the Network Element Configuration window clicking on [DOMAIN] in the Local
Controller window.
* Select the DXC and modify (if needed) its NE configuration clicking on the element dxc
and selecting the menu Actions -> Modify
* Apply the modifications and close the open windows.
Reset Procedure
In case of problems during LC execution or LC crash a reset procedure can be necessary.
* Select: Start -> Programs -> SDH Local Controllers -> DXC v.xxyy -> Reset

NOTICE Use of this procedure is recommended only for skilled operator.

The reset procedure can be summarised in the following steps:


1. the procedure automatically removes some shared data;
2. the procedure asks to the Operator to close LC windows (if any);
3. Nutcracker services are stopped and then restarted;
4. The "Tune Nutcracker" window appears. Change one value and then restore it. This forces an
X-Server restart. Close windows with OK
5. Task Manager window appears. Follow the instructions and kill the LC processes. Closing the
window the procedure will finish.
Troubleshooting
The following advices can be used whenever there are problems in the installation or starting up of
the Local Controller.
You cant install the software (by CD-ROM).
The Autorun function may dont work correctly. Read the file readme.txt for more information.
After the appearing of the black initial window, nothing happens, but the sentence Cant open
display seems to appear just before the window closes.
The X-server process is probably not active. Be sure to activate the X-server before starting the
Local Controller:
a. Login the system as Administrator.
b. Press simultaneously the keys Ctrl Alt Del to enter the Windows NT / 2000 Security
window.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 64 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
STARTING LOCAL CONTROLLER

c. Select the option Task Manager.


d. Select the option Processes in the Windows NT / 2000 Task Manager window.
e. Verify that the processes NUTKSERV.EXE and NUTCXSRV.EXE are active.
f. Close the Windows NT / 2000 Task Manager window.

g. If the X-NutCracker is not active: Double click on [My Computer] -> [Control Panel] ->
[NutC] Select [Default X server] and set [Nutcracker DEV X server].
Note If you make a link to your Xserver executable in the [Startup] folder, every time the
computer starts, the Xserver will be automatically started too.
The Local Controller starts, but when you try to login the system halts.
If your PC is a Notebook (or anyway, if you dont use COM2) follow the procedure Configuration of
the RS232 Serial Port in the chapter Customizing the LC Configuration for SCO/Unix- Windows
NT / 2000 Version to modify the environment file.
If your PC has not a network connection, verify the installation of the Remote Access Services
(RAS):
a. Double click on [My Computer] -> [Control Panel] ->[Network]
b. Select Services and verify on Network Services the presence of Remote Access Service
(RAS).
c. If this option is not in the list, select [Add] -> [Remote Access Service] and the [OK]
Note During the installation, the system will ask you for a modem. Skip the automatic
research facility and select a [standard] [9600] modem configuration. The installation
requires the Windows NT / 2000 CD-ROM.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 65 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
STARTING LOCAL CONTROLLER

The Local Controller starts, but in the black window the following message appears:
X Toolkit Warning: Cannot convert string <Key>DRemove to
type VirtualBinding
Do not worry about this message.
After the installation of all the software, the Local Controller doesnt work if you are logged as lcdxc
user. The Local Controller starts only if you are logged as Administrator.
As a consequence of the security management of Windows NT / 2000, the right installation
sequence is:
a. Login as Administrator.
b. Create the lcdxc user.
c. Install the NuTC X server.
d. Install the NuTC Run Time Lib.
e. Install the Local Controller
If you already installed the software, use the following procedure to give the rights to the lcdxc user:
a. Login as Administrator.
b. Double click on [My Computer] - right click on [C:] - click on Properties.
c. In the Properties windows, click on Security and then click on Permission.
d. Select the two Replace Permission on options and then click on Add....
e. In the Add window, click on Show Users, select lcdxc and then Type of Access - Full
Control.
The F Interface Window appears almost black.
Iconize it and then re-open it.
In the [Network Element Configuration] window, strange values appear.
It happens when the NE.cnf configuration file is missing or corrupted. Dont try to delete these
values. In the first Local Controller Installation floppy disk, the default NE.cnf configuration file is
present. Copy this file in the folder: C:\Program File\SDH_LC\DXC\rel<xxYY>\EXE\Db
The Local Controller window is closed and the cursor is not able to select anything.
Probably the Local Controller has been closed using the Windows NT / 2000 button (at the top right
of the window frame). The Local Controller can be reset using the [Reset] script in the users
directory.

IMPORTANT Never use the Windows NT / 2000 button to exit the Local Controller. Use
always the [Exit] option in the Local Controllers menu [File].

Link seems to have some problems: link down, (or) sometimes it goes down without apparent reason
(or) DB upload does not correctly end.
Try to disable the FIFO buffer for the used serial interface (COM1 or COM2). This setting can be
accessed following the path: START-> Settings-> Control Panel-> [Ports]-> [Settings]->
[Advanced]-> [FIFO Enabled]

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 66 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
STARTING LOCAL CONTROLLER

LOCAL CONTROLLER MAIN WINDOW


Use this window to activate the Local Controller or to manage the Remote Login.

Monitor

Selecting the MONITOR button it is possible to access the Network Monitoring Session (e.g. for the
detection of all the Network Elements alarms). This option is not yet available.
Domain

Selecting the DOMAIN button it is possible to manage the local configuration (NEs type
configuration, NEs location and addresses) of the network elements domain.
See Also:
NEs Domain Management
NE Control

Selecting the NE CONTROL button it is possible to select a NE to start a Control Session (eg. to
change NE configuration and collect NE alarms).
See Also:
Control Session Activation

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 67 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
STARTING LOCAL CONTROLLER

Initial Printer Selection


Path (File-Print Select)
Use this option to display and select the printer used to print the information available for some
reports when displayed. This information is stored in a file so that is not necessary to perform the
printer selection each time the user logs in.

To select a printer:
* Select the printer in the list.
* Press APPLY.

Initial Printer Setup


Path (File-Printer Option)
Use this option to define the size of the font used to print the information available for some reports
when displayed.

To select the font size:


* Select the Font Size.
* Press APPLY.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 68 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
STARTING LOCAL CONTROLLER

NEs Domain Management


Use this option to manage the network elements domain (NEs type configuration, NEs location and
addresses).

Adding a New Network Element


Path (Actions-Add NE)
This option allows to create a new NE configuration with the definition of NE id. name, NE Location
and addresses.

To add a new NE:


* Enter the Network Element Name (any alphanumeric character).
* Enter the NETWORK ELEMENT LOCATION (any alphanumeric character).
* Enter the NETWORK SAP ADDRESS used to identify the equipment in the managed
network.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 69 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
STARTING LOCAL CONTROLLER

The NSAP is a globally unique address that identifies a point to which other systems can send data.
This address is divided in three different groups of information: Address Area, System Id and
Selector. The NSAP value must be the same entered in the Equipment.
The Address area can be a hexadecimal number of up to 13 bytes long (26 digits). It identifies the
area in which the equipment is inserted and must be the same of the Local Controller Personal
Computer. LC Hostsystem, and all NEs of the domain must be in the same area.
To display the PC Address area in a SCO system set in a Unix shell the command
/usr/bin/osi/nsap the PC NSAP will be displayed: the first 26 digits are the address area Id..
In Windows NT / 2000 system the way to display this information depends on the device
configuration (accessible from the Control Panel) and it changes according to the vendor software.
The System Id. is a 6 hexadecimal number string (12 digits) which identifies single equipment and
must be unique in the whole network.
Its format is user defined and can be used for example to code Exchange, floor and row of the NE
i.e.:
00 A0 AD 03 02 01

Row #1
Floor #2
Exchange #3
The Selector is an hexadecimal number (2 digits) used to define if the previous information are
related to an NSAP address (01) or to a network entity title (00).
For this reason the selector value must be always 01.

IMPORTANT NSAP must be entered the first time using Local Controller via the F interface.

* Press APPLY
See Also:
Communication: set global parameters
Reading the Network Element Configuration
Path (Actions-Get Address)
This option allows to display the NE configuration data.
Modifying the Network Element Configuration
Path (Actions-Modify)
This option allows to change the NE configuration data. The values shown are those currently in
use.

To modify the NE configuration:


* Type the new values in the proper fields.
* Press APPLY.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 70 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
STARTING LOCAL CONTROLLER

Deleting a Network Element


Path (Actions-Delete)
This option is used to remove a Network Element from the list.

To delete a Network Element:


* Select the NE to be deleted.
* Press APPLY.

Control Session Activation


Selecting the NE CONTROL button it is possible to select a local or remote NE to start a Control
Session (eg. to change NE configuration and collect NE alarms). The "Network Element
Configuration" window is displayed. Local NE is the default USER ACCESS.

Activating a Control Session on the Local NE


* Press APPLY
The system will show the login window.

* Insert the equipment username and password.


There are four different users available in the equipment:
read_user:
read only user. This user allows read operation only.
write_user:
read/write user. This user allows any equipment modifications except the supervisor user password
changing, the calibration of the oscillator in the TSU, the PLL cut frequency and the modification of
a card type for a trib. unit
Default Password: Write_user

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 71 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
STARTING LOCAL CONTROLLER

supervisor:
this user has all the rights to perform any operation.
Default Password: Supervisor
fielduser:
this user has the same rights of supervisor.
The operator to log in as fielduser has to:
- set the stand-by CCU in monitor mode (following the procedure describes in
Section 4 - Release Upgrading of the Equipment Manual);
- extract the CCU not in monitor mode;
- open a monitor session;
- check the active bank using the command "C";
- enter the command R <active bank number> (RUN).
Now it will be possible to start the LC application and log in as fielduser (with the CCU in monitor
mode).
The password is always Fielduser and can not be changed. This user can change the password
of the other two users (write_user and supervisor).
The fielduser rights can not be disabled from the Element Manager;
this user has the maximum priority.
* Press APPLY
Activating a Control Session on a Remote NE
IMPORTANT The Remote Access functionality needs the Retix LT610 software supported by
SCO Lite rel. 3.0 operating system. Windows and SCO Lite rel. 5.0 operating
system do not support Retix then LC running on this systems will not manage
this facility.

* Select, using the mouse, the Remote NE option.


* Press APPLY.
A window for Network Element selection is displayed.

* Select, using the mouse, the NE to control in the available list.


* Insert the equipment username and password at the bottom of the window.
* Select option Actions-Start.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 72 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
STARTING LOCAL CONTROLLER

Having entered the correct Username and Password the Local Controller Main Menu is displayed.
Login Password is stored into the non-volatile memories of the equipment. For security reasons only
the Operators involved in the management of the equipment should know the password.
See Also:
NEs Domain Management, Security: modifying password

SHUTTING DOWN THE COMPUTER


Before switching off the computer it is necessary to perform the shutting down procedure of the
operating system.
In the following two procedures are given: one for SCO Unix operating system and the other for
Windows NT.

SCO UNIX Shut Down Procedure


The operator must log in as root (supervisor) and must execute from a shell the command:
shutdown -g0 -i0 -y

Windows NT / 2000 Shut Down Procedure


The operator must choose the menu Start -> Shut Down and then the option Shut down the
computer
Note For further information see the operating system manual.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 73 Book Contents
Issue:1
DXC MAIN MENU

GENERAL INFORMATION
The Main Menu Window makes available all main options of Control Application. The Main Menu
Window is divided into the following parts:
n Operational feature;
n DXC messages;
n Alarm summary indication;
n Signallers;
n Other indications.

Fig. 9 DXC Main Menu (Italy)

Fig. 10 DXC Main Menu (other Countries)

Two types of indicators are available depending on the alarm scheme chosen.
See Also:
NE Model: selection

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
DXC MAIN MENU

Operational Feature
The Operational Feature are all main functions available for managing the DXC. After selection of
an option with the mouse a pull-down menu appears.
File
To quit the Control Application and configure a printer.
Equipment Configuration
To manage the configuration (subracks, units and ports), to define the equipment protections (1+1
and 1:N), to define the synchronisation, to enable/disable maintenance loops and tests and for
configuring the network addresses.
Connection Configuration
To manage the cross-connections of the equipment, to define the path protections, Tandem
Connection termination and Auxiliary Connection.
Fault
To manage the alarms (category, priority and reporting) and to display active alarms.
Performance
To manage the quality data collection.
Security
To change Users password.
System
To manage miscellaneous system functions e.g.: system restart, time, SW download, etc.
Database
To manage DXC database upload/download, to set the passing through mode and to check the
DXC database alignment [NM].

DXC Messages
In the Message Area of the Main Menu are displayed messages relevant to the type and location
of DXC.

Location Name
In this box is displayed the DXC location. This information can be written by the User during the
equipment commissioning by means of the option NE Model Setup

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 75 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
DXC MAIN MENU

Equipment Type
In this box is displayed the equipment type and matrix size: MSH96 (1024x1024), MSH91
(512x512), MSH86 (512x512), MSH84 (256x256), MSH80 (128x128) or MSH83 (32x32). This
parameter is modifiable by the User during the equipment commissioning using the option NE
Model Setup.
NE Port Mode Default
In this box is displayed the default Port Mode configuration.
Test State Indication
This field indicates if the equipment is in a Test State condition. This state can be configured by the
user and it allows to perform test on the matrix.
See Also:
Test State: management

Alarm Summary Indication


For each alarm category the status (ON/OFF) and the number of active alarms (if present) are
displayed. Indication box in the example means that 14 Not Urgent alarms are active.

As illustrated in the previous page the type of these indication boxes depends on the alarm scheme.
The meaning of these indicators (Alarm Counter) appears at the bottom of the main menu when the
mouse pointer is moved on them.

Signallers
The signallers of the Main Menu are used to display information on:
a. Current Access Rights
b. TMN Status
c. NE Status
d. Log Status
e. Interface In Use
The different icons used to display the indications are explained below:
The meaning of each signaller appears at the bottom of the main menu when the mouse pointer is
moved on the icon.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 76 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
DXC MAIN MENU

Current Access Rights


This indication represents the LC access right that can be: READ / WRITE ( I ) or READ ONLY ( II ).

TMN Status
This indication shows the conditions of connection:
The icon ( I ) means that DXC equipment is accessible by the Local Controller. If DXC is already
controlled by the TMN the icon will change (II) in order to inform the Operator that Equipment is not
accessible by the LC for modifying but only for reading.

NE Status
The online status signaller is used to display the online status of the controller unit (communication
between CCU and all the other equipment units).
The icon can be OPERATIVE ONLINE ( I ), OPERATIVE OFFLINE ( II ).
Mux Controller OFFLINE means that the Central Control Unit is not able to communicate with the
controllers composing the equipment.

Log Status
This signaller displays the status of the DXC alarm log file. Icon ( I ) means that the number of
stored alarms does not exceed the set threshold for the alarm log; Icon ( II ) means that the
maximum number of alarms has been stored in the Alarm Log file.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 77 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
DXC MAIN MENU

Interface In Use
F INTERFACE ( I ) for connection to the Personal Computer (LC) and Q INTERFACE ( II ) for
connection to the Ethernet network (TMN or Remote Login).

Other Indications
After a command is entered the Control Application starts to execute it and data are transferred
through the serial port or through the Q interface. During this operation the Command In Progress
Indicator lights on and no operation can be performed.
In the main menu lower right corner the CCU Protocol Version is displayed.

In the main menu title bar the Software version is displayed.

The meaning of indication appears at the bottom of the main menu when the mouse pointer is
moved on it.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 78 Book Contents
Issue:1
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

PRINTER: SELECTION
Path (File-Print Select) [LC]
Use this option to display and select the printer used to print the information available for some
report (e.g.: alarms). This information is stored in a file so that is not necessary to perform the printer
selection each time the user logs in.

To select a printer:
* Select the printer in the list.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
How To Print Information

NE MODEL: SELECTION
Path (Equipment Configuration-Node Setup-NE Model Setup)
This option is used to specify the type of Digital Cross-Connect (DXC) managed by the Control
Application (DXC 4/4 512x512, DXC 4/4 1024x1024, DXC 4/1 512x512, DXC 4/1 256x256, DXC
4/1 128x128, DXC 4/1 32x32).
NE model describes the hardware installed on the Controller & Timing and Matrix subracks.
It is used to:
1. Set the max number of available MTX access;
2. Set the max number of available SIO units (2 on MSH83, 6 on MSH80, 8 on MSH91, 10 on
other models);
3. Set Alarm Source types for Matrix Alarm reporting;
4. Configure Matrix subrack management;
5. Set up Controller & Timing subrack and Matrix subracks layout on LC/EM HCI.
This window is automatically displayed when the equipment is commissioned for the first time or has
been decommissioned.

To select the NE type:


* Select the NE Type (Matrix Size):
MSH83 (32x32)
Synchronous Digital Cross-Connect for 32 STM-1.
MSH80 (128x128)
Synchronous Digital Cross-Connect for 128 STM-1.
MSH84 (256x256)
Synchronous Digital Cross-Connect for 256 STM-1.
MSH86 (512x512)
Synchronous Digital Cross-Connect for 512 STM-1.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

MSH91 (512x512)
Synchronous Digital Cross-Connect for 512 STM-1.
MSH96 (1024x1024)
Synchronous Digital Cross-Connect for 1024 STM-1.
* Press APPLY.
The NE Type has to be configured according to the CCU software. If the Operator tries to define a
NE Type not supported by the CCU software, the message "Not Supported" will be displayed.

NE MODEL: DEFINING LOCATION AND ALARM INTERFACE


Path (Equipment Configuration-Node Setup-Set Site Name)
This option is used to define the type of alarm processing and the site name where the equipment is
located.
Furthermore it allows to define Parallel I/O Unit management (for MSH83 or for Not MSH83
Controller & Timing subrack).
As the previous option this window is automatically displayed when the equipment is commissioned
for the first time or has been decommissioned.

To set the local alarm interface and the location name:


* Use Local Alarm Interface pull-down menu to set the alarm interface configuration (refer
to the Documentation supplied with the equipment for more information).

IMPORTANT The FOG and Italy2 Local Alarm Interface need specific hardware settings on
the Parallel Expansion Unit. Refer to the "Equipment Manual" - section 3.

* Enter in the Location Name the identification of the equipment in the network (i.e.: the
exchange where the equipment is located). The field can be left empty if no identification
is needed.
* Press APPLY.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 80 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Rack Visual Indications


According to the selected Local Alarm Interface three different rack lamp configurations are
available:
Sweden and Italy
Red:
Active Not Acknowledged.
Yellow:
Active Acknowledged.
Green:
Not Used.
Denmark, Canada, Norway, FOG and Italy2
Red:
Active Not Acknowledged Urgent.
Yellow:
Active Acknowledged.
Green:
Active Not Acknowledged Not Urgent.
Bahrain
Red:
Active, Not Acknowledged, Urgent and Not Urgent.
Yellow:
Active Acknowledged.
Green:
Active, Acknowledged and Not Acknowledged, Indicative.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 81 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

CONTROL AND TIMING SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING


Path (Equipment Configuration-Subrack Commissioning-Control & Timing Subrack)
This option is used to manage the unit configuration of the Control and Timing Subrack of the DXC
equipment.

The units commissioned by the Operator are the Serial Expansion Units (A and B), Timing Selector-
Oscillator Units (A and B) and Communication and Q Interface Units (A and B).
All other units are equipped (and cannot be decommissioned) by default by the system because
they are necessary for the operation of the equipment.

To commission CT Subrack and to activate the Action menu:


* Select the Control and Timing Subrack.
* Select the unit.
See Also:
How To Select Objects, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 82 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Control and Timing Subrack: equipping


Path (Action-C&T card management-Create)
This option is used to equip units into the Control and Timing Subrack.
Equipping a Serial Expansion Unit
The Serial Expansion Unit is the first type of unit to be equipped in the Control and Timing Subrack.
The Serial Expansion Units are used to connect all peripheral subracks (Ports Subracks and Matrix
Subracks) and units (Timing Selector-Oscillator Unit) to the Central Control Unit.
Each Serial Expansion Unit makes available a maximum of 18 serial lines for connecting the
peripheral units. The first Serial Expansion Unit connects the Matrix Subracks and the Timing
Selector-Oscillator Units using the first four lines. The remaining fourteen serial lines are used for
controlling the port subracks.
Both Worker (A) and Protection (B) Serial Expansion Units are provisioned at the same time.

To equip a Serial Expansion Unit:


* Enter the Number of equipped lines used in the selected Serial Expansion Unit. The
number of serial lines equipped depending on the number of Ports Subracks to be further
connected (1 Ports Subrack = 1 serial line).
For the first Serial Expansion Unit at least four serial lines must be equipped since they are
necessary to connect the Central Control Unit to the Timing Selector Oscillator Units (A and B) and
to the Matrix Controller Units (A and B).
The information defined for the Serial Expansion Unit A (Selected WORKER SIO CARD) must also
applied to the Serial Expansion Unit B (PROTECTION SIO CARD).
* Press APPLY.
Equipping a Timing Selector Oscillator Unit
The Timing Selector Oscillator Unit contains the main oscillator of the equipment. Two units are
available, one is the working unit (providing synchronisation) the other is in stand-by state.
Both Worker (A) and Protection (B) Timing Selector Units are provisioned at the same time.

To equip a Timing Selector Unit:


* Press APPLY.
The serial lines (Line Id) used for each Timing Selector Oscillator Unit (WORKER and
PROTECTION) are indicated in the dialog box.
Equipping Communication and Q Interface Unit
The Communication and Q Interface Unit has to be equipped if the DXC is remotely controlled by
means of Local Controller Remote Login or by means of NMC (Network Management Centre) and
to manage DCCs (Data Communication Channels of the STM-N interfaces).
If the 1+1 unit protection or the load sharing is required, take care to provision also the
Communication Unit B unit.

To equip a Communication and Q Interface Unit:


* Press APPLY.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 83 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

See Also:
Operative States

Control and Timing Subrack: displaying operational state


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Read)
This option is used to display information on the operational state of the units present in the Control
and Timing Subrack.
See Also:
Control and Timing Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Control and Timing Subrack: modifying unit configuration


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Modify)
This option becomes active only when a Serial Expansion Unit has been selected. It allows to
modify (increase) the Number of equipped lines, this operation is necessary for example if new
port subracks have been added.
See Also:
Control and Timing Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Control and Timing Subrack: removing a unit


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Delete)
This option is used to decommission a unit of the Control and Timing Subrack. Only Serial
Expansion Units, Timing Selector Oscillator Units and Communication and Q Interface Units can be
decommissioned. A Serial Expansion Unit cannot be decommissioned until all peripheral subracks
(port subracks and matrix subracks) using the serial lines have not been decommissioned.
See Also:
Control and Timing Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Control and Timing Subrack: displaying inventory data


Path (Action-Inventory Data)
This option is used to display information relevant to the different units of the CT Subrack. The
window shows information about the card identification, the card type, the serial number, the part
number and the revision of the card.
See Also:
Operative States

Control and Timing Subrack: displaying software version


Path (Action-Subrack Software Details)
This option is used to display information relevant to the different units of the CT Subrack. The
window shows information about the card identification, the card type, the active bank, the boot
EPROM code and the code of software loaded into the flash EEPROM Bank 1 or 2.

IMPORTANT A W before the boot EPROM code means Wrong Card Fitted.

See Also:

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 84 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Operative States

Input Ground Contacts: configuring


Path (Action-PAR Unit I/O Contacts-INPUT Contacts Config)
This option is used to configure the 4 input ground contacts (Input Contact #1-pin 37, Input Contact
#2-pin 34, Input Contact #3-pin 35, Input Contact #4-pin 36) of the Parallel Interface Unit, available
for the user.

IMPORTANT To activate this menu, select the Parallel Interface Unit.

To configure input ground contacts:


* Set the input ground contact to Enabled/Disabled.
* Select the Logic of the input ground contact. Possible options are:
ACTIVE LOW
When the contact state is OFF, the alarm criterion is active.
ACTIVE HIGH
When the contact state is ON, the alarm criterion is active.
* Set the Identification of the ground contact. Any alphanumeric string can be set.
* Set the Alarm Priority for the alarm criteria carried by the ground contact.
* Set the Alarm Category for the alarm criteria carried by the ground contact.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 85 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Press APPLY.
Use REFRESH to display the current status of each ground contact in the Contact State box.
See Also:
Operative States, Ground Contacts: reading state

Output Ground Contacts: configuring


Path (Action-PAR Unit I/O Contacts-OUTPUT Contacts Config)
This option is used to configure the output ground of the Parallel Interface Unit, available for the
user.
For the "Italy2 Local Alarm Interface" (Equipment Configuration-Node Setup-Set Site Name) only
one output ground contact will be available.

IMPORTANT To activate this menu, select the Parallel Interface Unit.

To configure output ground contacts:


* Set the output ground contact to Enabled/Disabled.
* Select the Logic of the output ground contact. Possible options are:
ACTIVE LOW
When the contact state is OFF, the alarm criterion is active.
ACTIVE HIGH
When the contact state is ON, the alarm criterion is active.
* Set the Identification of the ground contact. Any alphanumeric string can be set.
* Press APPLY.
Use REFRESH to display the current status of each ground contact in the Contact State box.
See Also:
Operative States, Output Ground Contacts: switching, Ground Contacts: reading
state

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 86 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Output Ground Contacts: switching


Path (Action-PAR Unit I/O Contacts-OUTPUT Contacts Switch)
This option is used to switch the status of the output ground contacts of the Parallel Interface Unit,
available for the user.
For the "Italy2 Local Alarm Interface" (Equipment Configuration-Node Setup-NE Model Setup)
only one output ground contact will be available.

IMPORTANT To activate this menu, select the Parallel Interface Unit.

To switch the status of the output ground contacts:


* Set the Contact State for the chosen output contact.
* Press APPLY.
Use REFRESH to update the status of each ground contact.
See Also:
Operative States, Output Ground Contacts: configuring

Ground Contacts: reading state


Path (Action-PAR Unit I/O Contacts-Contacts Read)
This option is used to display the status and the configuration of the 4 input and 2 output ground
contacts of the Parallel Interface Unit, available for the user.

IMPORTANT To activate this menu, select the Parallel Interface Unit.

See Also:
Operative States, Input Ground Contacts: configuring, Output Ground Contacts:
configuring, Output Ground Contacts: switching

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 87 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

MATRIX SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING (DXC 4/1)


Path (Equipment Configuration-Subrack Commissioning-Matrix Subrack)
This option is used to equip or to modify the Matrix equipment.

To commission Matrix equipment and to enable the Action menu:


Select the Matrix Subrack equipment.
See Also:
How To Select Objects, Operative States

Matrix Subrack: equipping unit (DXC 4/1)


Path (Action-Matrix subrack management-Create)
This option is used to equip the Matrix Subracks. During the commissioning of the Matrix Subrack
the Operator has to indicate its position in the exchange (optional) and the number of pairs of I and
III stage units fitted.
The Control Application selects automatically all the matrix subracks and the Operator can equip all
the I Stage and III Stage or I/III Stage Units that are in the Matrix subracks (Matrix Equipment A and
B).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 88 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

To commission the Matrix Subrack:


* Enter in MATRIX Position the positions of the rack and subrack in the exchange (Row,
Side A/B, Rack and Subrack).
The Serial I/O Line Connection information box reports the serial line (of the Serial Expansion
Unit) used to connect the Matrix Subracks to the Control and Timing equipment. The first serial line
(Line_1) is used to connect the Matrix Subrack A and the second serial line (Line_2) is used to
connect the Matrix Subrack B.
Each Matrix Subrack is connected to the Control and Timing Subrack using two serial lines (Worker
and Protection). In case of faulty of the main line (Worker) the connection is automatically passed
to the other line (Protection) without interruption or malfunctioning of the equipment.
For the correct operation of the equipment verify that the Matrix Subracks have been correctly
connected to the serial lines of the Control and Timing Subrack (refer to Installation).
* Enter in the field Equipped matrix card the number of I Stage/III Stage Units to be
equipped.
Each couple of cards (I Stage and III Stage) allows the connection of up to eight, in case of DXC 4/1
128x128/32x32 or sixteen, in case of DXC 4/1 256x256 equivalent STM-1 signals (matrix
accesses).
Note that for DXC 4/1 512x512 one matrix card houses both I and III Stage then a single card allows
the connection of up to sixteen equivalent STM-1 signals (matrix accesses).
The I Stage Units and the III Stage Units must be fitted into the subrack starting from the left side
and all the units must be adjacent, no empty positions can be left between two units.
Refer To:
Equipment Manual, section 1.4 "Equipment Composition".
The field Free matrix accesses reports the number of matrix accesses that are not yet connected
to any ports subrack.
When installing the matrix for the first time the initial value of this field is set to
16*<n_of_equipped_matrix_cards> for the DXC 4/1 256x256 and DXC 4/1 512x512 equipment and
8*<n_of_equipped_matrix_cards> for the DXC 4/1 128x128/32x32 equipment. This field is useful
when upgrading the equipment to know if it is possible to add new port subracks without adding new
cards.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Operative States

Matrix Subrack: displaying information (DXC 4/1)


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Read)
This option is used to display information on the unit fitted in the Matrix Subracks, the serial lines
used to connect the Matrix Subrack to the Control and Timing Subrack and the matrix accesses
available.
See Also:
Matrix Subrack: equipping unit (DXC 4/1), Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 89 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Matrix Subrack: modifying configuration (DXC 4/1)


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Modify)
This option is used to modify the operational parameters assigned to the Matrix Subracks. For
example, to add new matrix cards (I Stage Units and III Stage Units) when all the matrix accesses
are used for the port subracks.
The number of accesses can be always increased; to decrease the number it is necessary first to
verify that the accesses are not used.
See Also:
Matrix Subrack: equipping unit (DXC 4/1), Operative States

Matrix Subrack: decommissioning (DXC 4/1)


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Delete)
This option is used to decommission the Matrix Subracks.
The Operator can decommission the Matrix Subrack only when all matrix accesses are free (not
used for any port subrack).
See Also:
Matrix Subrack: equipping unit (DXC 4/1), Operative States

Matrix Subrack: displaying free accesses (DXC 4/1)


Path (Action-Free Accesses)
This option is used to display the free accesses of each Matrix Subrack.
The number of equipped accesses (# Equipped Acc) and the number of free accesses (# Free
Acc) are displayed at the top of the dialog box.
The operational state of each free matrix access is displayed in the MATRIX FREE ACCESS.
Enabled indicates that the access is equipped and free of alarms, Disabled indicates that the
access is alarmed.
See Also:
Matrix Subrack: displaying accesses status (DXC 4/1), Operative States

Matrix Subrack: displaying accesses status (DXC 4/1)


Path (Action-Accesses Status )
This option is used to display the operational state of the used matrix accesses.
For each matrix access (Access) are indicated the following information:

Operational State
Indicates whether the matrix access is operative (Enabled) or is out-of-service (Disabled).
Configuration State
Indicates whether the matrix access is equipped (Equipped) or not.
Connected Subrack Identifier
Identifier of the port subrack connected to the matrix access.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 90 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Subrack Access
STM-1 access of the port subrack connected to the matrix access.
See Also:
Matrix Subrack: displaying free accesses (DXC 4/1), Operative States

Matrix Subrack: displaying traffic information (DXC 4/1)


Path (Action-Traffic Information)
This option is used to display the status of the connection between the port subrack and matrix.
For each port subrack connected to the Matrix A and to the Matrix B is indicated the information
relevant to the Matrix Interface Units (A and B), the port units/channels connected to the matrix (or
No Card Connected if no ports are connected to the matrix) and the link status.
See Also:
Operative States

Matrix Subrack: displaying inventory data (DXC 4/1)


Path (Action-Inventory Data)
This option is used to display information relevant to the different units of the Matrix Subrack. The
window shows information about the card identification, the card type, the serial number, the part
number and the revision of the card.
See Also:
Operative States, Control and Timing Subrack: displaying inventory data

Matrix Subrack: displaying software details (DXC 4/1)


Path (Action-Subrack Software Details)
This option is used to display information relevant to the software loaded in to the Matrix Controller
Units present in the Matrix Subrack. The window shows information about the card identification, the
card type, the active bank, the boot EPROM code and the code of software loaded into the flash
EEPROM Bank 1 or 2.

IMPORTANT A W before the boot EPROM code means, if present, Wrong Card Fitted.

See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 91 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

TYPE 2 SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING


Path (Equipment Configuration-Subrack Commissioning-TYPE-2 Subrack)
This option is used to equip (or decommission) Type 2 Ports Subracks.

To commission Type 2 Subrack and to enable the Action menu:


Select, in the rack layout, one of the available positions (empty field). This position should represent,
as far as possible, the physical disposition of the subrack.
See Also:
How To Select Objects, Operative States

Type 2 Subrack: equipping


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Create)
This option is used to equip a new Type 2 Ports Subrack.

To commission Type 2 Subrack:


* Enter the Subrack Id. This value is used to identify the port subrack. Values are in the
range 01 to 86.
The same value of the Subrack Id must be set on the Identification Unit of the subrack to be
equipped. The value selected for the Subrack Id (using internal pre-settings on the Identification
Unit) is displayed on a front panel display of the Identification Unit.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 92 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Enter the positions of the rack and subrack in the exchange (Row, Side A/B, Rack and
Subrack). Side A/B is used to identify the position of the rack for the back-to-back
installation. Subrack identifies the physical position within the rack (1=bottom, 2=middle,
3=top).
* Select the MATRIX ACCESSES used to connect the STM-1 signals outgoing from the
Type 2 Ports Subrack to the Matrix Subrack (two matrix accesses are used).

IMPORTANT The matrix access order must be according to the installation.

* Enter in the SIO Card Id. the Serial Expansion Unit used to connect the port subrack to
the Control and Timing Subrack.
S1A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 7) - normal working/protection.
S2A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 8) - normal working/protection.
S3A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 9) - normal working/protection.
S4A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 10) - normal working/protection
(only for DXC 4/1 512x512 and DXC 4/1 256x256).
S5A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 11) - normal working/protection
(only for DXC 4/1 512x512 and DXC 4/1 256x256).
* Enter in the SIO Line Id. the serial port used for the connection (Line_1 to Line_18).
Before selecting the serial line check that the connection between Control and Timing Subrack and
Type 2 Ports Subrack have been correctly made (refer to Description Installation for more
information on the connections required).
Up to 14 serial lines (Line_5 to Line_18) are available for connection to the Ports Subracks in the
first Serial Expansion Unit (SIO_1). Ups to 18 serial lines (Line_1 to Line_18) are available in the
other Serial Expansion Units (SIO_2 to SIO_5).
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Operative States, Control and Timing Subrack: equipping, Matrix Subrack:
commissioning (DXC 4/1)

Type 2 Subrack: displaying information


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Read)
This option is used to display information on the operational state of the Type 2 Ports Subrack
together with serial interfaces and accesses in use.
See Also:
Type 2 Subrack: equipping, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 93 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Type 2 Subrack: modifying configuration


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Modify)
This option is used to modify the operational parameters assigned to a Type 2 Ports Subrack. It is
possible to modify:
n the Subrack Position in the telephone exchange;
n the Serial I/O Line Connection;
n the Matrix Accesses (if not cross-connected).
See Also:
Type 2 Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Type 2 Subrack: decommissioning


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Delete)
This option is used to decommission a Type 2 Ports Subrack.

A Type 2 Subrack can be decommissioned only when it is in the following


conditions:
a. All cross-connections using the selected port subrack have been removed.
b. All protections using the selected port subrack have been removed.
c. All synchronisation sources using the selected port subrack have been removed.
d. All Tributary Units have been decommissioned.
e. All Tributary Unit Ports have been decommissioned.
f. All performances have been stopped.
See Also:
Type 2 Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Type 2 Subrack: displaying matrix accesses map


Path (Action-Matrix Accesses Map)
This option is used to display the map of connections between the matrix subrack and the selected
Type 2 Subrack.
In the two boxes are shown the two STM-1 accesses connecting the matrix subrack to the port
subrack.
Slot num indicates the 63 VC-12 channels available for each STM-1 access.
In the Card Id field are displayed the card connected to the relevant STM-1 channel (or Free slot if
channel is not yet connected).
In the Port Id field are listed the ports involved in the connection (1 to 16).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 94 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Type 2 Subrack: displaying inventory data


Path (Action-Inventory Data)
This option is used to display information relevant to the different units of the Type 2 Subrack. The
window shows factory information about the card identification, the card type, the serial number, the
part number and the revision of the card.
See Also:
Operative States, Control and Timing Subrack: displaying inventory data

Type 2 Subrack: displaying software details


Path (Action-Subrack Software Details)
This option is used to display information relevant to the SW on the units present in the Type 2 Port
Subrack.
The window shows information about the card identification, the card type, the active bank, the boot
EPROM code and the code of software loaded into the flash EEPROM Bank 1 or 2.

IMPORTANT A W before the boot EPROM code means Wrong Card Fitted.

See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 95 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

TYPE 3 SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING


Path (Equipment Configuration-Subrack Commissioning-TYPE-3 Subrack)
This option is used to equip (or decommission) a Type 3 Ports Subracks.

NOTICE Type 3 Subrack can be managed by DXC 4/1 512x512.

To commission Type 3 Subrack and to enable the Action menu:


Select, in the rack layout, one of the available positions (empty field). This position should represent,
as far as possible, the physical disposition of the subrack.
See Also:
How To Select Objects, Operative States

Type 3 Subrack: equipping


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Create)
This option is used to equip a new Type 3 Port Subrack.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 96 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

To commission Type 3 Subrack:


* Enter the Subrack Id. This value is used to identify the port subrack.
This Id number must be already configured on the Identification Unit (by hardware settings). The O
has to insert the same number in this field.
* Enter the positions of the subrack in the exchange (Row, Side A/B, Rack and Subrack).
Side A/B is used to identify the position of the rack in the back-to-back installation.
Subrack identifies the physical position within the rack (1=bottom, 2=middle, 3=top).
* Specify the Matrix Accesses used by this Port Equipment for transmitting internal data
streams from ports to matrices and vice-versa.
The MATRIX ACCESSES field is a schematic representation of the port subrack connection area
with the relevant data cable connector physical co-ordinates (Y01, YO2, YO3, Y04 - Matrix
Accesses).
The Matrix Accesses field shall specify the physical Matrix Accesses (connectors on the rear side
of the matrix) where the eight internal data streams of the Port Subrack are connected. In the DXC
4/1 each cable carry two of the eight internal data streams.
Under the assigned matrix accesses are indicate the relevant internal data streams (the notation Px
has to be intended as the AUG-1 stream necessary to carry the traffic managed by the unit in
position Px).

IMPORTANT The matrix access order must be according to the installation.

* Enter in the SIO Card Id. field the Serial Expansion Unit used to connect the port subrack
to the Control and Timing Subrack.
S1A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 7) - normal working/protection.
S2A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 8) - normal working/protection.
S3A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 9) - normal working/protection.
S4A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 10) - normal working/protection
S5A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 11) - normal working/protection.
* Enter in the SIO Line Id. field the serial port used for the connection (Line_1 to Line_18).
Before selecting the serial line check that the connection between Control and Timing Subrack and
Type 3 Ports Subrack have been correctly made (refer to Description Installation for more
information on the connections required).
Up to 14 serial lines (Line_5 to Line_18) are available for connection to the Ports Subracks in the
first Serial Expansion Unit (SIO_1). Up to 18 serial lines (Line_1 to Line_18) are available in the
other Serial Expansion Units (SIO_2 to SIO_5).
* Use V4 Fail A/B to enable/disable the detection of the V4-FAIL_A/B alarm relevant to
each connected channel. This facility is useful to perform a detailed diagnostic operation.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 97 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

In case of one matrix defect, the related "Matrix A Fail" or "Matrix B Fail" alarms will be
shown but to check which is/are the channel/s effectively failed the options V4 Fail A/B
can be enabled; the "V4 Channel Fail A" or "V4 Channel Fail B" alarms, related to the
corresponding failed channel, will arise.
Refer To:
Equipment Manual, section 1.4 "Equipment Composition".
* Press APPLY.
The MIUMx WIRING SCHEME push button allows accessing a window that displays the
relationship among the Matrix Interface Unit accesses, the physical cable connectors from and to
the matrix and the internal channels associated to the traffic units.
Refer To:
Equipment Manual, section 2.3 "Electrical Connection".
See Also:
Operative States, Control and Timing Subrack: equipping, Fault Detection Procedure,
Matrix Subrack: commissioning (DXC 4/1)

Type 3 Subrack: displaying information


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Read)
This option is used to display information on the operational state of the Type 3 Ports Subrack
together with serial interfaces and accesses in use.
See Also:
Type 3 Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Type 3 Subrack: modifying configuration


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Modify)
This option is used to modify the operational parameters assigned to a Type 3 Ports Subrack. It is
possible to modify:
n the Subrack Position in the telephone exchange;
n the Serial I/O Line Connection;
n the Matrix Accesses (if not cross-connected);
n the detection state of the V4 Fail A/B alarms;
See Also:
Type 3 Subrack: equipping, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 98 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Type 3 Subrack: decommissioning


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Delete)
This option is used to decommission a Type 3 Ports Subrack.

A Type 3 Subrack can be decommissioned only when it is in the following


conditions:
a. All cross-connections using the selected port subrack have been removed.
b. All protections using the selected port subrack have been removed.
c. All synchronisation sources using the selected port subrack have been removed.
d. All Tributary Units have been decommissioned.
e. All Tributary Unit Ports have been decommissioned.
f. All performances have been stopped.
See Also:
Type 3 Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Type 3 Subrack: displaying inventory data


Path (Action-Inventory Data)
This option is used to display information relevant to the different units of the Type 3 Subrack. The
window shows factory information about the card identification, the card type, the serial number, the
part number and the revision of the card.
See Also:
Operative States, Control and Timing Subrack: displaying inventory data

Type 3 Subrack: displaying software details


Path (Action-Subrack Software Details)
This option is used to display information relevant to the SW on the units present in the Type 3 Port
Subrack.
The window shows information about the card identification, the card type, the active bank, the boot
EPROM code and the code of software loaded into the flash EEPROM Bank 1 or 2.

IMPORTANT A W before the boot EPROM code means Wrong Card Fitted.

See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 99 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

TYPE 4 SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING


Path (Equipment Configuration-Subrack Commissioning-TYPE-4 Subrack)
This option is used to equip (or decommission) Type 4 Ports Subracks.

To commission Type 4 Subrack and to enable the Action menu:


Select, in the rack layout, one of the available positions (empty field). This position should represent,
as far as possible, the physical disposition of the subrack.
See Also:
How To Select Objects, Operative States

Type 4 Subrack: equipping


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Create)
This option is used to equip a new Type 4 Ports Subrack.

To commission Type 4 Subrack:


* Enter the Subrack Id. This value is used to identify the port subrack. Values are in the
range 01 to 86.
The same value of the Subrack Id must be set on the Identification Unit of the subrack to be
equipped. The value selected for the Subrack Id (using internal pre-settings on the Identification
Unit) is displayed on a front panel display of the Identification Unit.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 100 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Enter the positions of the rack and subrack in the exchange (Row, Side A/B, Rack and
Subrack). Side A/B is used to identify the position of the rack for the back-to-back
installation. Subrack identifies the physical position within the rack (1=bottom, 2=middle,
3=top).
* Select the MATRIX ACCESSES used to connect the STM-1 signals outgoing from the
Type 4 Ports Subrack to the Matrix Subrack (two matrix accesses are used).

IMPORTANT The matrix access order must be according to the installation.

* Enter in the SIO Card Id. the Serial Expansion Unit used to connect the port subrack to
the Control and Timing Subrack.
S1A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 7) - normal working/protection.
S2A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 8) - normal working/protection.
S3A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 9) - normal working/protection.
S4A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 10) - normal working/protection
(only for DXC 4/1 512x512 and DXC 4/1 256x256).
S5A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 11) - normal working/protection
(only for DXC 4/1 512x512 and DXC 4/1 256x256).
* Enter in the SIO Line Id. the serial port used for the connection (Line_1 to Line_18).
Before selecting the serial line check that the connection between Control and Timing Subrack and
Type 4 Ports Subrack have been correctly made (refer to Description Installation for more
information on the connections required).
Up to 14 serial lines (Line_5 to Line_18) are available for connection to the Ports Subracks in the
first Serial Expansion Unit (SIO_1). Ups to 18 serial lines (Line_1 to Line_18) are available in the
other Serial Expansion Units (SIO_2 to SIO_5).
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Operative States, Control and Timing Subrack: equipping, Matrix Subrack:
commissioning (DXC 4/1)

Type 4 Subrack: displaying information


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Read)
This option is used to display information on the operational state of the Type 4 Ports Subrack
together with serial interfaces and accesses in use.
See Also:
Type 4 Subrack: equipping, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 101 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Type 4 Subrack: modifying configuration


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Modify)
This option is used to modify the operational parameters assigned to a Type 4 Ports Subrack. It is
possible to modify:
n the Subrack Position in the telephone exchange;
n the Serial I/O Line Connection;
n the Matrix Accesses (if not cross-connected).
See Also:
Type 4 Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Type 4 Subrack: decommissioning


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Delete)
This option is used to decommission a Type 4 Ports Subrack.

A Type 4 Subrack can be decommissioned only when it is in the following


conditions:
a. All cross-connections using the selected port subrack have been removed.
b. All protections using the selected port subrack have been removed.
c. All synchronisation sources using the selected port subrack have been removed.
d. All Tributary Units have been decommissioned.
e. All Tributary Unit Ports have been decommissioned.
f. All performances have been stopped.
See Also:
Type 4 Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Type 4 Subrack: displaying matrix accesses map


Path (Action-Matrix Accesses Map)
This option is used to display the map of connections between the matrix subrack and the selected
Type 2 Subrack.
In the two boxes are shown the two STM-1 accesses connecting the matrix subrack to the port
subrack.
Slot num indicates the 63 VC-12 channels available for each STM-1 access.
In the Card Id field are displayed the card connected to the relevant STM-1 channel (or Free slot if
channel is not yet connected).
In the Port Id field are listed the ports involved in the connection (1 to 16).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 102 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Type 4 Subrack: displaying inventory data


Path (Action-Inventory Data)
This option is used to display information relevant to the different units of the Type 4 Subrack. The
window shows factory information about the card identification, the card type, the serial number, the
part number and the revision of the card.
See Also:
Operative States, Control and Timing Subrack: displaying inventory data

Type 4 Subrack: displaying software details


Path (Action-Subrack Software Details)
This option is used to display information relevant to the SW on the units present in the Type 4 Port
Subrack.
The window shows information about the card identification, the card type, the active bank, the boot
EPROM code and the code of software loaded into the flash EEPROM Bank 1 or 2.

IMPORTANT A W before the boot EPROM code means Wrong Card Fitted.

See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 103 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

TYPE 5 SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING


Path (Equipment Configuration-Subrack Commissioning-TYPE-5 Subrack)
This option is used to equip (or decommission) Type 5 Port Subracks.

To commission a Type 5 Subrack and to enable the Action menu:


Select, in the rack layout, one of the available positions (empty field). This position should represent,
as far as possible, the physical disposition of the subrack.
See Also:
How To Select Objects, Operative States

Type 5 Subrack: equipping


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Create)
This option is used to equip a new Type 5 Port Subrack and to specify the matrix accesses used for
the connection to the Matrix Subracks.
Make sure that the Operator has previously provisioned the matrix accesses for the port subrack
going to be equipped.

To commission Type 5 Subrack:


* Enter the Subrack Id. This value is used to identify the port subrack. Values are in the
range 01 to 86.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 104 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

The same value of the Subrack Id must be set on the Identification Unit of the subrack to be
equipped. The value selected for the Subrack Id (using internal hardware settings on the
Identification Unit) is displayed on a front panel of the Identification Unit itself.
* Enter the positions of the rack and subrack in the exchange (Row, Side A/B, Rack and
Subrack). Side A/B is used to identify the position of the rack for the back-to-back
installation (optional). Subrack identifies the physical position within the rack (1=bottom,
2=middle, 3=top).
* Specify the MATRIX ACCESSES used by the Port Equipment for transmitting internal
data from ports to matrices and vice-versa.
The maximum number of displayed matrix accesses corresponds to the number previously
assigned while equipping the Matrix Subracks.
In the MATRIX ACCESSES box, the matrix accesses used to connect the eight internal channels
(STM-1 Port 1/2 to STM-1 Port 7/8) of the Port Subrack must be specified.
For the DXC 4/1 the STM-1 ports are grouped into four couples (1/2, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8) as they are
wired during the installation. For each pair of ports the relevant matrix accesses must be specified
(e.g.: STM-1 Port 1/2 <--> MX_acc_1/2).
For the DXC 4/4 512x512 the STM-1 ports are grouped into two groups of ports. Each couple of
port subrack connectors (STM-1 Port 1/2 STM-Port 5/6 and STM-1 Port 3/4 STM-Port 7/8)
manages four different internal channels.
Before selecting the matrix accesses check that the connections have been correctly made between
Matrix Subrack and Type 5 Ports Subrack (refer to Description Installation for more information on
the connections required).

IMPORTANT The matrix access order must be according to the installation.

* Enter in the SIO Card Id the Serial Expansion Unit used to connect the port subrack to
the Control & Timing Subrack.
S1A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 7) - normal working/protection.
S2A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 8) - normal working/protection.
S3A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 9) - normal working/protection.
S4A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 10) - normal working/protection
(only for DXC 4/1 512x512, DXC 4/1 256x256, DXC 4/4 512x512 and DXC 4/4 1024x1024).
S5A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 11) - normal working/protection
(only for DXC 4/1 512x512, DXC 4/1 256x256, DXC 4/4 512x512 and DXC 4/4 1024x1024).
* Enter in the SIO Line Id. the serial port used for the connection (Line_1 to Line_18).
Before selecting the serial line check that the connection between Control and Timing Subrack and
Type 5 Ports Subrack have been correctly made (refer to Description Installation for more
information on the connections required).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 105 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Up to 14 serial lines (Line_5 to Line_18) are available for connection to the Ports Subracks in the
first Serial Expansion Unit (SIO_1). Ups to 18 serial lines (Line_1 to Line_18) are available in the
other Serial Expansion Units (SIO_2 to SIO_5).
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Operative States, Control and Timing Subrack: equipping, Matrix Subrack:
commissioning (DXC 4/1), General Index

Type 5 Subrack: displaying information


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Read)
This option is used to display information on the operational state of the Type 5 Ports Subrack
together with serial interfaces and accesses in use.
See Also:
Type 5 Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Type 5 Subrack: modifying configuration


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Modify)
This option is used to modify the operational parameters assigned to a Type 5 Ports Subrack. It is
possible to modify:
n the Subrack Position in the telephone exchange;
n the Serial I/O Line Connection;
n the Matrix Accesses (if not cross-connected).
See Also:
Type 5 Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Type 5 Subrack: decommissioning


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Delete)
This option is used to decommission a Type 5 Ports Subrack.

A Type 5 Subrack can be decommissioned only when it is in the following


conditions:
a. All cross-connections using the selected port subrack have been removed.
b. All protections using the selected port subrack have been removed.
c. All synchronisation sources using the selected port subrack have been removed.
d. All 155Mbit/s Tributary Units and 140Mbit/s Tributary Units have been decommissioned.
e. All Tributary Unit Ports have been decommissioned.
f. All performances have been stopped.
See Also:
Type 5 Subrack: equipping, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 106 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Type 5 Subrack: displaying inventory data


Path (Action-Inventory Data)
This option is used to display information relevant to the different units of the Type 5 Subrack. The
window shows factory information about the card identification, the card type, the serial number, the
part number and the revision of the card.
See Also:
Operative States, Control and Timing Subrack: displaying inventory data

Type 5 Subrack: displaying software details


Path (Action-Subrack Software Details)
This option is used to display information relevant to the SW on the units present in the Type 5 Port
Subrack.
The window shows information about the card identification, the card type, the active bank, the boot
EPROM code and the code of software loaded into the flash EEPROM Bank 1 or 2.

IMPORTANT A W before the boot EPROM code means Wrong Card Fitted.

See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 107 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

TYPE 6 SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING


Path (Equipment Configuration-Subrack Commissioning-TYPE-6 Subrack)
This option is used to equip (or decommission) a Type 6 Ports Subracks.

To commission Type 6 Subrack and to enable the Action menu:


Select, in the rack layout, one of the available positions (empty field). This position should represent,
as far as possible, the physical disposition of the subrack.
See Also:
How To Select Objects, Operative States

Type 6 Subrack: equipping


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Create)
This option is used to equip a new Type 6 Port Subrack.

* Specify the matrix accesses configuration for the subrack selecting the proper choice in
the Scheme Selection field.
Subrack 6 supports two standard configurations, listed below, for MSP and Card Protections:
All Accesses
Subrack equipped with 16 matrix accesses.
This kind of configuration is optimized for:
- 8 traffic units with a equivalent capacity of 2 STM-1 each one (2xSTM-1 Opt) MSP 1:N protected.
- 4 traffic units with a equivalent capacity of 4 STM-1 each one (eg.: 4xSTM-1 El., 4x140/155Mbit/s
or STM-4) 1:N protected (MSP or Card Protection supported).
Half Accesses
Subrack equipped with 8 matrix accesses.
This kind of configuration is optimized for:
- 4 traffic units with a equivalent capacity of 2 STM-1 each one (2xSTM-1 Opt) MSP 1+1 protected.
- 2 traffic units with a equivalent capacity of 4 STM-1 each one (e.g.: 4xSTM-1 El.,
4x140/155Mbit/s or STM-4) MSP 1:1 protected.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 108 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

DXC 4/1

DXC 4/4
.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 109 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

To commission Type 6 Subrack:


* Enter the Subrack Id. This value is used to identify the port subrack.
This Id number must be already configured on the Identification Unit (by hardware settings). The
operator must insert the same number in this field.
* Enter the positions of the subrack in the exchange (Row, Side A/B, Rack and Subrack).
Side A/B is used to identify the position of the rack in the back-to-back installation.
Subrack identifies the physical position within the rack (1=bottom, 2=middle, 3=top).
* Specify the Matrix Accesses used by this Port Equipment for transmitting internal data
streams from ports to matrices and vice-versa.
The MATRIX A (MATRIX A MASTER/SLAVE for DXC 4/4) field is a schematic representation of
the port subrack connection area with the relevant data cable connector physical co-ordinates (Y01,
YO2, YO3, Y04 - MAA = Matrix Accesses A, MAB = Matrix Accesses B, MAC = Matrix Accesses C,
MAD = Matrix Accesses D).
The Matrix Accesses field shall specify the physical Matrix Accesses (connectors on the rear side
of the matrix) where the sixteen internal data streams of the Port Subrack are connected. In the
DXC 4/1 each cable carry two of the sixteen internal data streams (from AUG-1 Port 1/2 to AUG-4
Port 3/4 stream), while in the DXC 4/4 each cable carry four halves of the sixteen internal data
streams, sixteen halves to/from Master Matrix and sixteen halves to/from Slave Matrix (from AUG-
1/2 Port 1/2 to AUG-3/4 Port 3/4 stream). For DXC 4/4 the MATRIX A SLAVE field has to be
intended as a copy of the MATRIX A MASTER field (MAC Accesses correspond to MAA accesses
and MAD Accesses correspond to MAB Accesses).
Under the assigned matrix accesses are indicate the relevant internal data streams.

IMPORTANT The matrix access order must be according to the installation.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 110 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

NOTICE If the MSP 1+1 architecture is required the protection units accesses (MAC and
MAD Accesses for DXC 4/1, MAB and MAD Accesses for DXC 4/4) must not
be equipped.

* Enter in the SIO Card Id. field the Serial Expansion Unit used to connect the port subrack
to the Control and Timing Subrack.
S1A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 7) - normal working/protection.
S2A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 8) - normal working/protection.
S3A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 9) - normal working/protection.
S4A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 10) - normal working/protection
(only for DXC 4/1 512x512, DXC 4/1 256x256, DXC 4/4 512x512 and DXC 4/4 1024x1024).
S5A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 11) - normal working/protection
(only for DXC 4/1 512x512, DXC 4/1 256x256, DXC 4/4 512x512 and DXC 4/4 1024x1024).
* Enter in the SIO Line Id. field the serial port used for the connection (Line_1 to Line_18).
Before selecting the serial line check that the connection between Control and Timing Subrack and
Type 6 Ports Subrack have been correctly made (refer to Description Installation for more
information on the connections required).
Up to 14 serial lines (Line_5 to Line_18) are available for connection to the Ports Subracks in the
first Serial Expansion Unit (SIO_1). Up to 18 serial lines (Line_1 to Line_18) are available in the
other Serial Expansion Units (SIO_2 to SIO_5).
* Specify the Port Controller Version used in the subrack.
CP Card Version 67
This Port Controller has to be used only on Subrack Type 6/7.
CP Card Version E
This Port Controller can be used on Subrack Type 6/7/6E/7E.
* Use V4 Fail A/B to enable/disable the detection of the V4-FAIL_A/B alarm relevant to
each connected channel. This facility is useful to perform a detailed diagnostic operation.
In case of one matrix defect, the related "Matrix A Fail" or "Matrix B Fail" alarms will be
shown but to check which is/are the channel/s effectively failed the options V4 Fail A/B
can be enabled; the "V4 Channel Fail A" or "V4 Channel Fail B" alarms, related to the
corresponding failed channel, will arise.
* Define, as far as the NxSTM-1 Units is concern, the protection type managed by the
subrack (Prot. Type Supp. - Protection Type Supported).
In particular the meaning of the three selectable choice is:
MSP (no 2XSTM1 MSP 1:N)
This selection is applied to the whole subrack and allows to create MS protection schemes with the
exception of 2xSTM-1 MSP 1:N. Equipping the subrack with 2xSTM-1 units, slot 5 can be used for

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 111 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

traffic or 1+1 MSP protection only (unit fitted in the physical slot 7b), no 2xSTM-1 MSP 1:N can be
created.
Card Protection
This selection is applied to the whole subrack and allows to create a card protection scheme. No
N:1 MSP protection can be configured. Choosing this item make sure to use the proper card
protection modules.
MSP (2XSTM1 MSP 1:N only)
This selection is applied to the whole subrack and allows to create 2xSTM-1 MSP 1:N protection
scheme. Equipping the subrack with 2xSTM-1 units, slot 5 can be used for protection only (unit
fitted in the physical slot 7a). No STM-4, 4xSTM-1 or 4x140-155Mbit/s Units can be equipped in
position 6.
Refer To:
Equipment Manual, section 1.4 "Equipment Composition".
* Press APPLY.
The MIUMx WIRING SCHEME push button allows accessing a window that displays the
relationship among the Matrix Interface Unit accesses, the physical cable connectors from and to
the matrix and the internal channels associated to the traffic units.
Refer To:
Equipment Manual, section 2.3 "Electrical Connection".
See Also:
Operative States, Control and Timing Subrack: equipping, Fault Detection Procedure,
Matrix Subrack: commissioning (DXC 4/1), General Index

Type 6 Subrack: displaying information


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Read)
This option is used to display information on the operational state of the Type 6 Ports Subrack
together with serial interfaces and accesses in use.
See Also:
Type 6 Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Type 6 Subrack: modifying configuration


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Modify)
This option is used to modify the operational parameters assigned to a Type 6 Ports Subrack. It is
possible to modify:
n the Subrack Position in the telephone exchange;
n the Serial I/O Line Connection;
n the Matrix Accesses (if not cross-connected);
n the detection state of the V4 Fail A/B alarms;
n the MSP protection supported.

NOTICE It is possible to modify the Prot. Type Supp. only if it has been defined as MSP
(no 2XSTM1 MSP 1:N or 2XSTM1 MSP 1:N only) and if the new value to set is

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 112 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

a MSP protection as well. It is not possible to modify Prot. Type Supp. from
MSP to Card Protection and vice-versa without deleting the whole subrack.

The transition between the two protection is allowed if:

From no 2XSTM1 MSP 1:N to 2XSTM1 MSP 1:N only


The modification is accepted unless card P5 is equipped as 2xSTM-1 or card P6 as 4xSTM-1 (of
any type) or STM-4 (of any type). Moreover if some MSP 1+1 is configured the command is
refused.
From 2XSTM1 MSP 1:N only to no 2XSTM1 MSP 1:N
The modification is accepted unless card P5 is equipped as 2xSTM-1.
See Also:
Type 6 Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Type 6 Subrack: decommissioning


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Delete)
This option is used to decommission a Type 6 Ports Subrack.

A Type 6 Subrack can be decommissioned only when it is in the following


conditions:
a. All cross-connections using the selected port subrack have been removed.
b. All protections using the selected port subrack have been removed.
c. All synchronisation sources using the selected port subrack have been removed.
d. All Tributary Units have been decommissioned.
e. All Tributary Unit Ports have been decommissioned.
f. All performances have been stopped.
See Also:
Type 6 Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Type 6 Subrack: displaying inventory data


Path (Action-Inventory Data)
This option is used to display information relevant to the different units of the Type 6 Subrack. The
window shows factory information about the card identification, the card type, the serial number, the
part number and the revision of the card.
See Also:
Operative States, Control and Timing Subrack: displaying inventory data

Type 6 Subrack: displaying software details


Path (Action-Subrack Software Details)
This option is used to display information relevant to the SW on the units present in the Type 6 Port
Subrack.
The window shows information about the card identification, the card type, the active bank, the boot
EPROM code and the code of software loaded into the flash EEPROM Bank 1 or 2.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 113 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

IMPORTANT A W before the boot EPROM code means Wrong Card Fitted.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 114 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

See Also:
Operative States

TYPE 6E SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING


Path (Equipment Configuration-Subrack Commissioning-TYPE-6E Subrack)
This option is used to equip (or decommission) a Type 6E Ports Subracks.

NOTICE Type 6E Subrack can be managed by DXC 4/1 512x512 and DXC 4/4
1024x1024 only.

To commission Type 6E Subrack and to enable the Action menu:


Select, in the rack layout, one of the available positions (empty field). This position should represent,
as far as possible, the physical disposition of the subrack.
See Also:
How To Select Objects, Operative States

Type 6E Subrack: equipping


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Create)
This option is used to equip a new Type 6E Port Subrack.

* Specify the matrix accesses configuration for the subrack selecting the proper choice in
the Scheme Selection field.
Subrack 6E supports a number of configurations, listed below, for MSP and Card Protections:

40 Access
Subrack equipped with 40 matrix accesses (maximum capacity managed by the subrack). This
kind of configuration is optimized for 10 traffic units with a equivalent capacity of 4 STM-1 each one
(eg.: 4xSTM-1 El./Opt or STM-4) not protected (no MSP or Card Protection supported).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 115 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

20 Access
Subrack equipped with 20 matrix accesses. This kind of configuration is optimized for 10 traffic
units with a equivalent capacity of 2 STM-1 each one (eg.: 2xSTM-1 Opt) not MSP protected.
32 Access
Subrack equipped with 32 matrix accesses. This kind of configuration is optimized for 8 traffic units
with a equivalent capacity of 4 STM-1 each one (eg.: 4xSTM-1 El./Opt or STM-4) 1:N protected
(MSP or Card Protection supported).
16 Access
Subrack equipped with 16 matrix accesses. This kind of configuration is optimized for 8 traffic units
with a equivalent capacity of 2 STM-1 each one (i.e.: 2xSTM-1 Opt) 1:N MSP protected.
20 MSP Access
Subrack equipped with 20 matrix accesses (DXC 4/1 only). This kind of configuration is optimized
for 5 traffic units with a equivalent capacity of 4 STM-1 each one (i.e.: 4xSTM-1 El./Opt or STM-4)
1+1 MSP protected.
10 MSP Access
Subrack equipped with 10 matrix accesses (DXC 4/1 only). This kind of configuration is optimized
for 5 traffic units with a equivalent capacity of 2 STM-1 each one (i.e.: 2xSTM-1 Opt) 1+1 MSP
protected.
* Define the first Free matrix accesses used to equip the subrack.
* Press APPLY.

IMPORTANT It is possible to specify configurations different from those proposed in the


Scheme Selection window.
The previous configurations are used to help the Operator in the first
commissioning of the subrack but they are not fixed. It is possible to modify the
matrix accesses scheme specified setting the proper fields in the next window.
Note that Type 6E subrack must have at least 2 matrix access equipped

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 116 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

For DXC 4/1 the following window will be displayed:

For DXC 4/4 the following window will be displayed:

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 117 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

To commission Type 6E Subrack:


* Enter the Subrack Id. This value is used to identify the port subrack.
This Id number must be configured on the Identification Unit (by hardware settings). The operator
must insert the same number in this field.
* It possible to specify in a Subrack Distance field two possible values:
Near
cable length = < 50m
Far
50 < cable length < 100m
Its default value is Near. It shall be possible to change in any moment this parameter selecting
Subrack Configuration - Modify.

IMPORTANT If you change the distance parameter during the normal traffic operation you will
cause the total traffic loss for the involved subrack.

* Enter the positions of the subrack in the exchange (Row, Side A/B, Rack and Subrack).
Side A/B is used to identify the position of the rack in the back-to-back installation.
Subrack identifies the physical position within the rack (1=bottom, 2=middle, 3=top).
* Starting from the Free matrix accesses previously specified the system proposes a
matrix access order used by this Port Equipment for transmitting internal data streams
from ports to matrices and vice-versa. However it is possible to modify this order using
the relevant arrow buttons.

NOTICE Depending on the subrack scheme selected some matrix accesses could not be
defined because unnecessary for the traffic management.

The Matrix Accesses field is a schematic representation of the port subrack connection area with
the relevant data cable connector physical co-ordinates (Y01->Y16 IM1 = I/F Module 1, IM2 = I/F
Module 2, IM3 = I/F Module 3).
The Matrix Accesses field shall specify the physical Matrix Accesses (connectors on the rear side
of the matrix) where the internal data streams of the Port Subrack are connected. In the DXC 4/1
each cable carry two of the internal data streams (from AUG-1/2 Port 1 to AUG-3/4 Port 10 stream),
while in the DXC 4/4 each cable carry four halves of the internal data streams, four halves to/from
Master Matrix and four halves to/from Slave Matrix (from AUG-1/2 Port 1/2 to AUG-3/4 Port 9/10
stream).
Under the assigned matrix accesses are indicated the relevant internal data streams.

IMPORTANT The matrix access order must be according to the installation.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 118 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

If the MSP or Card Protection architecture is required the protection units accesses must not be
equipped.
Refer To:
Equipment Manual, section 1.4 "Equipment Composition".
* Enter in the SIO Card Id. field the Serial Expansion Unit used to connect the port subrack
to the Control and Timing Subrack.
S1A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 7) - normal working/protection.
S2A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 8) - normal working/protection.
S3A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 9) - normal working/protection.
S4A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 10) - normal working/protection
(only for DXC 4/1 512x512, DXC 4/1 256x256, DXC 4/4 512x512 and DXC 4/4 1024x1024).
S5A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 11) - normal working/protection
(only for DXC 4/1 512x512, DXC 4/1 256x256, DXC 4/4 512x512 and DXC 4/4 1024x1024).
* Enter in the SIO Line Id. field the serial port used for the connection (Line_1 to Line_18).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 119 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Before selecting the serial line check that the connection between Control and Timing Subrack and
Type 6E Ports Subrack have been correctly made (refer to Description Installation for more
information on the connections required).
Up to 14 serial lines (Line_5 to Line_18) are available for connection to the Ports Subracks in the
first Serial Expansion Unit (SIO_1). Up to 18 serial lines (Line_1 to Line_18) are available in the
other Serial Expansion Units (SIO_2 to SIO_5).
* Use V4 Fail A/B to enable/disable the detection of the V4-FAIL_A/B alarm relevant to
each connected channel. This facility is useful to perform a detailed diagnostic operation.
In case of one matrix defect, the related "Matrix A Fail" or "Matrix B Fail" alarms will be
shown but to check which is/are the channel/s effectively failed the options V4 Fail A/B
can be enabled; the "V4 Channel Fail A" or "V4 Channel Fail B" alarms, related to the
corresponding failed channel, will arise.
* Define if the subrack is equipped with the Environmental Cooling Units (Heat
Dissipation) or not.
* Press APPLY.
The MIUMx WIRING SCHEME push button allows accessing a window that displays the
relationship among the Matrix Interface Unit accesses, the physical cable connectors from and to
the matrix and the internal channels associated to the traffic units.
Note For this Subrack only the Port Controller E can be used.
Refer To:
Equipment Manual, section 2.3 "Electrical Connection".
See Also:
Operative States, Control and Timing Subrack: equipping, Fault Detection Procedure,
Matrix Subrack: commissioning (DXC 4/1), General Index

Type 6E Subrack: displaying information


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Read)
This option is used to display information on the operational state of the Type 6E Ports Subrack
together with serial interfaces and accesses in use.
See Also:
Type 6E Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Type 6E Subrack: modifying configuration


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Modify)
This option is used to modify the operational parameters assigned to a Type 6E Ports Subrack. It is
possible to modify:
n the Subrack Position in the telephone exchange;
n the Serial I/O Line Connection;
n the Matrix Accesses (if they are not assigned to an equipped card);
n the detection state of the V4 Fail A/B alarms;

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 120 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

See Also:
Type 6E Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Type 6E Subrack: decommissioning


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Delete)
This option is used to decommission a Type 6E Ports Subrack.

A Type 6E Subrack can be decommissioned only when it is in the following


conditions:
a. All cross-connections using the selected port subrack have been removed.
b. All protections using the selected port subrack have been removed.
c. All synchronisation sources using the selected port subrack have been removed.
d. All Tributary Units have been decommissioned.
e. All Tributary Unit Ports have been decommissioned.
f. All performances have been stopped.
See Also:
Type 6E Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Type 6E Subrack: displaying inventory data


Path (Action-Inventory Data)
This option is used to display information relevant to the different units of the Type 6E Subrack. The
window shows factory information about the card identification, the card type, the serial number, the
part number and the revision of the card.
See Also:
Operative States, Control and Timing Subrack: displaying inventory data

Type 6E Subrack: displaying software details


Path (Action-Subrack Software Details)
This option is used to display information relevant to the SW on the units present in the Type 6E
Port Subrack.
The window shows information about the card identification, the card type, the active bank, the boot
EPROM code and the code of software loaded into the flash EEPROM Bank 1 or 2.

IMPORTANT A W before the boot EPROM code means Wrong Card Fitted.

See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 121 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

TYPE 7 SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING


Path (Equipment Configuration-Subrack Commissioning-TYPE-7 Subrack)
This option is used to equip (or decommission) Type 7 Ports Subracks.

To commission Type 7 Subrack and to enable the Action menu:


Select, in the rack layout, one of the available positions (empty field). This position should represent,
as far as possible, the physical disposition of the subrack.
See Also:
How To Select Objects, Operative States

Type 7 Subrack: equipping


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Create)
This option is used to equip a new Type 7 Ports Subrack.

* Specify the matrix accesses configuration for the subrack selecting the proper choice in
the Scheme Selection field.
Subrack 7 supports two standard configurations, listed below, for MSP and Card Protections:

All Accesses
Subrack equipped with 32 matrix accesses. This kind of configuration is optimized for 2 traffic units
with a equivalent capacity of 16 STM-1 each one not protected.
Half Accesses
Subrack equipped with 16 matrix accesses. This kind of configuration is optimized for 1 traffic units
with a equivalent capacity of 16 STM-1 MSP 1+1 protected.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 122 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

D X C 4 /1

D X C 4 /4

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 123 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

To commission Type 7 Subrack:


* Enter the Subrack Id. This value is used to identify the port subrack.
This Id number must be already configured on the Identification Unit (by hardware settings). The
operator must insert the same number in this field.
* Enter the positions of the subrack in the exchange (Row, Side A/B, Rack and Subrack).
Side A/B is used to identify the position of the rack in the back-to-back installation.
Subrack identifies the physical position within the rack (1=bottom, 2=middle, 3=top).
* Specify the Matrix Accesses used by this Port Equipment for transmitting internal data
streams from ports to matrices and vice-versa.
The MATRIX A field is a schematic representation of the port subrack connection area with the
relevant data cable connector physical co-ordinates (Y01, YO2, YO3, Y04 - MAA = Matrix Accesses
A, MAB = Matrix Accesses B, etc.).
The Matrix Accesses field shall specify the physical Matrix Accesses (connectors on the rear side
of the matrix) where the thirty-two internal data streams of the Port Subrack are connected.
In the DXC 4/1 each cable carry two of the thirty-two internal data streams (from AUG-1/2 Port 1 to
AUG-15/16 Port 2 stream), while in the DXC 4/4 each cable carry four halves of the thirty-two
internal data streams, thirty-two halves to/from Master Matrix and thirty-two halves to/from Slave
Matrix (from AUG-1/2/3/4 Port 1 to AUG-13/14/15/16 Port 2 stream). For DXC 4/4 the MATRIX A
SLAVE field has to be intended as a copy of the MATRIX A MASTER field (the correspondences
among the accesses are: MAC Accesses <-> MAA accesses, MAD Accesses <-> MAB Accesses,
MAG Accesses <-> MAE Accesses and MAH Accesses <-> MAF Accesses).
Under the assigned matrix accesses are indicate the relevant internal data streams.

IMPORTANT The matrix access order must be according to the installation.

NOTICE If the MSP 1+1 architecture is required the protection unit accesses (MAC, MAD,
MAG and MAH Accesses) must not be equipped.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 124 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Enter in the SIO Card Id. the Serial Expansion Unit used to connect the port subrack to
the Control and Timing Subrack.
S1A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 7) - normal working/protection.
S2A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 8) - normal working/protection.
S3A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 9) - normal working/protection.
S4A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 10) - normal working/protection
(only for DXC 4/1 512x512, DXC 4/1 256x256, DXC 4/4 512x512 and DXC 4/4 1024x1024).
S5A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 11) - normal working/protection
(only for DXC 4/1 512x512, DXC 4/1 256x256, DXC 4/4 512x512 and DXC 4/4 1024x1024).
* Enter in the SIO Line Id. field the serial port used for the connection (Line_1 to Line_18).
Before selecting the serial line check that the connection between Control and Timing Subrack and
Type 7 Ports Subrack have been correctly made (refer to Description Installation for more
information on the connections required).
Up to 14 serial lines (Line_5 to Line_18) are available for connection to the Ports Subracks in the
first Serial Expansion Unit (SIO_1). Up to 18 serial lines (Line_1 to Line_18) are available in the
other Serial Expansion Units (SIO_2 to SIO_5).
* Define if the subrack is equipped with the Environmental Cooling Units (Heat
Dissipation) or not.
* Use V4 Fail A/B to enable/disable the detection of the VA-FAIL_A/B alarm relevant to
each connected channel. This facility is useful to perform a detailed diagnostic operation.
In case of one matrix defect, the related "Matrix A Fail" or "Matrix B Fail" alarms will be
shown but to check which is/are the channel/s effectively failed the options V4 Fail A/B
can be enabled; the "V4 Channel Fail A" or "V4 Channel Fail B" alarms, related to the
corresponding failed channel, will arise.
* Specify the Port Controller Version used in the subrack.
CP Card Version 67
This Port Controller has to be used only on Subrack Type 6/7.
CP Card Version E
This Port Controller can be used on Subrack Type 6/7/6E/7E.
* Press APPLY.
The MIUMx WIRING SCHEME push button allows to access a window that displays the relationship
among the Matrix Interface Unit accesses, the physical cable connectors from and to the matrix, and
the internal channels associated to the traffic units.
Refer To:
Equipment Manual, section 2.3 "Electrical Connection".

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 125 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

See Also:
Operative States, Control and Timing Subrack: equipping, Fault Detection Procedure,
Matrix Subrack: commissioning (DXC 4/1), General Index

Type 7 Subrack: displaying information


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Read)
This option is used to display information on the operational state of the Type 7 Ports Subrack
together with serial interfaces and accesses in use.
See Also:
Type 7 Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Type 7 Subrack: modifying configuration


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Modify)
This option is used to modify the operational parameters assigned to a Type 7 Ports Subrack. It is
possible to modify:
n the Subrack Position in the telephone exchange;
n the Serial I/O Line Connection;
n the Matrix Accesses (if not cross-connected);
n the detection state of the V4 Fail A/B alarms.
See Also:
Type 7 Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Type 7 Subrack: decommissioning


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Delete)
This option is used to decommission a Type 7 Ports Subrack.

A Type 7 Subrack can be decommissioned only when it is in the following


conditions:
a. All cross-connections using the selected port subrack have been removed.
b. All protections using the selected port subrack have been removed.
c. All synchronisation sources using the selected port subrack have been removed.
d. All Tributary Units have been decommissioned.
e. All Tributary Unit Ports have been decommissioned.
f. All performances have been stopped.
See Also:
Type 7 Subrack: equipping, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 126 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Type 7 Subrack: displaying inventory data


Path (Action-Inventory Data)
This option is used to display information relevant to the different units of the Type 7 Subrack. The
window shows factory information about the card identification, the card type, the serial number, the
part number and the revision of the card.
See Also:
Operative States, Control and Timing Subrack: displaying inventory data

Type 7 Subrack: displaying software details


Path (Action-Subrack Software Details)
This option is used to display information relevant to the SW on the units present in the Type 7 Port
Subrack.
The window shows information about the card identification, the card type, the active bank, the boot
EPROM code and the code of software loaded into the flash EEPROM Bank 1 or 2.

IMPORTANT A W before the boot EPROM code means Wrong Card Fitted.

See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 127 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

TYPE 7E SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING


Path (Equipment Configuration-Subrack Commissioning-TYPE-7E Subrack)
This option is used to equip (or decommission) a Type 7E Ports Subracks.

NOTICE Type 7E Subrack can be managed by DXC 4/1 512x512 and DXC 4/4
1024x1024 only.

To commission Type 7E Subrack and to enable the Action menu:


Select, in the rack layout, one of the available positions (empty field). This position should represent,
as far as possible, the physical disposition of the subrack.
See Also:
How To Select Objects, Operative States

Type 7E Subrack: equipping


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Create)
This option is used to equip a new Type 7E Port Subrack.

* Specify the matrix accesses configuration for the subrack selecting the proper choice in
the Scheme Selection field.
Next list reports a number of standard configurations for Subrack 7E:
80 Access
Subrack equipped with 80 matrix accesses (maximum capacity managed by the subrack). This
kind of configuration is optimized for 5 traffic units with a equivalent capacity of 16 STM-1 each
one.
64 Access
Subrack equipped with 64 matrix accesses. This kind of configuration is optimized for 4 traffic units
with a equivalent capacity of 16 STM-1 each one. The slot in position number five will be the
protecting unit.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 128 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

48 Access
Subrack equipped with 48 matrix accesses. This kind of configuration is optimized for 3 traffic units
with a equivalent capacity of 16 STM-1 each one. This Subrack is optimized for 1+1 MSP
protection on STM-16 interfaces plus an extra STM-16 not protected.
* Define the first Free matrix accesses used to equip the subrack.
* Press APPLY

IMPORTANT It is possible to specify configurations different from those proposed in the


Scheme Selection window.
The previous configurations are used to help the Operator in the first
commissioning of the subrack but they are not fixed. It is possible to modify the
matrix accesses scheme specified setting the proper fields in the next window.
Note that a slot must have 0 or 16 matrix accesses equipped.
Type 7E Subrack can not have 0 matrix accesses, it has to have at least 16
matrix accesses equipped.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 129 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

For DXC 4/1 the following window will be displayed:

For DXC 4/4 the following window will be displayed:

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 130 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

To commission Type 7E Subrack:


* Enter the Subrack Id. This value is used to identify the port subrack.
This Id number must be already configured on the Identification Unit (by hardware settings). The
operator must insert the same number in this field.
* It possible to specify in a Subrack Distance field two possible values:
Near
cable length = < 50m
Far
50 <cable length < 100m
Its default value is Near. It shall be possible to change in any moment this parameter selecting
Subrack Configuration - Modify.

NOTICE If you change the distance parametr during the normal traffic operation you will
cause the total traffic loss for the involved subrack.

* Enter the positions of the subrack in the exchange (Row, Side A/B, Rack and Subrack).
Side A/B is used to identify the position of the rack in the back-to-back installation.
Subrack identifies the physical position within the rack (1=bottom, 2=middle, 3=top).
* Starting from the Free matrix accesses previously specified the system proposes a
matrix access order used by this Port Equipment for transmitting internal data streams
from ports to matrices and vice-versa. However it is possible to modify this order using
the relevant arrow buttons.

NOTICE Depending on the subrack scheme selected, in some slot, all matrix accesses
could not be defined because unnecessary for the port management.

The Matrix Accesses field is a schematic representation of the port subrack connection area with
the relevant data cable connector physical co-ordinates (Y01->Y16 IM1 = I/F Module 1, IM2 = I/F
Module 2, IM3 = I/F Module 3, IM4 = I/F Module 4, IM5 = I/F Module 5).
The Matrix Accesses field shall specify the physical Matrix Accesses (connectors on the rear side
of the matrix) where the internal data streams of the Port Subrack are connected. In the DXC 4/1
each cable carry two of the internal data streams (from AUG-1/2 Port 1 to AUG-3/4 Port 10 stream),
while in the DXC 4/4 each cable carry four halves of the internal data streams (from AUG-1/2 Port
1/2 to AUG-15/16 Port 4/5 stream).
Under the assigned matrix accesses are indicated the relevant internal data streams.

IMPORTANT The matrix access order must be according to the installation.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 131 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Connection Area
Connection Unit

IM1 IM2 IM3 IM4 IM5

Y01
Y02
Y03
Y04
Y05
Y06
Y07
Y08
Y09
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13
Y14
Y15
Y16

To Matrix
From Matrix
Refer To:
Equipment Manual, section 1.4 "Equipment Composition".
* Enter in the SIO Card Id. field the Serial Expansion Unit used to connect the port subrack
to the Control and Timing Subrack.
S1A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 7) - normal working/protection.
S2A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 8) - normal working/protection.
S3A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 9) - normal working/protection.
S4A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 10) - normal working/protection
(only for DXC 4/1 512x512, DXC 4/1 256x256, DXC 4/4 512x512 and DXC 4/4 1024x1024).
S5A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 11) - normal working/protection
(only for DXC 4/1 512x512, DXC 4/1 256x256, DXC 4/4 512x512 and DXC 4/4 1024x1024).
* Enter in the SIO Line Id. field the serial port used for the connection (Line_1 to Line_18).
Before selecting the serial line check that the connection between Control and Timing Subrack and
Type 7E Ports Subrack have been correctly made (refer to Description Installation for more
information on the connections required).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 132 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Up to 14 serial lines (Line_5 to Line_18) are available for connection to the Ports Subracks in the
first Serial Expansion Unit (SIO_1). Up to 18 serial lines (Line_1 to Line_18) are available in the
other Serial Expansion Units (SIO_2 to SIO_5).
* Use V4 Fail A/B to enable/disable the detection of the V4-FAIL_A/B alarm relevant to
each connected channel. This facility is useful to perform a detailed diagnostic operation.
In case of one matrix defect, the related "Matrix A Fail" or "Matrix B Fail" alarms will be
shown but to check which is/are the channel/s effectively failed the options V4 Fail A/B
can be enabled; the "V4 Channel Fail A" or "V4 Channel Fail B" alarms, related to the
corresponding failed channel, will arise.
* Define if the subrack is equipped with the Environmental Cooling Units (Heat
Dissipation) or not.
* Press APPLY.
The MIUMx WIRING SCHEME push button allows accessing a window that displays the
relationship among the Matrix Interface Unit accesses, the physical cable connectors from and to
the matrix and the internal channels associated to the traffic units.
Note For this Subrack only the Port Controller E can be used.
Refer To:
Equipment Manual, section 2.3 "Electrical Connection".
See Also:
Operative States, Control and Timing Subrack: equipping, Fault Detection Procedure,
Matrix Subrack: commissioning (DXC 4/1), General Index

Type 7E Subrack: displaying information


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Read)
This option is used to display information on the operational state of the Type 7E Ports Subrack
together with serial interfaces and accesses in use.
See Also:
Type 7E Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Type 7E Subrack: modifying configuration


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Modify)
This option is used to modify the operational parameters assigned to a Type 7E Ports Subrack. It is
possible to modify:
n the Subrack Position in the telephone exchange;
n the Serial I/O Line Connection;
n the Matrix Accesses (if no one card is equipped in the slot that used those matrix
accesses);
n the detection state of the V4 Fail A/B alarms;
See Also:
Type 7E Subrack: equipping, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 133 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Type 7E Subrack: decommissioning


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Delete)
This option is used to decommission a Type 7E Ports Subrack.

A Type 7E Subrack can be decommissioned only when it is in the following


conditions:
a. All cross-connections using the selected port subrack have been removed.
b. All protections using the selected port subrack have been removed.
c. All synchronisation sources using the selected port subrack have been removed.
d. All Tributary Units have been decommissioned.
e. All Tributary Unit Ports have been decommissioned.
f. All performances have been stopped.
See Also:
Type 7E Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Type 7E Subrack: displaying inventory data


Path (Action-Inventory Data)
This option is used to display information relevant to the different units of the Type 7ESubrack. The
window shows factory information about the card identification, the card type, the serial number, the
part number and the revision of the card.
See Also:
Operative States, Control and Timing Subrack: displaying inventory data

Type 7E Subrack: displaying software details


Path (Action-Subrack Software Details)
This option is used to display information relevant to the SW on the units present in the Type 7E
Port Subrack.
The window shows information about the card identification, the card type, the active bank, the boot
EPROM code and the code of software loaded into the flash EEPROM Bank 1 or 2.

IMPORTANT A W before the boot EPROM code means Wrong Card Fitted.

See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 134 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

BOOSTER SUBRACK: COMMISSIONING


Path (Equipment Configuration-Subrack Commissioning-Booster Subrack)
This option is used to equip (or decommission) Booster Subracks.

IMPORTANT Type 6E Subrack can be managed by DXC 4/1 512x512 and DXC 4/4
1024x1024 only.

To commission a Booster Subrack and to enable the Action menu:


Select, in the rack layout, one of the available positions (empty field). This position should represent,
as far as possible, the physical disposition of the subrack.
See Also:
How To Select Objects, Operative States

Booster Subrack: equipping


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Create)
This option is used to equip a new Booster Subrack.

To commission a Booster Subrack:


* Enter the Subrack Id. This value is used to identify the port subrack. Values are in the
range 01 to 86.
The same value of the Subrack Id must be set on the Identification Unit of the subrack to be
equipped. The value selected for the Subrack Id (using internal hardware settings on the
Identification Unit) is displayed on a front panel of the Identification Unit itself.
* Enter the positions of the rack and subrack in the exchange (Row, Side A/B, Rack and
Subrack). Side A/B is used to identify the position of the rack for the back-to-back
installation (optional). Subrack identifies the physical position within the rack (1=bottom,
2=middle, 3=top).
* Enter in the SIO Card Id the Serial Expansion Unit used to connect the port subrack to
the Control & Timing Subrack.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 135 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

S1A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 7) - normal working/protection.
S2A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 8) - normal working/protection.
S3A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 9) - normal working/protection.
S4A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 10) - normal working/protection
(only for DXC 4/1 512x512, DXC 4/1 256x256, DXC 4/4 512x512 and DXC 4/4 1024x1024).
S5A/B
Serial Expansion Unit (Pos. 11) - normal working/protection
(only for DXC 4/1 512x512, DXC 4/1 256x256, DXC 4/4 512x512 and DXC 4/4 1024x1024).
* Enter in the SIO Line Id. the serial port used for the connection (Line_1 to Line_18).
Before selecting the serial line check that the connection between Control and Timing Subrack and
Booster Subrack have been correctly made (refer to Description Installation for more information on
the connections required).
Up to 14 serial lines (Line_5 to Line_18) are available for connection to the Ports Subracks in the
first Serial Expansion Unit (SIO_1). Ups to 18 serial lines (Line_1 to Line_18) are available in the
other Serial Expansion Units (SIO_2 to SIO_5).
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Operative States, Control and Timing Subrack: equipping, General Index

Booster Subrack: displaying information


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Read)
This option is used to display information on the operational state of the Booster Subrack together
with serial interfaces in use.
See Also:
Booster Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Booster Subrack: modifying configuration


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Modify)
This option is used to modify the operational parameters assigned to a Booster Subrack. It is
possible to modify:
n the Subrack Position in the telephone exchange;
n the Serial I/O Line Connection.
See Also:
Booster Subrack: equipping, Operative States

Booster Subrack: decommissioning


Path (Action-Subrack Management-Delete)
This option is used to decommission a Booster Subrack.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 136 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

A Booster Subrack can be decommissioned only when it is in the following


conditions:
n All Booster Units have been decommissioned.
See Also:
Booster Subrack: equipping, Operative States

IMPORTANT A W before the boot EPROM code means Wrong Card Fitted.

See Also:
Operative States

Booster Subrack: displaying inventory data


Path (Action-Inventory Data)
This option is used to display information relevant to the different units of the Booster Subrack. The
window shows factory information about the card identification, the card type, the serial number, the
part number and the revision of the card.
See Also:
Operative States, Control and Timing Subrack: displaying inventory data

Booster Subrack: displaying software details


Path (Action-Subrack Software Details)
This option is used to display information relevant to the SW on the units present in Booster. The
window shows information about the card identification, the card type, the active bank, the boot
EPROM code and the code of software loaded into the flash EEPROM Bank 1 or 2.

IMPORTANT A W before the boot EPROM code means Wrong Card Fitted.

See Also:
Operative States

UNIT: COMMISSIONING
Path (Equipment Configuration-Card Commissioning)
This option is used for managing the units of Matrix Subracks and Port Subracks.

To enable the Action menu:


* Select the subrack.
* Select the slot.
See Also:
How To Select Objects, Operative States

Unit: equipping (DXC 4/1)


Path (Action-Card Management-Create)
Procedure described in the following indicates how a unit can be equipped into the Ports Subracks.
The following units can be equipped (or unequipped):

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 137 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

In Type 2 Subrack:
n 16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit
n 16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit (G.703/G.704)
n 16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit Type 2
n 16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit Type 2 (G.703/G.704)
n 3x34Mbit/s Tributary (async.) Unit
n 3x45Mbit/s Tributary (async.) Unit
n 4x34Mbit/s Video Codec Tributary Unit
Note The 4x34Mbit/s Video Codec and 3x34/45Mbit/s Tributary Units can be equipped in
slots 1, 2 and 5, 6 only (slots 2 and 6 are used for protection).
In Type 3 Subrack:
n 63x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit
n 4x34Mbit/s Tributary (T-Mux) Unit
n 3x34Mbit/s Tributary (async.) Unit
n 3x45Mbit/s Tributary (async.) Unit
Note The 63x2Mbit/s Tributary Units can be equipped in slots 1, 4 and 7, 10 only (slot 6 is
used for protection). The 4x34Mbit/s T-Mux, 3x34Mbit/s and 3x45Mbit/s Tributary
Units can be equipped in all the slots (slots 5 and 6 are used for protection).
In Type 4 Subrack:
n 1x45Mbit/s Tributary (T-Mux) Unit
NoteThe units equipped in the even slots are used for protection.
In Type 5 Subrack:
n STM-1 G.703 Electrical Mux Unit
n STM-1 G.703 Electrical Mux Unit (Type 2)
n Optic/Mux Unit Standard Type
n Optic/Mux Unit Type 2
n 140Mbit/s Tributary (G.703) Unit
n 140Mbit/s Tributary (T-Mux) Unit

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 138 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

In Type 6 Subrack:
n STM-4 Optic/Mux Unit
n 2xSTM-1 Optic/Mux Unit
n 4xSTM-1/140Mbit/s Electric/Mux Unit
n 4xSTM-1 Electric/Mux Unit
Note STM-4 Optic/Mux Unit, 4xSTM-1/140 and 4xSTM-1 Electric/Mux Units can be
equipped in slots 1, 3, 5, 6 and 8 (slot 5 is used for protection). 2xSTM-1 Optic/Mux
Units can be equipped in all the slots. Remind that for each couple of slot (starting
from the slot 1) only a capacity of four equivalent STM-1 is available, then it is not
possible, for example, equip an STM-4 unit in slot 1 and a 2xSTM-1 unit in slot 2,
because a capacity of six equivalent STM-1 should be necessary.
In Type 6E Subrack:
n STM-4 Optic/Mux Unit Type 2
n 2xSTM-1 Optic/Mux Unit Type 3
n 4xSTM-1/140Mbit/s Electric/Mux Unit
n 4xSTM-1 Electric/Mux Unit Type 3
n Optical Amplifier Unit (Booster)
n Optical Preamplifier Unit
n 2 ch. Bidirectional WDM Mux/Demux (East/West)
Note Units have to be equipped according to the selected matrix accesses scheme.
In Type 7 Subrack:
n STM-16 Optic/Mux Unit
n Auxiliary Unit
n Optical Amplifier Unit (Booster)
n Optical Preamplifier Unit
n 2 ch. Bidirectional WDM Mux/Demux (East/West)
In Type 7E Subrack:
n STM-16 Optic/Mux Unit
In Type Booster Subrack:
n Optical Amplifier Unit (Booster)
n Optical Preamplifier Unit
n 2 ch. Bidirectional WDM Mux/Demux (East/West)
All other units are equipped by default since they are necessary for the operation of the equipment.

IMPORTANT The 140Mbit/s Tributary (T-Mux) Unit Type 2 (code: 131-7678/02) can be
configured either as 140Mbit/s Tributary (G.703) Unit or as 140Mbit/s Tributary
(T-Mux) Unit.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 139 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

To commission a card:
* Use CARD Type to select the type of unit to be commissioned.
For a Port Subrack the following cards are displayed:
2MB 16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit
2MB-T2 16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit Type 2
63x2Mb 63x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit
4x34-VC 4x34Mbit/s Video Codec Tributary Unit
34/45MB 3x34Mbit/s or 3x45Mbit/s Tributary Unit
3x34MB 3x34Mbit/s Tributary Unit
3x45MB 3x45Mbit/s Tributary Unit
TMUX-4x34 Transmux 4x34Mbit/s Tributary Unit
TMUX-45 Transmux 45Mb/s Tributary Unit
TMUX140 Transmux 140Mb/s Tributary Unit
140Mb 140Mbit/s Tributary Unit
STM1-El Electric/Mux Unit
STM1-Opt Optic/Mux Unit
STM4-Opt Optic/Mux Unit
2XSTM1-Opt Optic/Mux Unit
4xSTM1-El Electric/Mux Unit
4xSTM1-140 Electric/Mux Unit
STM16-Opt Optic/Mux Unit
Optical Amplifier Unit (Booster)

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 140 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Optical Preamplifier Unit


2 ch. Bidirectional WDM Mux/Demux (East/West)
* Use Card Version to select the type of card. The selection must be performed according
to the selected card type (previos step)

STM1 El
Standard Type
STM-1 G.703 Electrical Mux Unit, HW code 131-7230/02
STM-1 Type 2
STM-1 G.703 Electrical Mux Unit Type 2, HW code 131-7230/03

STM-1 Opt
Standard Type
Optic/Mux Unit, HW code 131-6786/**
STM1-Type 2
Optic/Mux Unit, HW code 131-9114/**

TMUX140
Transmux 140Mb/s Tributary Unit, HW code 131-7678/02

140Mb
140Mbit/s Tributary Unit, HW code 131-7677/01

TMUX-45
Transmux 45Mbit/s Tributary Unit, HW code 131-9593/01

TMUX-4x34
Transmux 4x34Mbit/s Tributary Unit, HW code 131-2126/01

63x2Mb
63x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit, HW code 131-8120/01

2MB
Standard Type
16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit, HW code 131-6788/02
CRC-4 Type
16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit (G.703/G.704) HW code 131-8923/01

2MB-T2
Standard Type
16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit Type 2, HW code 131-9124/01

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 141 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

CRC-4 Type
16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit (G.703/G.704) HW code 131-9124/02

34/45MB
Standard Type
3x34Mbit/s Tributary (async.) Unit, HW code 131-7636/02
45Mb
3x45Mbit/s Tributary (async.) Unit, HW code 131-7683/01
Note These two units are intended to be used in Type 2 Subrack.

3x34MB
3x34Mbit/s Tributary (async.) Unit, HW code 131-8685/01

3x45MB
3x45Mbit/s Tributary (async.) Unit, HW code 131-9251/01

4x34-VC
4x34Mbit/s Video Codec Tributary Unit, HW code 131-8741/01

STM4-Opt
Standard Type
Optic/Mux Unit, HW code 131-8681/**
STM4 Type 2
Optic/Mux Unit, HW code 131-9849/**

2XSTM1-Opt
NxSTM1 Type 3
Optic/Mux Unit, HW code 151-2121/**

4xSTM1-El
Standard Type
Electric/Mux Unit, HW code 131-9547/01
NxSTM1 Type 3
Electric/Mux Unit, HW code 131-9547/02

4xSTM1-140
Electric/Mux Unit, HW code 131-9122/02

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 142 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

STM16-Opt
Standard Type
Optic/Mux Unit, HW code 131-8828/**
T2 Type LPOM (Grey)
Optic/Mux Unit, HW code 131-9865/**
ST Type WDM (Grey Selected)
Optic/Mux Unit, HW code 131-9652/**
ST Type DWDM (Coloured)
Optic/Mux Unit, HW code 131-9652/**
MUX-4/3 (Grey)
Optic/Mux Unit, HW code 151-2223/07

Boost
Optical Amplifier Unit, Booster HW code 131-9117/**

PreAmpl
Optical Preamplifier Unit, Preamplifier HW code 131-9705/**

Filter
2 ch WDM Bid Mux/Demux (East), HW code 131-9542/**
2 ch WDM Bid Mux/Demux (West), HW code 131-9543/**
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Multiplexing Section Protection: configuring
Refer To:
Equipment Description, section "Equipment Composition"

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 143 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Auxiliary Unit: equipping


Path (Action-Card Management-Create)
Procedure described in the following indicates how an Auxiliary Unit can be equipped into the Ports
Subracks.
Note Auxiliary Unit can be equipped in the Type 7 Port Subrack only.

To commission an Auxiliary Unit:


* Type in the PHONE NUMBER text box the phone number to be assigned.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Auxiliary Unit Connection: managing

Unit: displaying information


Path (Action-Card Management-Read)
This option is used to display information on the operational state of the units present in the Port
Subracks and Matrix Subrack.
See Also:
Unit: equipping (DXC 4/1), Operative States

Unit: modifying configuration


Path (Action-Card Management-Modify)
This option is used to modify the Card Type and Version for a selected port unit.

IMPORTANT The Card Type menu is available only if You are logged in as Supervisor.

Note If you choose a MUX 4/3 you can not change the card version. You must delete it and
then create the new one.
See Also:
Unit: equipping (DXC 4/1), Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 144 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Unit: decommissioning
Path (Action-Card Management-Delete)
Procedure described in the following indicates how to decommission tributary units belonging to the
Port Subracks.
All the other units cannot be decommissioned since they are necessary for the operation of the
equipment.

A Tributary Unit can be decommissioned only when it is in the following


conditions:
n All cross-connections using the selected tributary unit have been removed.
n All protections using the selected tributary unit have been removed.
n The selected unit is not used as buffer unit for the protection of the left one (only for
16x2Mbit unit in the DXC 4/1).
n All synchronisation sources using the selected tributary unit have been removed.
n All ports have been deleted.
See Also:
Unit: equipping (DXC 4/1), Operative States

Unit: resetting
Path (Action-Reset)
This option is used to reset a card. The command causes a reprogramming of the unit.

NOTICE A reset of the port units causes a short interruption of the traffic.

The following units can be reset:


n All units of the port subracks with the exception of the Identification Unit and Power Supply
Units.
n Serial Expansion Units, Communication Units, Timing Selector of Control and Timing
Subrack.
n Matrix Controller Unit of Matrix Subrack.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 145 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

PORT: CONFIGURATION
Path (Equipment Configuration-Port Configuration)
This option is used to configure the ports specifying the operational parameters (e.g. error ratio,
signal type). This operation must be carried out after the commissioning of the cards (port units) in
order to make them available for the cross-connections. The port configuration enables the network
alarms detection.

To enable the Action menu:


* Select the port subrack containing the unit to be configured.
* Select the Tributary Unit to be configured.
* Select the port to be configured.
* Define the ports selection criteria by clicking on the exclusive buttons SINGLE or
MULTIPLE in the Selection Mode field. MULTIPLE selection allows to select (and
configure) more than one port at the same time, SINGLE allows to select only one port.
Note This facility is available for the 63x2Mbit/s Units only.
In case of multiple selection all the selected ports will be configured with the same operational
parameter.
The option ALL, available in the Port Selection box, allows to configure all the ports of the unit in the
same way (only for 16x2Mbit/s, 3x34Mbit/s, 3x45Mbit/s, 4x34Mbit/s Videocodec - belonging to DXC
4/1 -, 4xSTM1/140Mb and NxSTM-1 Units).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 146 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Use Jn I/O mode to select the format for the configuration of the J0 byte (section trace)
and the J1 byte (path trace). The possible formats are ASCII and HEX. Using the ASCII
format it is possible to insert the path trace as an alphanumeric sequence.
* In case a 4xSTM1/140Mb Unit has been chosen, define if the selected port has to be
configured as STM-1 or 140Mbit/s port by checking the Port Mode exclusive buttons.
Note After having configured a 4xSTM1/140Mb port, to change the Port Mode it is
necessary remove the whole port configuration.

Port: configuring operational parameter


Path (Action-Port Management-Create)
Use this option to create a new port (2Mbit/s, 34-45Mbit/s, 4x34Mbit/s Videocodec, 140Mbit/s,
140Mb T-Mux, STM-1, STM-4 or STM-16) assigning the relevant operational parameters.
STM-16 Port (MUX 4/3)
This option is relevnt to STM-16 MUX 4/3.

* Use Protocol Mode to choose which multiplexing path will be manage by the card
(SONET AU-3 management; SDH AU-4 management).
Note This facilities is related to STM-16 MUX 4/3 only.
* Set the Port Mode Value.
* Use AIS on RS-TIM to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
Matrix when a Trace Identifier Mismatch has been detected.
* Use RDI on RS-TIM to enable/disable the MS-RDI indication to the line when a Trace
Identifier Mismatch has been detected.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 147 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Use AIS on MS-EXC to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
Matrix when an excessive bit error rate (>10-3) is detected on the bytes B2.
* Use RDI on MS-EXC to enable/disable the MS-RDI indication to the line when an
excessive bit error ratio (>10-3) is detected on the bytes B2.
* Use MS/HO/LO DEG Count Mode to select the type of error rate evaluation mode
(Poisson or ETSI).
If Poisson has been selected.
Use MS DEG Threshold (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for considering the incoming stream
degraded. This calculation uses the bytes B2.
If ETSI has been selected.

Enter the percentage of BBE (DEG Threshold) detected on the bytes B2 (MS) and the number of
errored seconds which are activating/deactivating a bad/good period.
* Use Sect Trace Mode to set the type of section trace.
Single Byte Rx - Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J0 byte (section trace). A single byte value is sent into the J0
byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Single Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J0 byte. A single byte value is sent into the J0 byte.
Single Rx - 15 Bytes Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J0 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J0 byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J0 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J0 byte.

* Use Sect Trace (J0) Exp to set the value expected on Byte J0.
* Use Sect Trace (J0) Conf to set the value sent on Byte J0. Values lower than 7F
(standard character set) are allowed for every byte if the HEX format for the configuration
has been selected.
* Use Sect Trace Transmission to enable/disable the Section Trace management. If
Section Trace has been disabled a value 01 single byte is sent.
* Use Sect Trace Mism Detection to enable/disable the issue of J0 mismatch alarm in
presence of a wrong Section Trace on the receive side.

IMPORTANT If you set Sonet mode, J0 trasmission and J0 mismatch detection will be
disabled.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 148 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Use Line Expected SS Bit value to define the expected SS bit value for a framing
according to SDH or SONET specifications.
Note When the Line Expected SS Bit value is configured as SONET, only passing
through VC-4 cross-connections are allowed.
* Use Line Configured SS Bit value to define the SS bit value sent to the line.
* Use Optical Protection to enable/disable the optical protection of the unit.
This option is used for testing purposes. It is suggested to set it to Enabled.

NOTICE Setting this option to disable the equipment can be considered as potentially
dangerous.

Refer To:
Safety Rules for SDH Equipment Handbook.
Note For STM-4 Unit, the Optical Protection works only for the long-haul Units.
* Press APPLY.
Note The port frame and the VC-4s will be configured with the default parameter.
In the LOM Defect Recovery Time field, the time of handling of the AU-4-Xv multiframe error
has to be indicated. The value inserted represents the time to wait for the correct multiframe to
be restored.
In the SQM Defect Issue Thr. field the Operator has to indicate the number of defect
multiframes after that an SQM alarm will arise.
In the SQM Defect Clear Thr. field the Operator has to indicate the number of correct frames (with
correct sequencing) that have to be received for clearing the SQM alarm.

IMPORTANT The new fields LOM Defect Recovery Time, SQM Defect Issue Thr. and SQM
Defect Clear Thr. are exclusively related to the new STM-16 MUX-4/3 optical
units; when we configure a versions of STM-16 units different from MUX-4/3 ,
these new fields are not available.

See Also:
AU Group Definition, Alarms: port mode

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 149 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

STM-16/4 Port (Standard Type)

* Set the Port Mode Value.


* Use AIS on RS-TIM to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
Matrix when a Trace Identifier Mismatch has been detected.
* Use RDI on RS-TIM to enable/disable the MS-RDI indication to the line when a Trace
Identifier Mismatch has been detected.
* Use AIS on MS-EXC to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
Matrix when an excessive bit error rate (>10-3) is detected on the bytes B2.
* Use RDI on MS-EXC to enable/disable the MS-RDI indication to the line when an
excessive bit error ratio (>10-3) is detected on the bytes B2.
* Use MS/HO/LO DEG Count Mode to select the type of error rate evaluation mode
(Poisson or ETSI).
If Poisson has been selected.
Use MS DEG Threshold (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for considering the incoming stream
degraded. This calculation uses the bytes B2.
If ETSI has been selected.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 150 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Enter the percentage of BBE (DEG Threshold) detected on the bytes B2 (MS) and the number of
errored seconds which are activating/deactivating a bad/good period.
* Use Sect Trace Mode to set the type of section trace.
Single Byte Rx - Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J0 byte (section trace). A single byte value is sent into the J0
byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Single Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J0 byte. A single byte value is sent into the J0 byte.
Single Rx - 15 Bytes Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J0 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J0 byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J0 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J0 byte.

* Use Sect Trace (J0) Exp to set the value expected on Byte J0.
* Use Sect Trace (J0) Conf to set the value sent on Byte J0. Values lower than 7F
(standard character set) are allowed for every byte if the HEX format for the configuration
has been selected.
* Use Sect Trace Transmission to enable/disable the Section Trace management. If
Section Trace has been disabled a value 01 single byte is sent.
* Use Sect Trace Mism Detection to enable/disable the issue of J0 mismatch alarm in
presence of a wrong Section Trace on the receive side.
* Use Line Expected SS Bit value to define the expected SS bit value for a framing
according to SDH or SONET specifications.
Note When the Line Expected SS Bit value is configured as SONET, only passing
through VC-4 cross-connections are allowed.
* Use Line Configured SS Bit value to define the SS bit value sent to the line.
* Use Optical Protection to enable/disable the optical protection of the unit.
This option is used for testing purposes. It is suggested to set it to Enabled.

NOTICE Setting this option to disable the equipment can be considered as potentially
dangerous.

Refer To:
Safety Rules for SDH Equipment Handbook.
Note For STM-4 Unit, the Optical Protection works only for the long-haul Units.
* Press APPLY.
Note The port frame and the VC-4s will be configured with the default parameter.
See Also:
Alarms: port mode

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 151 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

STM-1 Port (4xSTM-1/140Mbit/s and NxSTM-1 Unit)


This option applies to 4xSTM-1/140Mbit/s or NxSTM-1 Unit port defined as STM-1.

* Set the Port Mode Value.


* Use AIS on RS-TIM to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
Matrix when a Trace Identifier Mismatch has been detected.
* Use RDI on RS-TIM to enable/disable the MS-RDI indication to the line when a Trace
Identifier Mismatch has been detected.
* Use AIS on MS-EXC to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
Matrix when an excessive bit error rate (>10-3) is detected on the bytes B2.
* Use RDI on MS-EXC to enable/disable the MS-RDI indication to the line when an
excessive bit error ratio (>10-3) is detected on the bytes B2.
* Use MS/HO/LO DEG Count Mode to select the type of error rate evaluation mode
(Poisson or ETSI).
If Poisson has been selected.
Use MS DEG Threshold (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for considering the incoming stream
degraded. This calculation uses the bytes B2.
If ETSI has been selected.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 152 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Enter the percentage of BBE (DEG Threshold) detected on the bytes B2 (MS) and the number of
errored seconds which are activating/deactivating a bad/good period.
* Use Sect Trace Mode to set the type of section trace.
Single Byte Rx - Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J0 byte (section trace). A single byte value is sent into the J0
byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Single Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J0 byte. A single byte value is sent into the J0 byte.
Single Rx - 15 Bytes Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J0 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J0 byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J0 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J0 byte.

* Use Sect Trace (J0) Exp to set the value expected on Byte J0.
* Use Sect Trace (J0) Conf to set the value sent on Byte J0. Values lower than 7F
(standard character set) are allowed for every byte if the HEX format for the configuration
has been selected.
* Use Sect Trace Transmission to enable/disable the Section Trace management. If
Section Trace has been disabled a value 01 single byte is sent.
* Use Sect Trace Mism Detection to enable/disable the issue of J0 mismatch alarm in
presence of a wrong Section Trace on the receive side.
* Use Line Expected SS Bit value to define the expected SS bit value for a framing
according to SDH or SONET specifications.
Note When the Line Expected SS Bit value is configured as SONET, only passing
through VC-4 cross-connections are allowed.
* Use Line Configured SS Bit value to define the SS bit value sent to the line.
* Use Optical Protection to enable/disable the optical protection of the unit.
This option is used for testing purposes. It is suggested to set it to Enabled.

NOTICE Setting this option to disable the equipment can be considered as potentially
dangerous.

Refer To:
Safety Rules for SDH Equipment Handbook.
Note For 2xSTM-1 Optical Unit only.
* Press APPLY.
Note The port frame and the VC-4s will be configured with the default parameter.
See Also:
Alarms: port mode

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 153 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

STM-1 Port (Type 2)


This option applies to STM-1 G.703 Electrical/Optical Mux Type 2.

* Use AIS on RS-TIM to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
Matrix when a Trace Identifier Mismatch has been detected.
* Use RDI on RS-TIM to enable/disable the MS-RDI indication to the line when a Trace
Identifier Mismatch has been detected.
* Use AIS on MS-EXC to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
Matrix when an excessive bit error rate (>10-3) is detected on the bytes B2.
* Use RDI on MS-EXC to enable/disable the MS-RDI indication to the line when an
excessive bit error ratio (>10-3) is detected on the bytes B2.
* Use AIS on VC Unequip enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
Matrix when a HP-Payload Label Unequipped is detected.
* Use RDI on VC Unequip enable/disable the HP-RDI indication to the line when a HP-
Payload Label Unequipped is detected.
* Use AIS on HO-TIM to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
Matrix when a HO Trace Identifier Mismatch has been detected.
* Use RDI on HO-TIM to enable/disable the RDI indication to the line when a Trace
Identifier Mismatch has been detected.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 154 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Use AIS on PLM to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
Matrix when a HP-Payload Label Mismatch has been detected.
* Use RDI on PLM to enable/disable the HP-RDI indication to the line when a HP-Payload
Label Mismatch has been detected.
* Use AIS on HO-EXC to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
Matrix when a HO EXC (excessive bit error ratio - >10-3) has been detected.
* Use RDI on HO-EXC to enable/disable the RDI indication to the line when a HO EXC
(excessive bit error ratio - >10-3) has been detected.
* Use MS/HO/LO DEG Count Mode to select the type of error rate evaluation mode
(Poisson or ETSI).
If Poisson has been selected.
Use MS DEG Threshold (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for considering the incoming stream
degraded. This calculation uses the bytes B2.
Use HO PATH DEG Thr. (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for considering the VC-payload degraded
on the Virtual Containers (VC-4). This calculation uses the byte B3 (VC-4 and VC-3) and the byte
V5 (VC-2, VC-12).
If ETSI has been selected.

Enter the number of BBE (DEG Threshold) detected on the bytes B2 (MS) and the number of
errored seconds which are activating/deactivating a bad/good period.
Enter the number of BBE (DEG Threshold) for the VC (HO PATH) and the number of errored
seconds which are activating/deactivating a bad/good period.
* Use Sect Trace Mode to set the type of section trace.
Single Byte Rx - Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J0 byte (section trace). A single byte value is sent into the J0
byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Single Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J0 byte. A single byte value is sent into the J0 byte.
Single Rx - 15 Bytes Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J0 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J0 byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J0 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J0 byte.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 155 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Use Sect Trace (J0) Exp to set the value expected on Byte J0.
* Use Sect Trace (J0) Conf to set the value sent on Byte J0. Values lower than 7F
(standard character set) are allowed for every byte if the HEX format for the configuration
has been selected.
* Use Sect Trace Transmission to enable/disable the Section Trace management. If
Section Trace has been disabled a value 01 single byte is sent.
* Use Sect Trace Mism Detection to enable/disable the issue of J0 mismatch alarm in
presence of a wrong Section Trace on the receive side.
* Use Path Trace Mode to set the type of path trace.
Single Byte Rx - Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J1 byte (path trace). A single byte value is sent into the J1
byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Single Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J1 byte. A single byte value is sent into the J1 byte.
Single Rx - 15 Bytes Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J1 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J1 byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J1 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J1 byte.

* Use Path Trace (J1) Exp to set the value expected on Byte J1.
* Use Path Trace (J1) Conf to set the value sent on Byte J1. Values lower than 7F
(standard character set) are allowed for every byte if the HEX format for the configuration
has been selected.
* Use Signal Label Exp to set logical state expected on byte C2.The following values can
be assigned: Equip (non spec.), TUG structured, Locked TU, Async. 34 Mb, Async 140
Mb, FDDI, ATM, MAN.
* Use Signal Label Conf to set logical state sent on byte C2 (see above).
* Use Path Trace (J1) Transmission to enable/disable the Path Trace management. If
Path Trace has been disabled a value 01 single byte is sent.
* Use Path Trace (J1) Mism Detection to enable/disable the issue of J1 mismatch alarm
in presence of a wrong path trace on the receive side.
* Use HO PATH-PROT SW CRITERIA to set the criteria for the high order path protection
switch of the selected port.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 156 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

NON INTRUSIVE
The switch is caused by the following alarms: AU_AIS, AU_LOP, HP_UNEQ, HP_TIM, HP_DEG,
HP_EXC. This is the most sensitive SNC Protection for high order VC.
INHERENT
The switch is caused by the following alarms: AU_AIS, AU_LOP. This is the least sensitive SNC
protection for high order VC.
PARTIAL NOT INTRUSIVE
The switch criteria for the SNC protection of the high order VC, can be enabled by the operator
(Apart from the AU_AIS and AU_LOP switch criteria).
* Use H1 byte SS bit value to set the port for a framing according to SDH or SONET
specifications.
* Use Laser Restart Delay to insert a delay for the automatic restart of the laser after an
interruption (only for Optic/Mux Units).
* Press APPLY.
Note The port frame and the VC-4s will be configured with the default parameter.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 157 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

STM-1 Port (Type 1)


This option applies to STM-1 G.703 Electrical/Optical Mux Type 1.

To configure a STM-1 port:


* Use EXC to enable/disable the downstream injection of AU-AIS indication to the Matrix
when an excessive bit error ratio (>10-3) is detected on byte B2 (MS-EXC).
* Use C2 Mismatch to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
Matrix when a C2 mismatch is detected (HP-PLM).
* Use J1 Mismatch to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
Matrix when a J1 mismatch is detected (HP-TIM).
* Use RDI to select the type of management for the RDI alarm.
Automatic
Enables the issue of Remote Defect Indication alarm (bits 6, 7 and 8 of byte K2) in case of alarms.
* Use Laser Restart Delay to insert a delay for the automatic restart of the laser after an
interruption (only for Optic/Mux Units).
* Use MS DEG Threshold (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for the error rate check on B2
bytes.
* Use HO Mux Path to define the High Order Multiplexing Path.
* Use HO PATH DEG Thr. (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for the error rate check on the
Virtual Containers (VC-12 or VC-4).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 158 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Use H1 byte SS bit value to set the port for a framing according to SDH or SONET
specifications.
* Use C2 Expected to set logical state expected on byte C2. The following values can be
assigned: Equip (non spec.), TUG structured, Locked TU, Async. 34 Mb, Async 140 Mb,
FDDI, ATM, MAN.
* Use C2 Configured to set logical state sent on byte C2 (see above). The following
values can be assigned: Equip (non spec.), TUG structured.
* Use J1 Expected to set all 0s (or all 1s) expected in byte J1 (Path Trace).
* Use J1 Configured to set all 0s (or all 1s) sent to byte J1 (Path Trace).
* Press APPLY.
140Mbit/s port (4xSTM-1/140Mbit/s and NxSTM-1 Unit)
This option applies to 4xSTM-1/140Mbit/s Unit port defined as 140Mbit/s.

To configure a 140Mbit/s port:


* Use Line Prot. Switch on AIS to enable/disable the line protection switching when an
AIS is detected on the 140Mbit/s PDH input.
* Use Line Prot. Switch on SF to enable/disable the line protection switching when a
Signal Failure is detected on the 140Mbit/s PDH input.
* Use AIS on PDH AIS to enable/disable the issue of a full AIS signal towards multiplexing
path in presence of AIS detected on the incoming plesiochronous signal.
* Use Line DEG Threshold (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for the error rate check on the
140Mbit/s PDH input.
* Use Signal Type to check the frame alignment word (Framed) according to ITU-T Rec.
G.751, G.755, G.757, (in case of failure an AIS is forwarded downstream) or a signal
unstructured without alignment word (Unframed).
* Press APPLY.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 159 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

140Mbit/s port

To configure a 140Mbit/s port:


* Use Line EXC to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the Matrix
when an excessive bit error rate (10-3) is detected on 140Mbit/s PDH input.
* Use HO EXC to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the line
when an excessive bit error rate (10-3) is detected on the VC-4 (byte B3).
* Use C2 Mismatch to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the line
when a C2 mismatch is detected (HP-PLM).
* Use J1 Mismatch to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the line
when a J1 mismatch is detected (HP-TIM).
* Use Path Trace Mode to set the type of path trace.
Single Byte Rx - Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J1 byte (path trace). A single byte value is sent into the J1
byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Single Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J1 byte. A single byte value is sent into the J1 byte.
Single Rx - 15 Bytes Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J1 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J1 byte.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 160 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

15 Bytes Rx - Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J1 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J1 byte.

* Use Path Trace (J1) Exp to set the value expected on Byte J1.
* Use Path Trace (J1) Conf to set the value sent on Byte J1. Values lower than 7F
(standard character set) are allowed for every byte if the HEX format for the configuration
has been selected.
* Use Signal Label Exp to set logical state expected on byte C2. The following values can
be assigned: Async. 140Mb, Equip. (not spec.).
* Use Path Trace (J1) Transmission to enable/disable the Path Trace management. If
Path Trace has been disabled a value 00 is sent in all bytes.
* Use Path Trace (J1) Mism Detection to enable/disable the issue of J1 mismatch alarm
in presence of a wrong path trace on the receive side.
* Use Line DEG Threshold (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for the error rate check on the
140Mbit/s PDH input.
* Use Signal Type to check the frame alignment word (Framed) according to ITU-T Rec.
G.751, G.755, G.757, (in case of failure an AIS is forwarded downstream) or a signal
unstructured without alignment word (Unframed).
* Use HO PATH DEG Thr. (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for the error rate check on the
Virtual Containers (VC-4).
* Use Line Prot. Switch on AIS to enable/disable the line protection switching when AIS is
detected on the 140Mbit/s PDH input.
* Press APPLY.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 161 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

140Mb T-Mux port

To configure a 140Mbit/s T-Mux port:


* Use AIS on EXC to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
Matrix when an excessive bit error rate (10-3) is detected on 140Mbit/s PDH input.
* Use AIS on PLM to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the line
when a Payload Label Mismatch is detected on the VC-12.
* Use AIS on VC Uneq to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
line when an Unequipped label is detected on the VC-12.
* Use AIS & RDI on TIM to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to
the line and the issue of the RDI indication to the Matrix when a trace identifier mismatch
is detected on the VC-12.
* Use RDI on EXC to enable/disable the injection of the RDI indication to the Matrix when
an excessive bit error rate (10-3) is detected on the VC-12 incoming from the Matrix.
* Use RDI on PLM to enable/disable the injection of the RDI indication to the Matrix when
a Payload Label Mismatch is detected on the VC-12.
* Use RDI on VC Uneq to enable/disable the injection of the RDI indication to the Matrix
when an Unequipped label is detected on the VC-12.
* Use Line Prot. Switch on AIS to enable/disable the line protection switching when an
AIS is detected on the 140Mbit/s PDH input.
* Use O-R bits Value to select the desired value (0 or 1) for the stuffing bits O and R

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 162 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Use Line DEG Threshold (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for the error rate check on the
140Mbit/s PDH input.
* Use LO PATH DEG Thr. (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for the error rate check on the
Virtual Containers (VC-12).
* Use Path Trace (J2) Mism Detection to enable/disable the detection of mismatch on the
path trace of all the VC-12 managed by the unit.
* Use Path Trace Mode to set the type of path trace for all the VC-12 managed by the unit.
Possible options are:
Single Byte Rx - Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J2 byte (path trace). A single byte value is sent into the J2
byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Single Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J2 byte. A single byte value is sent into the J2 byte.
Single Rx - 15 Bytes Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J2 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J2 byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J2 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J2 byte.
* Use 2Mb CHANNEL TO DISCARD to select the 2Mbit/s channel contained in the
incoming 140Mbit/s plesiochronous signal to be lost. On the line side the selected
channel (discarded towards the matrix side) is replaced with an AIS signal.

IMPORTANT In the 140Mbit/s signal are present 64x2Mbit/s signals but only 63x2Mbit/s can
be multiplexed to the matrix. By default the 64th 2Mbit/s stream (pos. 444) is
discarded.

* Press APPLY.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 163 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

2Mbit/s ports (63x2Mbit/s Unit)

* Set the Port Mode Value.


* Use Line DEG Threshold (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for the error rate check on the
2Mbit/s PDH input.
* Use PDH-AIS Regeneration to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication
to the Matrix when AIS is detected on 2Mbit/s PDH input.
* Use Signal Type to select the type of signal checked by the unit.
Unframed
2Mbit/s signal unframed.
Framed
2Mbit/s signal framed according to G703/G.704.
* Use PDH CRC-4 to enable/disable the CRC framing check in the 2Mbit/s signal.
* Use PDH Traffic Rate to define the input signal traffic rate (1,5 or 2Mbit/s).

IMPORTANT The sixty-three ports managed by the unit have to be considered divided in two
groups: the first group includes the ports from 1 to 32 the second group the ports
from 33 to 63. Within each group the ports must be configured to manage the
same traffic rate (PDH Traffic Rate - 1,5 or 2Mbit/s signal).

See Also:
2Mbit/s Type 2 Port: configuring global parameters, 2Mbit/s Port: configuring the
G703/G704 frame characteristics, LPOM Ports: configuring LO VC operational
parameter (DXC 41), Alarms: port mode

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 164 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

2Mbit/s ports (Standard Type and CRC-4 Type)

To configure a 2Mbit/s port:


* Use Signal Label Expected to set logical state expected on bits 5, 6 and 7 of byte V5.
The following values can be assigned: VC Eq non specific., Async Floating, VC
Unequipped.
* Use Signal Label Configured to set logical state sent on bits 5, 6 and 7 of byte V5 (see
above).
* Press APPLY.
If this operation is carried out for the first time having selected APPLY the system displays a
message requiring the modification of the port global parameters.
Select OK for modifying now the port global parameters and make the proper window to be
displayed.
See Also:
2Mbit/s Port: configuring global parameters, 2Mbit/s Port: configuring the G703/G704
frame characteristics, General Index

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 165 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

2Mbit/s-T2 ports (Standard Type and CRC-4 Type)

To configure a 2Mbit/s-T2 port:

IMPORTANT If this operation is carried out for the first time, the Port Global Parameters
window is displayed. Set the port global parameters for all the ports managed by
the 16x2Mbit./s Tributary Unit (as described in the paragraph 2Mbit/s Type 2
Port: configuring global parameters), then press FORWARD.

* Use LO PATH DEG Thr. (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for the error rate check on the
VC-12.
* Use Path Trace Mode to set the type of path trace.
15 Bytes Rx - Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J2 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J2 byte.
* Use Path Trace (J2) Exp to set the value expected on Byte J2.
* Use Path Trace (J2) Conf to set the value sent on Byte J2. Values lower than 7F
(standard character set) are allowed for every byte if the HEX format for the configuration
has been selected.
* Use Signal Label Exp to set logical state expected on bits 5, 6 and 7 of byte V5. The
default value is set to Async floating.
* Use Signal Label Conf to set logical state configured on bits 5, 6 and 7 of byte V5. The
default value is set to Async floating.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
2Mbit/s Type 2 Port: configuring global parameters, 2Mbit/s Port: configuring the
G703/G704 frame characteristics

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 166 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

34/45Mbit/s port (Type 2 Subrack)

To configure a 34Mbit/s port:


* Use RDI on VC Unequip to enable/disable the injection of the RDI indication to the
Matrix when an Unequipped signal label is detected on byte C2 of the VC-3.
* Use AIS on VC Unequip to enable/disable the injection of AIS indication to the line when
an Unequipped signal label is detected on byte C2 of the VC-3.
* Use PDH AIS Regeneration to enable/disable the issue of a full AIS signal towards
multiplexing path in presence of AIS detected on the incoming plesiochronous signal.
* Use Path Trace Mode to set the type of path trace.
Single Byte Rx - Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J1 byte (path trace). A single byte value is sent into the J1
byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Single Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J1 byte. A single byte value is sent into the J1 byte.
Single Rx - 15 Bytes Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J1 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J1 byte.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 167 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

15 Bytes Rx - Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J1 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J1 byte.

* Use Path Trace (J1) Exp to set the value expected on Byte J1.
* Use Path Trace (J1) Conf to set the value sent on Byte J1. Values lower than 7F
(standard character set) are allowed for every byte if the HEX format for the configuration
has been selected.
* Use Signal Label Exp to set logical state expected on byte C2. The following values can
be assigned: Async. 34-45Mb, Equip. (not spec.).
* Use Path Trace (J1) Transmission to enable/disable the Path Trace management. If
Path Trace has been disabled a value 00 is sent in all bytes.
* Use Path Trace (J1) Mism Detection to enable/disable the issue of J1 mismatch alarm
in presence of a wrong path trace on the receive side.
* Press APPLY.
If is this operation is carried out for the first time (immediately after the unit commissioning), having
selected APPLY the system displays a message requiring the modification of the port global
parameters.
Select OK for modifying now the port global parameters and make the proper window to be
displayed.
See Also:
34Mbit/s Port: configuring global parameters
34Mb port (4x34Mbit/s Transmux Unit)

To configure a 4x34Mbit/s port:


* Use Line DEG Threshold (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for the error rate check on the
34Mbit/s PDH input.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Operative States, LPOM Ports: configuring LO VC operational parameter (DXC 41)
34Mb-VC port (4x34Mbit/s VideoCodec Unit)

To configure a 4x34Mbit/s port:


* Press APPLY.
See Also:
4x34Mbit/s Videocodec Port: configuring global parameters, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 168 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

34/45Mbit/s port (Type 3 Subrack)

To configure a 34Mbit/s port:


* Set the Port Mode Value.
* Use Line DEG Threshold (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for the error rate check on the
34-45Mbit/s PDH input.
* Use 34-45 Mb Signal Framing to set the checking of a frame not structured without
alignment word (Unframed) or a frame structured with alignment word (Framed).
* Use PDH AIS Regeneration to enable/disable the issue of a full AIS signal towards
multiplexing path in presence of AIS detected on the incoming plesiochronous signal.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Operative States, LPOM Ports: configuring LO VC operational parameter (DXC 41)

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 169 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

45Mb T-Mux port

To configure a 45Mbit/s T-Mux port:


* Use PDH-AIS on LP-PLM to enable/disable the injection of AIS indication to the line
when a Payload Label Mismatch is detected on the VC-12 incoming from the Matrix.
* Use PDH-AIS on LP-TIM to enable/disable the injection of AIS indication to the line when
a trace identifier mismatch is detected on the incoming VC-12.
* Use PDH-AIS on LP-Uneq to enable/disable the injection of AIS indication to the line
when an Unequipped signal label is detected on byte C2 of the VC-12 incoming from the
Matrix.
* Use RDI on LP-EXC to enable/disable the injection of the RDI indication to the Matrix
when an excessive bit error rate (10-3) is detected on the VC-12 incoming from the
Matrix.
* Use RDI on LP-PLM to enable/disable the injection of the RDI indication to the Matrix
when a Payload Label Mismatch is detected on the VC-12 incoming from the Matrix.
* Use RDI on LP-TIM to enable/disable the issue of Remote Defect Indication alarm (bit 4
of byte V5) towards the Matrix in case of trace identifier mismatch on the
VC-12.
* Use RDI on LP-Uneq to enable/disable the injection of the RDI indication to the Matrix
when an Unequipped signal label is detected on byte C2 of the VC-3.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 170 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Use MS/HO/LO DEG Count Mode to select the type of error rate evaluation mode
(Poisson or ETSI).
If Poisson has been selected.
Use LO PATH DEG Thr. (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for considering the VC payload degraded
on the Virtual Containers (VC-12). This calculation uses the byte V5 (VC-2, VC-12).
If ETSI has been selected.

Enter the number of BBE (DEG Threshold) detected on the bytes V5 (LO) and the number of
errored seconds which are activating/deactivating a bad/good period.
* Define the DS2 Channel Configuration by checking the relevant DS1, E1 exclusive
buttons.
The unit receive a DS3 (multiframed digital signal at 45Mbit/s) which is demultiplied on 7
DS2 (multiframed digital signal at 6Mbit/s). This signal can be demultiplied on four DS1
(1,5 Mbit/s as defined by ANSI T1.107) or on three E1 (2Mbit/s as defined by ITU-T
G747).
* Use DS3 Idle Signal to enable/disable the DS3 idle signal condition.
The DS3 idle signal is a particular condition on that the 45Mbit/s T-Mux Unit is not cross-
connected but the frame configuration is correct.
When the 45Mbit/s T-Mux Unit is not cross-connected the possible options are:
Disabled
The unit output is disable.
Transmit Idle Signal
Transmission of a idle signal.
Transmit AIS Signal
Transmission of a AIS signal.
Note When the 45Mbit/s T-Mux Unit receive a DS3 Idle Signal, the DS3 IdleSignal alarm is
reported.
* Use FEAC Monitoring Enable to enable/disable the monitoring of the Far-End Alarm
and Control bit. This bit is used for remote alarm and state indication or DS3/DS1 remote
loopback request.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
2Mbit/s Type 2 Port: configuring global parameters, 4x34Mbit/s Videocodec Port:
configuring global parameters, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 171 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Port: displaying operational parameters


Path (Action-Port Management-Read)
This option is used to display the operational parameters selected for an already configured port.
See Also:
Port: configuring operational parameter, Operative States

Port: modifying operational parameters


Path (Action-Port Management-Modify)
This option is used to modify the operational parameters assigned to an already configured port.
See Also:
Port: configuring operational parameter, Operative States

Port: removing configuration


Path (Action-Port Management-Delete)
This option is used to decommission a port on a port subrack.
A port can be decommissioned only when it is in the following conditions:
a. All connections using the selected port have been removed
b. All protections using the selected port have been removed
c. Synchronisation sources using the selected port have been removed
A window will be displayed depending on the type of port selected. An information summary
regarding the port configuration is given in the window.
See Also:
Port: configuring operational parameter, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 172 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

2Mbit/s Port: configuring global parameters


Path (Action-Port 2Mb Global Param.-Setup)
This option is used for setting port parameters that are applied to all the 16x2Mbit/s ports present in
the 16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit (e.g.: Line DEG Threshold).

To set 2Mbit/s port global parameters:


* Use EXC to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the Matrix when
an excessive bit error ratio (10-3) is detected on 2Mbit/s PDH input and the injection of
AIS to the PDH line when an excessive bit error ratio (10-3) is detected on the VC-12
(byte V5).
* Use Signal Label Mismatch to enable/disable the injection of AIS indication to the line
when a signal label mismatch is detected.
* Use LO PATH DEG Thr. (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for the error rate check on the
VC12.
* Use Line DEG Threshold (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for the error rate check on the
2Mbit/s PDH input.
* O-R bit Value
Not used (for future applications).
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Port: configuring operational parameter

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 173 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

2Mbit/s Port: displaying global parameters


Path (Action-Port 2Mb Global Param.-Read)
This option is used for displaying the parameters that are applied to all 2Mbit/s ports.
See Also:
2Mbit/s Port: configuring global parameters, Operative States

2Mbit/s Type 2 Port: configuring global parameters


Path (Action-Port 2Mb Type2 Global Param.-Setup)
This option is used to configure the port parameters applied to all the ports supported by the
16x2Mbit/s-T2 Tributary Unit. This window is also activated when configuring for the first time a port
within the unit. In this case, the window is closed by the button FORWARD instead of APPLY.

To set 2 Mbit/s-T2 port global parameters:


* Use PDH-AIS on LP-PLM to enable/disable the injection of AIS indication to the line
when a payload label mismatch is detected on the incoming VC-12.
* Use PDH-AIS on LP-TIM to enable/disable the injection of AIS indication to the line when
a trace identifier mismatch is detected on the incoming VC-12.
* Use PDH-AIS on LP-Uneq to enable/disable the injection of AIS indication to the line
when a VC-Uneq label is detected on the incoming VC-12.
* Use PDH-AIS Regeneration to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication
to the Matrix when AIS is detected on 2Mbit/s PDH input.
* Use RDI on LP-EXC to enable/disable the issue of Remote Defect Indication alarm (bit 4
of byte V5) towards the Matrix when an excessive bit error rate (>10-3) is detected on byte
V5 (bit 1,2).
* Use RDI on LP-PLM to enable/disable the issue of Remote Defect Indication alarm (bit 4
of byte V5) towards the Matrix in case of payload label mismatch on the VC-12.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 174 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Use RDI on LP-TIM to enable/disable the issue of Remote Defect Indication alarm (bit 4
of byte V5) towards the Matrix in case of trace identifier mismatch on the VC-12.
* Use RDI on LP-Uneq to enable/disable the issues of Remote Defect Indication alarm (bit
4 of byte V5) towards the Matrix in case a LP-Uneq label is detected on the incoming VC-
12.
* Use LO PATH DEG Count Mode to select the type of error rate evaluation mode
(Poisson or ETSI).
* Use Line DEG Threshold (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for the error rate check on the
2Mbit/s PDH input.
* O-R bits Value
Not used (for future applications).
* Use Path Trace (J2) Mism Detection to enable/disable the issue of J2 mismatch alarm
in presence of a wrong path trace on the receive side.
* Press APPLY (or FORWARD if this window was activated by a Port Configuration
operation).

2Mbit/s Type 2 Port: displaying global parameters


Path (Action-Port 2Mb Type2 Global Param.-Read)
This option is used for displaying the parameters that are applied to all 2Mbit/s ports.
See Also:
2Mbit/s Type 2 Port: configuring global parameters, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 175 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

34Mbit/s Port: configuring global parameters


Path (Action-Port 34Mb Global Param.-Setup)
This option is used for setting port parameters that are applied to all the ports present in the 3x34 or
3x45Mbit/s Tributary Unit.

To set 34-45Mbit/s port global parameters:


* Use LINE DEG Threshold (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for the error rate check on
the 34-45Mbit/s PDH input.
* Use 34-45 Mb Signal Framing to set the checking of a frame not structured without
alignment word (Unframed) or a frame structured with alignment word (Framed).
* Use LO PATH DEG Thr. (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for the error rate check on the
VC-3.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Port: configuring operational parameter

34Mbit/s Port: displaying global parameters


Path (Action-Port 34Mb Global Param.-Read)
This option is used for displaying parameters that are applied to all the 34-45Mbit/s ports.
See Also:
34Mbit/s Port: configuring global parameters, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 176 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

34Mbit/s T-Mux Port: selecting the channel to discard


Path (Action-Channel To Discard)
This option is used to select the 2Mbit/s channel contained in the incoming 34Mbit/s plesiochronous
signals to be lost. On the line side the selected channel (discarded towards the matrix side) is
replaced with an AIS signal.
* Select the CHANNEL TO DISCARD
* Press APPLY

140Mbit/s T-Mux Port: configuring the VC-12 POH


Path (Action-TMUX140 VC12 POH-Setup)
This option is used to configure the low order path overhead of the VC-12 channels obtained from
the 2Mbit/s plesiochronous signals incoming from T-Mux port.

To set VC-12 POH:


* Use CHANNEL Selection to choose the channel to be modified. (ALL for all 2Mbit/s
channels).
* Use Path Trace (J2) Exp to set the value expected on Byte J2.
* Use Path Trace (J2) Conf to set the value sent on Byte J2. Values lower than 7F
(standard character set) are allowed for every byte if the HEX format for the configuration
has been selected.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
140Mbit/s T-Mux Port: displaying the VC-12 POH

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 177 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

140Mbit/s T-Mux Port: displaying the VC-12 POH


Path (Action-TMUX140 VC12 POH-Read)
This option is used to display the VC12 channel POH configuration for the selected 140Mb/s T-Mux
Card.

To display the current configuration of a VC12 path overhead:


* Use CHANNEL Selection to choose the channel. The parameters in use are
automatically displayed in the relevant fields.
See Also:
140Mbit/s T-Mux Port: configuring the VC-12 POH

4x34Mbit/s Videocodec Port: configuring global parameters


Path (Action-Port 4x34Mb VC Global Param.-Setup)
This option is used for setting port parameters that are applied to all the ports present in the
4x34Mbit/s Videocodec Tributary Unit.

To set 4x34Mbit/s Videocodec port global parameters:


* Use Signal Label Mismatch to enable/disable the injection of AIS indication to the line
when a signal label mismatch is detected.
* Use Line DEG Threshold (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for the error rate check on the
input video signal.
* Use LO PATH DEG Thr. (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for the error rate check on the
VC-3.
* Press APPLY.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 178 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

See Also:
4x34Mbit/s Videocodec Port: displaying global parameters

4x34Mbit/s Videocodec Port: displaying global parameters


Path (Action-Port 4x34Mb VC Global Param.-Read)
This option is used for displaying parameters that are applied to all the 34Mbit/s Videocodec ports.
See Also:
4x34Mbit/s Videocodec Port: configuring global parameters

2Mbit/s Port: configuring the G703/G704 frame characteristics


Path (Action-Port Frame Configuration-Setup)
This option is used for modifying the 2Mbit/s frame characteristics of the 16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit
(G703/G704).

To change the frame characteristics:


* Use Input Signal Type to select the type of signal checked by the unit.
Unframed
2Mbit/s signal unframed.
Framed
2Mbit/s signal framed according to G703/G.704.
* Use CRC-4 Monitoring to enable/disable the CRC framing check in the 2Mbit/s signal.
* Use RAI & E-Bit Monitoring to enable/disable the check of the Remote Alarm Indication
(RAI).
* Press APPLY.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 179 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

See Also:
2Mbit/s Port: displaying the G703/G704 frame characteristics, Unit: equipping (DXC
4/1)

2Mbit/s Port: displaying the G703/G704 frame characteristics


Path (Action-Port Frame Configuration-Read)
This option is used for displaying the 2Mbit/s frame characteristics of the 16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit
(G703/G704).
See Also:
2Mbit/s Port: configuring the G703/G704 frame characteristics

1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Port: setting the VC-12 parameter


Path (Action-VC12 parameter / DEG-Setup)
This option is used to configure the parameters of the VC-12 channels managed by the 1x45 T-Mux
Unit.

To set the VC-12 parameter:


* Select the VC-12 channel which parameters have to be configured using the VC12
CHANNEL Sel. scroll list.
* Use PDH/LO DEG Count Mode to select the type of error rate evaluation mode
(Poisson or ETSI).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 180 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

If Poisson has been selected.


Use LO PATH DEG Thr. (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for considering the payload degraded on
the Virtual Containers (VC-12). This calculation uses the byte V5 (VC-2, VC-12).
If ETSI has been selected.

Enter the number of BBE (DEG Threshold) for the VC (LO PATH) and the number of errored
seconds which are activating/deactivating a bad/good period.
* Use Path Trace (J2) Exp to set the value expected on Byte J2.
* Use Path Trace (J2) Conf to set the value sent on Byte J2. Values lower than 7F
(standard character set) are allowed for every byte if the HEX format for the configuration
has been selected.
* Use Signal Label Expected to set logical state expected on bits 5, 6 and 7 of byte V5.
The default value is set to Async floating.
* Use Signal Label Configured to set logical state configured on bits 5, 6 and 7 of byte
V5. The default value is set to Async floating.
* Use Path Trace (J2) Mism Detection to enable/disable the detection of mismatch on the
path trace of all the VC-12 managed by the unit.
* Use PDH AIS TIM to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the line
when a trace identifier mismatch is detected on the VC-12.
* Use LP RDI on TIM to enable/disable the issue of the RDI indication to the Matrix when a
trace identifier mismatch is detected on the VC-12.
* Press APPLY
See Also:
2Mbit/s Port: configuring the G703/G704 frame characteristics

1x45 T-Mux Mbit/s Port: displaying the VC-12 parameter


Path (Action-VC12 parameter / DEG-Read)
This option is used for displaying the parameters of the VC-12 channels managed by the 1x45 T-
Mux Unit.
See Also:
1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Port: setting the VC-12 parameter

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 181 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

STM-1 Port: setting HPOM alarm suppression state


Path (Action-HPOM Alarm Suppression)
This functionality performed at CCU level, concerns the correlation among network alarms,
generated independently by each Port Unit, making use of the information stored in the cross-
connection database. The aim of this functionality is to reduce the amount of alarms. At cross-
connection creation/deletion time, the CCU changes automatically the monitoring state of the
alarms involved, as below defined. If the functionality is enabled (default), the following alarms are
not monitored:
VC-4 Cross-connection
HP-UNEQ, HP-TIM, HP-PLM, HP-EXC, HP-DEG, HP-RDI (always not monitored).

IMPORTANT The default status of this option is enabled

See Also:
Port: configuring operational parameter, Operative States

STM-1 Type 2 Port: setting C2 mismatch detection state


Path (Action-C2 Mismatch Detection Enable)
This option is used to enable/disable the detection of mismatch on the signal label C2 (within the
VC-4 Path Overhead) for the selected STM-1 Type 2 port. This option is available only for the STM-
1 Type 2 optical and electrical Mux units.
See Also:
Port: configuring operational parameter, Operative States

34/45Mbit/s, 140Mbit/s, STM-N and NxSTM-1 Ports: displaying the SOH


bytes status
Path (Action-Get Overhead)
This option is used to display the status of the SOH bytes for the 34/45Mbit/s Tributary Units
(belonging to DXC 4/1), 140Mbit/s Tributary Units, STM-1 G703 Electrical and Optical Mux Unit
Type 2, STM-N Unit and for NxSTM-1 Unit.
See Also:
Port: configuring operational parameter

STM-N and 2xSTM-1 Ports: managing the optical parameters


Path (Action-Optical Parameters)
This option is used to display the optical parameters (Tx and Rx power, threshold and modulation
current, temperature, status of the laser transmitter) of the STM-4, STM-16, 2xSTM-1 Optical/Mux
Unit and STM-1 Optical/Mux Unit Type 2.
* Use Optical Protection to enable/disable the optical protection of the managed unit. This
option can be used for testing purposes. It is suggested to set it to Enabled.
In the Lambda field you can read the laser wavelenght.
* In Tx Power [dBm] you can set the Transmission Power of the laser.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 182 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

This two fields are related to STM-16 DWDM only.


Note For the STM-4/16 and 2xSTM-1 Optical/Mux Unit the Optical Protection state can
not be set because it has already been configured in the Port Configuration window.
This field shown only the value previously chooses.

NOTICE Setting this option to disable the equipment can be considered as potentially
dangerous.

Refer To:
Safety Rules for SDH Equipment Handbook.
* Press REFRESH to update the optical parameters displayed, press APPLY to confirm
the optical protection setting.

See Also:
Port: configuring operational parameter

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 183 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

STM-N Port: configuring VC-4 operational parameter


Path (Action-VC-4 Configuration)
This option is used to assign the VC-4 operational parameter to the configured NxSTM-1, 4x140-
155Mbit/s and STM-N Unit (with exception of STM-1 Unit).

To configure the VC-4 operational parameters:


* Select the AUG relevant to the VC-4 to be configured.
The option ALL allows configuring in the same way the VC-4 channels belonging to all AUGs.
* Use AIS on HO-TIM to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
Matrix when a High Order Path Trace Identifier Mismatch has been detected.
* Use RDI on HO-TIM to enable/disable the HO-RDI indication to the line when a High
Order Path Trace Identifier Mismatch has been detected.
* Use AIS on HO-PLM to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
Matrix when a High Order-Payload Label Mismatch has been detected.
* Use RDI on HO-PLM to enable/disable the HO-RDI indication to the line when a High
Order -Payload Label Mismatch has been detected.
* Use AIS on VC Unequip enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
Matrix when a High Order -Payload Label Unequipped is detected.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 184 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Use RDI on VC Unequip enable/disable the HO-RDI indication to the line when a High
Order -Payload Label Unequipped is detected.
* Use AIS on HO-EXC to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
Matrix when an excessive bit error rate (>10-3) is detected on the bytes B3.
* Use RDI on HO-EXC to enable/disable the HO-RDI indication to the line when an
excessive bit error ratio (>10-3) is detected on the bytes B3.
* MS/HO/LO DEG Count Mode display the type of error rate evaluation mode previously
configured in the Port Configuration window (see "Port: configuring operational
parameter" subparagraph).
If in the port configuration window Poisson has been selected
-5 -9
Use HO PATH DEG Thr. (10 to 10 ) to set the threshold for considering the VC payload
degraded on the Virtual Containers (VC-4). This calculation uses the byte B3 (VC-4).
If in the port configuration window ETSI has been selected
Enter the percentage of BBE (DEG Threshold) for the VC (HO PATH) and the number of errored
seconds which are activating/deactivating a bad/good period.

* Use Path Trace Mode to set the type of path trace.


Single Byte Rx - Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J1 byte (path trace). A single byte value is sent into the J1
byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Single Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J1 byte. A single byte value is sent into the J1 byte.
Single Rx - 15 Bytes Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J1 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J1 byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J1 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J1 byte.

* Use Path Trace (J1) Exp to set the value expected on Byte J1.
* Use Path Trace (J1) Conf to set the value sent on Byte J1. Values lower than 7F
(standard character set) are allowed for every byte if the HEX format for the configuration
has been selected.
* Use Signal Label Exp to set logical state expected on byte C2.The following values can
be assigned: Equip (non spec.), TUG structured, Locked TU, Async. 34 Mb, Async 140
Mb, FDDI, ATM, MAN.
* Use Path Trace (J1) Transmission to enable/disable the Path Trace management. If
Path Trace has been disabled a value 01 single byte is sent.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 185 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Use Path Trace (J1) Mism Detection to enable/disable the issue of J1 mismatch alarm
in presence of a wrong path trace on the receive side.
* Use Mode (in the HO PATH-PROT SW CRITERIA field) to set the criteria for the high
order path protection switch of the selected port.
NON INTRUSIVE
The switch is caused by the following alarms: AU_AIS, AU_LOP, HP_UNEQ, HP_TIM, HP_DEG,
HP_EXC. This is the most sensitive SNC Protection for high order VC.
INHERENT
The switch is caused by the following alarms: AU_AIS, AU_LOP. This is the least sensitive SNC
protection for high order VC.
PARTIAL NOT INTRUSIVE
The switch criteria for the SNC protection of the high order VC, can be enabled by the operator
(Apart from the AU_AIS and AU_LOP switch criteria).
* Use C2 Mismatch Detection to enable/disable the detection of mismatch on the signal
label C2 (within the VC-4 Path Overhead) for the selected AU.
* Use HPOM Alarm Suppression State to enable/disable the monitoring of some HP
network alarm. The aim of this functionality is to reduce the amount of alarms.
If the functionality is enabled (default), the following alarms are not monitored:
VC-4 Cross-connection
HP-UNEQ, HP-TIM, HP-PLM, HP-EXC, HP-DEG, HP-RDI (always not monitored)
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Port: configuration, STM-1 Type 2 Port: setting C2 mismatch detection state, STM-N
Port: configuring frame and supervisory unequipped state, STM-1 Port: setting HPOM
alarm suppression state

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 186 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

LPOM Ports: configuring LO VC operational parameter (DXC 4/1)


Path (Action-VC Configuration-Setup)
This option is used to assign the LO VC operational parameter to the configured NxSTM-1 Type 3,
STM-16 Type LPOM, STM-4 Type 2 Units, 63x2Mbit/s Unit, 4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit and
3x34/45Mbit/s Unit (for the Type 3 Subrack).
63x2Mbit/s Unit, 4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit and 3x34/45Mbit/s Unit

To configure the LO VC operational parameters:


* Select the TU and/or the 2Mbit/s port to be configured (port in case of 63x2Mbit/s Unit,
TU/Port in case of 4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit).
* Use RDI on LP-TIM to enable/disable the LO-RDI indication to the matrix when a Low
Order Path Trace Identifier Mismatch has been detected.
* Use AIS on LP-TIM to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
line when a Low Order Path Trace Identifier Mismatch has been detected.
* Use RDI on LP-Unequip enable/disable the LO-RDI indication to the matrix when a Low
Order -Payload Label Unequipped is detected.
* Use AIS on LP-Unequip enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
line when a Low Order -Payload Label Unequipped is detected.
* Use RDI on LP-EXC to enable/disable the LO-RDI indication to the matrix when an
excessive bit error ratio (>10-3) is detected.
* Use AIS on LP-EXC to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
line when an excessive bit error rate (>10-3) is detected.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 187 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Use RDI on LP-SLM to enable/disable the LO-RDI indication to the matrix when a Low
Order -Signal Label Mismatch has been detected.
* Use AIS on LP-SLM to enable/disable the downstream injection of AIS indication to the
line when a Low Order-Signal Label Mismatch has been detected.

IMPORTANT In case the selected unit is a 63x2Mbit/s the configured fault actions will be
enabled/disabled for all the first or second group of thirty-two ports (the two
groups include ports from 1 to 32 and ports from 33 to 63).

* LO PATH DEG Count Mode to select the type of error rate evaluation mode (Poisson or
ETSI).
If Poisson has been selected.
Use LO PATH DEG Thr. (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for considering the incoming stream
degraded. This calculation uses the bit 1 and 2 of the V5 byte.
If ETSI has been selected.

Enter the percentage of BBE (DEG Threshold) detected on the bit 1 and 2 of the V5 byte (LO) and
the number of errored seconds which are activating/deactivating a bad/good period.
* Use Path Trace Mode to set the type of path trace.
Single Byte Rx - Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J2 byte (path trace). A single byte value is sent into the J2
byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Single Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J2 byte. A single byte value is sent into the J2 byte.
Single Rx - 15 Bytes Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J2 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J2 byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J2 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J2 byte.
* Use Path Trace Expected to set the value expected on Byte J2.
* Use Path Trace Configured to set the value sent on Byte J2. Values lower than 7F
(standard character set) are allowed for every byte if the HEX format for the configuration
has been selected.
* Use Path Trace Transm. to enable/disable the Path Trace management. If Path Trace
has been disabled a value 00 is sent in all bytes.
* Use Path Trace Mism. Detection to enable/disable the issue of J2 mismatch alarm in
presence of a wrong path trace on the receive side.
* Use SL Mism Detect to enable/disable the detection of mismatch on the signal label (bit
5, 6 and 7 of the V5 byte) for the selected TU.
* Press APPLY.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 188 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

NxSTM-1 Type 3 and STM-4 Type 2 Unit

To configure the LO VC operational parameters:


* Select the AUG (in case of STM-N Unit).
* Use TU filter to define the VCs level to configure (VC12, VC2, VC3, ALL).
* Define the TU selection criteria by clicking on the exclusive buttons SINGLE or MULT. in
the TU Sel. Mode field. MULT. selection allows to select (and configure) more than one
TU at the same time, SINGLE allows to select only one TU.
* Select the TU. The number and the type of displayed TU depending on the configured
frame structure.
The button UNIT LIMITATIONS defines the limitations for the configuration chosen.
See Also:
STM-N Port: configuring frame and supervisory unequipped state
* LO PATH DEG Count Mode to select the type of error rate evaluation mode (Poisson or
ETSI).
If Poisson has been selected.
Use LO PATH DEG Thr. (10-5 to 10-9) to set the threshold for considering the incoming stream
degraded. This calculation uses: the bit 1 and 2 of the V5 byte for VC-12 and VC-2, the B3 byte for
the VC-3.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 189 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

If ETSI has been selected.


Enter the percentage of BBE (DEG Threshold) detected on the bit 1 and 2 of the V5 byte (VC-12
and VC-2) or on the B3 byte (VC-3) and the number of errored seconds which are
activating/deactivating a bad/good period.
* Use Mode (in the LO PATH-PROT SW CRITERIA field) to set the criteria for the low
order path protection switch of the selected TU.
NON INTRUSIVE
The switch is caused by the following alarms: TU_AIS, TU_LOP, LP_UNEQ, LP_TIM, LP_DEG,
LP_EXC. This is the most sensitive SNC Protection for low order VC.
INHERENT
The switch is caused by the following alarms: TU_AIS, TU_LOP. This is the least sensitive SNC
protection for low order VC.
PARTIAL NOT INTRUSIVE
The switch criteria for the SNC protection of the low order VC, can be enabled by the operator
(Apart from the TU_AIS and TU_LOP switch criteria).
* Use RDI on LP-TIM to enable/disable the LO-RDI indication to the line when a Low
Order Path Trace Identifier Mismatch has been detected.
* Use RDI on LP-Unequip enable/disable the LO-RDI indication to the line when a Low
Order - Payload Label Unequipped is detected.
* Use RDI on LP-EXC to enable/disable the LO-RDI indication to the line when an
excessive bit error ratio (>10-3) is detected.
Note RDI is sent only in LSU (Low Order Supervisory Unequipped) mode.
See Also:
STM-N Port: configuring frame and supervisory unequipped state
* Use Path Trace Mode to set the type of path trace.
Single Byte Rx - Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J1/J2 byte (path trace). A single byte value is sent into the
J1/J2 byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Single Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J1/J2 byte. A single byte value is sent into the J1/J2 byte.
Single Rx - 15 Bytes Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J1/J2 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J1/J2 byte.
15 Bytes Rx - Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J1/J2 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J1/J2 byte.
* Use Path Trace Expected to set the value expected on Byte J1/J2.
* Use Path Trace Configured to set the value sent on Byte J1/J2. Values lower than 7F
(standard character set) are allowed for every byte if the HEX format for the configuration
has been selected.
Note Path Trace configured is sent only in LSU (Low Order Supervisory Unequipped)
mode.
See Also:
STM-N Port: configuring frame and supervisory unequipped state

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 190 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Use Path Trace Transm. to enable/disable the Path Trace management.


* Use Path Trace Mism. Detection to enable/disable the issue of J1/J2 mismatch alarm in
presence of a wrong path trace on the receive side.
* Set the Alarm Detection state to enable/disable the detection of the LO-VC alarms.

IMPORTANT The detection of the TU-AIS and TU-LOP alarms is always active and it causes
the insertion of an AIS signal toward the matrix.
If the LO PATH-PROT SW CRITERIA Mode is set to NON INTRUSIVE or
PARTIAL NOT INTRUSIVE the Alarm Detection must be enabled.

* Press APPLY.
Path Trace Management
Depending on LSU and Alarm Detection state the Path Trace value displayed in the Received field
is:
n if there are no cross connections and LSU is disabled then "0xFFFFFFFF" value is
displayed;
n if there are cross connections but Alarm Detection is disabled then "0xFFFFFFFF" value is
displayed;
n if there are cross connections with Alarm Detection enabled but FROM side is not connected
then "0xFFFFFFFF" value is displayed;
In all other cases the actual value detected by the card is displayed.
See Also:
Port: configuration, STM-1 Type 2 Port: setting C2 mismatch detection state, STM-N
Port: configuring frame and supervisory unequipped state, STM-1 Port: setting HPOM
alarm suppression state

LPOM Ports: displaying LO VC operational parameter


Path (Action-VC Configuration-Read)
This option is used to read the LO VC operational parameter configured for the NxSTM-1, STM-16
T2 LPOM, STM-4 Unit Type 3, 63x2Mbit/s Unit, 4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit and 3x34/45Mbit/s Unit (for
the Type 3 Subrack).
See Also:
LPOM Ports: configuring LO VC operational parameter (DXC 41)

LPOM Ports: configuring LO VC operational parameter (DXC 41)

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 191 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

STM-N Port: configuring frame and supervisory unequipped state


Path (Action-Frame and Supervisory Unequipped Config)
This option is available for the:
n NxSTM-1 Units;
n 4x140-155Mbit/s Units (configured as STM-1);
n STM-N Units (except STM-1 Type Standard).
It allows to configure the multiplexing structure for each VC-4 and to generate a supervisory
unequipped signal. Furthermore, the Frame Configuration window, displays channel information
relevant to the cross-connected sides (TO and FROM) and to the supervisory unequipped state
(Sup uneq).

NOTICE The frame structure option is available only for DXC 4/1 and DXC 4/4
1024x1024.
For DXC 4/1 the VC-4 frame can be structured at any level while for DXC 4/4
1024x1024 the VC-4 frame can be structured at VC-3 level only.

Note If no explicit configuration is given for a not cross-connected SDH port, High Order
Supervisory Unequipped signal is inserted by default. This state is automatically
disabled when the channel is connected and/or demultiplied.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 192 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

To configure the frame structure of a STM-N channel:


* Select in the AUG Selection box the AUG to be multiplied/demultiplied by clicking on it.
The option ALL allows configuring in the same way all the AU frame, belonging to the STM-N port.
* Select in the Action field the Change Frame option.
The desired multiplexing structure configuration can be defined. A click on a not demultiplied
channel provokes its expansion to its lower order VCs. A click on an already exploded channel
causes the contraction of the lower order VCs.
* Press APPLY to confirm the configuration.

To configure the supervisory unequipped state of a STM-N channel:


* Select in the AUG Selection box the AUG that supervisory unequipped state has to be
modified.
The option ALL allows to configure in the same way all the AU frame, belonging to the STM-N port.
* Select in the Action field the Change Supervisory Uneq. option.
The desired Supervisory Uneq. state can be defined by clicking on the VC channel (the configured
state will be displayed in the window below the item Sup. Uneq.).
* Press APPLY to confirm the configuration.
Remind that:
a VC can be configured as Supervisory Unequipped only if it has not been demultiplied
or cross-connected;
a VC-12, VC-2 or VC-3 can be configured as Supervisory Unequipped only if the VC-4
channel which they belong is not cross-connected (this option is available for DXC 4/1
only);
by default the Supervisory Unequipped state for the Low Order VC is disabled (DXC 4/1
only);
it is not possible to demultiply a VC-4 belonging to a STM-16 or 4x140/155Mbit/s Unit
because these unit are able to handle VC-4 level only; in this case Change Frame
Action is not allowed;
it is not possible to demultiply a cross-connected channel. If the Change Frame Action
has been applied to a cross-connected channel (demultiplexing) or a channel containing
cross-connected channels (re-establishment of upper hierarchical level) in the row
relevant to the resulting channel/s, below the item FROM and/or TO (depending on the
type of cross-connection), the Busy indication will be displayed to remind the
impossibility to perform the selected operation. If the Busy indication has been ignored
pushing APPLY button a relevant message will be displayed.
Free item indicates that the relevant side is not cross-connected. Other items are
relevant to the type of cross-connections.
In a type 5 subrack it is possible to configure the frame structure of a worker channel/unit involved in
a MSP 1:N but the same change will be applied to all the other unit belonging to the MSP group.
In this case a warning message is displayed and a confirmation is required.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 193 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Type 6 subrack does not have this limitation.


See Also:
Port: configuration, STM-N Port: configuring frame and supervisory unequipped
state, Multiplexing Section Protection: configuring
Automatic C2 Configuration
Depending on the frame configuration this function sets the C2 value (signal label) automatically.
This means that configuring at LO a VC-4 frame previously not structured (using the Frame and
Supervisory Unequipped Config option) the related C2 configuration will be modified in TUG
Structured
Vice-versa its C2 configuration will be set as Equip (no spec)
However it is still possible to modify the C2 settings.
See Also:
Port: configuration, STM-N Port: configuring VC-4 operational parameter, STM-1 Type
2 Port: setting C2 mismatch detection state
The following table summarises the C2 configuration modification against the frame configuration
change.
Frame Configuration C2 Configuration
From To
VC-4 not LO structured VC-4 LO structured C2 Expected: TUG Structured
C2 Configured: TUG Structured (*)
VC-4 LO structured VC-4 not LO structured C2 Expected: Equip (no spec)
C2 Configured: Equip (no spec) (*)
C2 Mismatch Detection: Disabled
Note(*) This information is meaningful for STM-1 Type 2 Unit only. This is the
only unit allowing transmitted C2 value configuration.

NOTICE In case of MSP 1+1, any frame modification on the worker port is automatically
configured on the protection one too. As a consequence the related C2 settings
will be updated as well.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 194 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

AU Group Definition
Path (Action-AU Group Definition)
This option is used to configure a concatenated AU traffic type. This functionality allows operating
on the network port, suitably to connect the high order container. The units that allow the
concatenated frame configuration are the STM-4 (Standard and Type 2) and STM-16 (Standard,
LPOM, MUX-4/3, DWDM).
By Local Operator is possible to set the high order concatenation on the specific port. By this
function is possible to:
n CREATE VIRTUAL CONCATENATION (it allows to create virual concatenations of AU).
n CREATE CONTIGUOUS CONCATENATION (it allows to create contiguous concatenations
of AU).
n DELETE VIRTUAL / CONTIGUOUS CONCATENATION (it allows to delete the
concatenations of AU).
n SET SUPERVISORY UNEQUIPPED (it indicates the enable state of supervisory
unequipped of single VC).
n SET VIRTUAL PARAMETERS (it allows to set other parameters useful for the management
of the Virtual Concatenation).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 195 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Restrictions
The following operations are not allowed:
n to configure a concatenation on TX side or Rx side only;
n to set up a concatenation different from: AU-4-4c, AU-4-4c/4v (for STM-16 MUX 4/3 only),
AU-4-16c/16v (for STM-16 MUX 4/3 only), and AU-3-3c, AU-3-12c, AU-3-12c/12v, AU-3-
48c/48v (for STM-16 MUX 4/3 in SONET mode only);
n to concatenate TUG-structured AUs;
n to concatenate a cross-connected AU, even if on one side (from or to) only;
n to concatenate channels which the Tandem Connection function has been previously
activated on;
n to set up a concatenation involving channels where performance monitoring has been set up
yet;
n set up a split cross-connection on a AU-nC cross-connection.
n With reference to AU-4 concatenations: at STM-16 traffic layer, to configure concatenations
where the head AU-4 index is different from 1, 5, 9 and 13;
n With reference to AU-3 concatenations: to set up a concatenation whose head AU-3 is not
the first within the AUG (for AU-3-3c) and moreover whose head AU-3 belongs to an AUG
whose index is different from 1, 5, 9, and 13 (for AU-3-12c, AU-3-12c/12v);
n to modify the Supervisory Unequipped enable state on cross-connected traffic.
Note that concerning management of AU-3-mC concatenated traffic, the STM-16 MUX 4/3 card will
convert such kind of traffic (line side) into the corresponding AU-4s (matrix side) as follows:
n an AU-3-3C concatenation will be mapped into a single AU-4;
n an AU-3-12C concatenation will be mapped into an AU-4-4C one;
n an AU-3-12C / 12V concatenation will be mapped into an AU-4-4C / 4V one;
n an AU-3-48C / 48V concatenation will be mapped into an AU-4-16C / 16V one.

To create a Virtual concatenation:


* Select CREATE VIRTUAL CONCAT.
* Select a group of AUG or AU considering the restrictions listed previously (head
AUG/AU).
* Press APPLY.

To create a Contiguous concatenation:


* Select CREATE CONT. CONCAT.
* Select a group of AUG or AU considering the restrictions listed previously (head
AUG/AU).
* Press APPLY.

To delete a Virtual / Contiguous concatenation:


* Select DELETE V. / C. CONCAT.
* Select only one AUG/AU of concatenation before created.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 196 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Press APPLY.
Select SET SUPERVISORY UNEQUIPPED to change the state.
The state of the first AUG/AU of each group (head AUG/AU) will be the state of concatenated cross-
connection.
Note The modification of Supervisory Unequipped enable state on a concatenated AUG/AU
is significant only on the first AUG/AU, the AU Group configuration window marks the
modification on all AUG/AUs in the group, meaning the operation is valid on the whole
traffic.

To Set Virtual Parameters:


* Press SET VIRTUAL PARAMETERS.
* Select the group of AUG/AU.
* Create a virtual concatenation by means of CREATE VIRTUAL CONCAT. button.
* Choose one of four (sixteen) AUG previously concatenated.
The button

displays the list of alarms detected in the card.


After setting VIRTUAL PARAMETERS this window will appear:

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 197 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Set in J1 Mode the matrix side path trace definition between one of following values:
Single Byte Rx - Tx
A single byte is expected in the J1 byte coming from Matrix. A single byte value is sent into the J1
byte Matrix side.
15 Bytes Rx Single Tx
A 15 bytes value is expected in the J1 byte coming from Matrix. A single byte value is sent into the
J1 byte Matrix side.
Single Rx 15 Bytes Tx
A single byte is expected in the J1 byte coming from Matrix. A 15 bytes value is sent into J1 byte
Matrix side.
15 Bytes Rx - Tx
A 15 bytes value is expected in the J1 byte coming from Matrix.. A 15 bytes value is sent into J1
byte Matrix side.
* Set in J1 Expected Matrix the value expected on byte J1 Matrix side.
In J1 Received Matrix is possible to read the value received on byte J1 Matrix side.
In the fields LOM Defect Recovery Time, SQM Defect Issue Thr., SQM Defect Clear Thr. It is
possible to read the values before set in the Port Configuration for STM-N (VC-4 configuration
window).
See Also:
Port: configuring operational parameter
* By means of TIM Matrix Detection is possible to enable / disable the detection of the
Trace Identifier Mismatch coming from Matrix. (Only for Virtual concatenation).
* By means of AIS on TIM Mtx is possible to enable / disable the fault action of the Alarm
Identification Signal going to line in case of Trace Identifier Mismatch matrix side.
The field AIS on LOM controls the line side AIS insertion fault action when detecting a Loss of
Multiframe defect recostructing a contiguous concatenation from a virtual one.
The field AIS on SQM controls the line side insertion fault action when detecting a SQM defect
reconstructing a contiguous concatenation from a virtual one.
The field AIS on LOA controls the line side AIS insertion fault action when detecting a Loss of
Alignment defect recostructing a contiguous concatenation from a virtual one.
The field AIS on LOA Rec controls the line side AIS insertion fault action when detecting a
Recoverable Loss of Alignment defect recostructing a contiguous concatenation from a virtual one.
This four fields are set Enable by default.
* In the Differential Delay bar you can tune the delay between a reference VC-4 and
another VC-4-4v in the same multiframe. After this time after a Loss Of Alignment (LOA)
alarm will arise. The Differential Delay bar is divided in 128000 microsec in steps of 125
miscrosec.
The differential delay is set to Autoadaptive by default. The STM-16 MUX-4/3 card can
automatically recover the incoming delay of each VC-4 in a virtual concatenation to be
reconstructed in a time going from 0.125 to 250 ms.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 198 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

If the differential delay is set to Manual, the card will wait for a VC-4 in a virtual concatenation up to
the delay set by user (128ms maximum due to hardware limitations).

IMPORTANT When converting an AU-4-Xv coming from matrix into a AU-4-Xc towards the
line, the following specific defects can be detected:
a Defect LOM: Loss Of Multiframe: each AU-4-Xv (a frame) belongs to a
group (a multiframe) of 256 virtually concatenated AUs. Each group has its own
identification (ID) into the H4 POH byte; if a received AU-4-Xv has an
unexpectded ID, a defect LOM is generated by the card;
b Defect SQM: Wrong Sequence Number: inside a 256 AU-4-Xv multiframe,
each of them carries a progressive number into the H4 POH byte; if the
sequence is broken, a SQM defect is issued;
c Defect LOA: Loss of Alignment: when creating a contiguous concatenation
from a virtual one, each AU-4 must fit into its correct position; if an AU-4 is not
received into the expected position, a LOA defect is detected.

See Also:
Concatenated Traffic Type

SONET STS-1 Setup


Path (Action-SONET STS-1 Setup)
This option is used to configure the operational parameters for the STS-1 channels managed by the
MUX 4/3 unit type. Moreover it is also possible to configure the parameters of the STS
concatenated traffic type (STS-3c, STS-12c, STS-48c).

NOTICE This option is available only for STM-16 MUX4/3 Unit Type and will be
accessible selecting, in the Port Configuration window during the creation of the
port, the SONET protocol mode.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 199 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

To configure a SONET STS-1 operational parameter:


* Select the STS-3 relevant to the STS-1 to be configured.
The option ALL allows configuring in the same way the STS-1 channels belonging to all STS-3.
* Select, in the STS-1 sel. field, the STS-1 channel to be configured, or, in case of
concatenated traffic type, the STS-1 head channel.
* Use RDI on HO-TIM to enable/disable the HO-RDI indication to the line when a High
Order Path Trace Identifier Mismatch has been detected in Supervisory Unequipped
state.
* Use RDI on VC Unequip enable/disable the HO-RDI indication to the line when a High
Order -Payload Label Unequipped is detected in Supervisory Unequipped state..
* Use RDI on HO-EXC to enable/disable the HO-RDI indication to the line when an
excessive bit error ratio is detected on the bytes B3 in Supervisory Unequipped state.
* MS/HO/LO DEG Count Mode display the type of error rate evaluation mode previously
configured in the Port Configuration window (see "Port: configuring operational
parameter" subparagraph).
If in the port configuration window Poisson has been selected
-5 -9
Use PATH DEG Thr. (10 to 10 ) to set the threshold for considering the VC payload degraded on
the Virtual Containers. This calculation uses the byte B3.
If in the port configuration window ETSI has been selected
Enter the percentage of BBE (DEG Threshold) for the VC (HO PATH) and the number of errored
seconds which are activating/deactivating a bad/good period.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 200 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Use Path Trace Mode to set the type of path trace.


Single Byte Rx - Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J1 byte (path trace). A single byte value is sent into the J1
byte in Supervisory Unequipped state.
15 Bytes Rx - Single Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J1 byte. A single byte value is sent into the J1 byte in
Supervisory Unequipped state.
Single Rx - 15 Bytes Tx
A single byte value is expected in the J1 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J1 byte in
Supervisory Unequipped state.
15 Bytes Rx - Tx
A 15-bytes value is expected in the J1 byte. A 15-bytes value is sent into the J1 byte in Supervisory
Unequipped state.
* Use Path Trace (J1) Exp to set the value expected on Byte J1.
* Use Path Trace (J1) Conf to set the value sent on Byte J1 in Supervisory Unequipped
state.

NOTICE Changing J1 Tx Mode (J1 Conf) on the head VC of a virtual concatenation


causes the modification of matrix side J1 Mode.
For STS-1 traffic type, the J1 mode set will be apply to all three STS-1
concerned that AUG.

* Use Path Trace (J1) Transmission to enable/disable the Path Trace management. If
Path Trace has been disabled a value 01 single byte is sent in Supervisory Unequipped
state.
* Use Path Trace (J1) Mism Detection to enable/disable the issue of J1 mismatch alarm
in presence of a wrong path trace on the receive side.
* Use Mode (in the PATH-PROT SW CRITERIA field) to set the criteria for the path
protection switch of the selected channel.
NON INTRUSIVE
The switch is caused by the following alarms: AIS, LOP, UNEQ, TIM, DEG, EXC. This is the most
sensitive SNC Protection. The Alarm Suppresion must be disabled.
INHERENT
The switch is caused by the following alarms: AIS, LOP. This is the least sensitive SNC protection .
PARTIAL NOT INTRUSIVE
The switch criteria for the SNC protection of the VC, can be enabled by the operator (Apart from
the AIS and LOP switch criteria). The Alarm Suppresion must be disabled.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 201 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

* Use Alarm Suppression State to enable/disable the monitoring of some path alarms
(UNEQ, TIM, DEG, EXC, RDI). The aim of this functionality is to reduce the amount of
alarms.
If the functionality is enabled (default disabled), the following alarms are not monitored:
HP-UNEQ, HP-TIM, HP-EXC, HP-DEG, HP-RDI for STS-3c, STS-12c or STS-48c traffic
type (AU-3-3c, AU-3-12c, AU-3-12c/12v, AU-3-48c/48v concatenations), LP-UNEQ, LP-
TIM, LP-EXC, LP-DEG, LP-RDI for STS-1 traffic type.
* Press APPLY.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 202 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
MANAGING SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

Port Mode Setup


Path (Action-Port Mode Setup)
This option allows to choose a specified value for the port configured. The default value has been
set in NE Port Mode Setup field. Changing this state only the card involved will change the Port
Mode State.

* Select the value in the Port Mode Value.


* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Alarms: port mode

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 203 Book Contents
Issue:1
SYNCHRONIZATION

SYNCHRONIZATION: DISPLAYING INFORMATION


Path (Equipment Configuration-Synchronization-Sync Read)
This option displays a report of synchronization in use.

TS DYNAMIC STATE
contains information on the "Dynamic Holdover" status for TSU.
In particular, the current status of the internal system clock (T0) selector is reported (configured
mode).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
SYNCHRONIZATION

ACTIVE SYSTEM SYNC SOURCE


contains information on the synchronisation in use for the main oscillator.
SYSTEM SYNC SOURCES PRIORITY CONF.
indicates information on the priorities of the synchronisation sources used for the main oscillator
and information about their operation. Synchronisation sources are listed and the quality level
received on byte S1 is shown for each of them.
ACTIVE EXTERNAL OUTPUT SYNC SOURCE
contains information on the synchronisation in use for the external output oscillator.
EXT. OUTPUT SYNC SOURCES PRIORITY CONF.
indicates information on the priorities of the synchronisation sources used for the external output
oscillator and information about their operation.
Synchronisation sources are listed, and the quality level received on byte S1 is shown for each of
them.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 205 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
SYNCHRONIZATION

TIMING MARKER CONFIGURATION


displays information about the parameters used for switching the synchronisation sources in case
of fault.
SYSTEM SYNC OUTPUT
indicates the synchronisation mode configured for the main oscillator.
EXTERNAL OUTPUT
indicates the synchronisation mode configured for the external output oscillator.
EXTERN SOURCE INPUT FORMAT
displays information on the synchronisation parameters configured for the external clock inputs.
EXTERN SOURCE OUTPUT FORMAT
displays information on the synchronisation parameters configured for the external clock outputs.
Click on REFRESH to have an information updating and on CLOSE to quit the window.
See Also:
Synchronization: defining a port subrack as synchronization source,
Synchronization: defining priority table for the main oscillator, Synchronization:
defining priority table for secondary oscillator, Synchronization: configuring mode,
Operative States, Synchronization: setting PLL cut frequency

SYNCHRONIZATION: DEFINING A PORT SUBRACK AS


SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE
Path (Equipment Configuration-Synchronization-Sync Setup-Subrack Sync Source)
This option is used to indicate the tributary port (STM-N and for the DXC 4/1 also the 2Mbit/s and
the 140Mbit/s T-Mux ports) used as synchronisation source.

IMPORTANT It is possible to configure a STM-16 MUX 4/3 SONET mode as synchronization


source, only if the Timing Marker is disabled. In this case Timing Marker wont be
available up to the synchronisation source will be deleted.

To enable the Action menu:


* Select on the Port Subrack to be used as synchronization source.

Synchronization: defining a port as synchronization source


Path (Action-Setup)
Use this option to select the port used for synchronization.
Only one port can be assigned as synchronization source for every port subrack.

IMPORTANT For Secondary Oscillator only 2Mbit/s (for DXC 4/1) and STM-N ports are
available.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 206 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
SYNCHRONIZATION

To define a subrack as synchronisation source:


* Select the tributary unit to be used as synchronisation source.
* Select the port to be used as synchronisation source (Port Id).
* Use Quality Level to select the type of synchronisation quality level associated to a PDH
port.
Quality Level - G.811
0010 in bit 5-8 of S1 byte.
Quality Level - G.812 transit
0100 in bit 5-8 of S1 byte.
Quality Level - G.812 local
0111 in bit 5-8 of S1 byte.
Quality Level - G.813
1011 in bit 5-8 of S1 byte.
Quality Level - Dont use for sync
1111 in bit 5-8 of S1 byte.
* The ASSOCIATED DONT USE FOR SYNC box contains two push-buttons used to set
and reset the port that must not be used as Sync Source.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 207 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
SYNCHRONIZATION

Synchronization: configuring DONT USE FOR SYNC


Use this option to define an STM-N port sending value dont use in the byte S1. This operation is
necessary to avoid timing loops between two stations when they are synchronised by means of
STM-N streams.
The STM-N port defined as dont use for sync wont be used for synchronisation of the equipment.

* Select the STM-N port.


* Press OK.
After having selected OK the system displays a message box to inform the user that modification
will be effective only after the APPLY push button in the previous window (Action-Setup) has been
pressed.

Synchronization: displaying port parameters


Path (Action-Read)
This option is used for displaying the port used as synchronization source and the synchronization
parameters defined for this port.
See Also:
Synchronization: defining a port as synchronization source, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 208 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
SYNCHRONIZATION

Synchronization: removing a synchronization port


Path (Action-Delete)
Use this option to remove a port used as synchronization source.
A synchronization port can be removed only when it is not defined in the Synchronization Priority
Table.

To delete the synchronization source:


* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Synchronization: defining a port as synchronization source, Operative States

SYNCHRONIZATION: DEFINING PRIORITY TABLE FOR THE MAIN


OSCILLATOR
Path (Equipment Configuration-Synchronization-Sync Setup-Sync Priority Table-System)
This option is used to define a synchronisation priority table for the main oscillator (internal and line
clock).
In normal working conditions the equipment will use the highest priority source (with the best quality
level); if the main clock source is alarmed the equipment will use the next one available in the table.
If all the synchronisation sources defined in the table are not available the equipment automatically
operates in the holdover mode (i.e. equipment is using the last reference clock).

In the Active Sync Source box are indicated information on the active synchronisation source used
for the main oscillator.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 209 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
SYNCHRONIZATION

In the STM-N sending QL <-- 1111 box are displayed all STM-1 ports associated to the Active
Sync Source which are sending the status dont use (all 1s in the byte S1).
The Minimum QL (present value) text box indicates the quality level of the synchronisation source
in use.
A window for the selection of the synchronisation priority is shown. On the right side is shown the list
of the available sources (SYNC SOURCES NOT in USE).
Subracks synchronisation sources available for selection have been previously defined using the
option Subrack Sync Source.

To define the synchronisation priority table:


* Select the synchronisation source to be assigned (e.g.: STM1-Opt.).
The selected source is displayed in reverse video and in the information box are shown the relevant
parameters.
* Move the selected synchronisation source to the desired Priority number (SYNC
SOURCES in USE).
The synchronisation source is moved from SYNC SOURCES NOT in USE to the selected position.
Repeat the above steps for all synchronisation sources to be get in use.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Synchronization: defining a port as synchronization source, Operative States,
Synchronization: setting PLL cut frequency

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 210 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
SYNCHRONIZATION

SYNCHRONIZATION: DEFINING PRIORITY TABLE FOR SECONDARY


OSCILLATOR
Path (Equipment Configuration-Synchronization-Sync Setup-Sync Priority Table-External
Output)
This option is used to define a synchronisation priority table for the external output oscillator.

In the Active Sync Source box are indicated information on the active synchronisation source used
for the secondary oscillator (external output).
The Minimum QL (present value) text box indicates the quality level of the synchronisation source
in use.

To define the synchronisation priority table:


* Select a synchronisation source from the SYNC SOURCES NOT IN USE field (e.g.:
Ext_Source).
The selected source is displayed in reverse video and in the information box are shown the relevant
parameters.
* Move the selected synchronisation source to the desired Priority number (SYNC
SOURCES in USE).
The synchronisation source is moved from SYNC SOURCES NOT in USE to the selected position.
Repeat the above steps for all synchronisation sources to be get in use.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Synchronization: defining a port as synchronization source, Operative States,
Synchronization: setting PLL cut frequency

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 211 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
SYNCHRONIZATION

SYNCHRONIZATION: CONFIGURING MODE


Path (Equipment Configuration-Synchronization-Sync Setup-Sync Mode)
This option is used to select the type of synchronisation mode used for synchronising the internal
oscillator and the external synchronisation output.

To define the synchronisation mode:


* Use Timing Marker to enable/disable the management of the byte S1.
Disabled TM sent value is displayed only when Timing Marker is set to disabled.
It indicates the value sent on the byte S1 (dont use).
* If the Timing Marker has been enabled, define the Minimum accepted QL (Minimum
Synchronisation Quality Level accepted).
* Use Configured Mode (SYSTEM SYNC OUTPUT) to select the mode of
synchronisation for the internal oscillator.
Free Running
Equipment is synchronised using the internal oscillator.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 212 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
SYNCHRONIZATION

Normal Revertive
Equipment is synchronised using a tributary port or an external clock source (slave). Equipment
restores the available highest priority synchronisation source after repair of a failure that caused
synchronisation sources to be switched.
Normal Not Revertive
Equipment is synchronised using a tributary port or an external clock source (slave). Equipment
does not restore the available highest priority synchronisation source.
No Switch
Sync Selection is forced on one configured sync source selectable from the scrollable list that
appears at the bottom

Internal Clock Disabled


Internal clock from the Control & Timing Subrack disabled (not yet available).
Forced Holdover
Sync Mode forced to holdover. Equipment is synchronised using the last reference clock.
* Select the WTR Period in half minutes. Value entered represents the time the equipment
waits to restore the synchronisation to the highest priority one. This information is enabled
only if the Revertive mode has been selected (Normal Revertive).
* Use Configured Mode (EXTERNAL OUTPUT) to select the mode of synchronisation for
the external output clock (only if needed).
Normal Revertive/Normal Not Revertive
See SYSTEM SYNC OUTPUT.
Locked To System Oscillator
External Output is synchronised using the clock generated by the main oscillator.
* Use Squelch to enable/disable the squelch of the external synchronisation sources in
output.
* Select the type of clock signal for the external synchronisation sources in input and in
output (EXTERN SOURCE INPUT FORMAT/EXTERN SOURCE OUTPUT FORMAT)
and assign the relevant Quality Level (only for the external sources in input). The signal
can be NRZ (kHz) or HDB3 (kbit).
Following the Configuration Mode selection (Free-running, Normal, ...) the Control Application will
automatically display the relevant priority configuration windows.
* Press FORWARD button to display the next dialog box and use BACKWARD to return
to the previous one.
The next dialog box is displayed if the operator has chosen Normal Revertive or Normal Not
Revertive for the System Oscillator. In the dialog box operator can select the priorities for the
synchronisation sources.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 213 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
SYNCHRONIZATION

The next dialog box is displayed if it has been chosen Normal Revertive or Normal Not Revertive
for the External Output. In the dialog box operator can select the priorities for the synchronisation
sources.

* Press APPLY.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 214 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
SYNCHRONIZATION

The Minimum QL (present value) text box indicates the quality level of the synchronisation source
in use while the Minimum QL (to be config) value indicates the quality level configured in the
synchronisation mode management window
Note The quality level of the synchronization source in use (Minimum QL (present value))
has to match the minimum accepted level (Minimum accepted QL) configured in the
synchronization mode management window. In case of quality level mismatch
(Minimum QL (present value) worst than Minimum QL (to be config)) the
messages "Wrong Quality Level" will appear.

IMPORTANT After the system is synchronised using a valid reference clock source, verify the
correct operational mode of the internal PLL checking the PLL cut frequency.

See Also:
Synchronization: defining priority table for the main oscillator, Synchronization:
defining priority table for secondary oscillator, Synchronization: setting PLL cut
frequency

SYNCHRONIZATION: SWITCHING SYSTEM SYNCHRONIZATION


SOURCE
Path (Equipment Configuration-Synchronization-Sync Setup-Sync Source Switch-
System)
This option causes the manual switch of the sync source of the main oscillator generating the
synchronising signals for the System.

To switch the System Sync Source:


* Select the sync source being the destination of the switch command, in the Sync
Sources in Use table.
* Use Mode to select the command to be executed. The possible options are:
Manual
It causes the manual switch of the main oscillator sync source to the selected one, only if the
selected source has not problems. In case of failure in the switched sync source, the configured
synchronisation mode criteria are applied.
Clear
It clears the manual switch command. The configured synchronisation mode criteria are applied.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Synchronization: configuring mode

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 215 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
SYNCHRONIZATION

SYNCHRONIZATION: SWITCHING EXTERNAL OUTPUT


SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE
Path (Equipment Configuration-Synchronization-Sync Setup-Sync Source Switch-External
Output)
This option causes the manual switch of the sync source of the secondary oscillator generating the
External Output synchronising signals.

To switch the External Output Sync Source:


* Select the sync source being the destination of the switch command, in the Sync
Sources in Use table.
* Use Mode to select the command to be executed. The possible options are:
Manual
It causes the manual switch of the main oscillator sync source to the selected one, only if the
selected source has not problems. In case of failure in the switched sync source, the configured
synchronisation mode criteria are applied.
Clear
It clears the manual switch command. The configured synchronisation mode criteria are applied.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Synchronization: configuring mode

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 216 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
SYNCHRONIZATION

SYNCHRONIZATION: CALIBRATING THE TIMING SELECTOR


OSCILLATOR UNIT
Path (Equipment Configuration-Synchronization-TS Subrack Calibration)
This option allows to calibrate the internal oscillator clock selecting a sync source as reference. This
operation should be performed periodically in order to adjust the internal oscillator clock.
The TSU calibration is not strictly necessary and the suggested period is 1 or 2 years.

IMPORTANT This option is available only if You are logged in as Supervisor.

To calibrate the Timing Selector Oscillator Unit:


* Select the Timing Selector/Oscillator unit to calibrate.
* Select on the synchronisation source used as reference (SYNC SOURCE SELECTION).
Only the synchronisation sources previously defined are made available.
* Press APPLY
See Also:
Operative States, Synchronization: setting PLL cut frequency

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 217 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
SYNCHRONIZATION

SYNCHRONIZATION: SELECTING THE TIMING SIGNAL ON TEST POINT


OF TS
Path (Equipment Configuration-Synchronization-Test Point)
This option allows to select the clock signal to be checked at the coaxial measurement point on the
front panel of the Timing Selector Oscillator Units.

To check the clock signals:


* Select on the Timing Selector/Oscillator unit to be checked.
* Use Test Point Output to select the clock signal to be checked.

The following values are available:


System Oscillator Frequency (38.88 MHz)
38.88 MHz clock signal generated by the main oscillator.
Internal Output Frequency (9.72 MHz)
9.72 MHz clock signal sent to port subracks and matrix subracks.
Ext. Out Osc. Frequency (22.528 MHz)
22.528 MHz clock signal generated by the secondary oscillator (for external output clock).
External Input - 1/2 (2048 kbit)
2048 kbit/s clock received from the external connector (1 or 2).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 218 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
SYNCHRONIZATION

External Input - 1/2 (2048 kHz)


2048 kHz clock received from the external connector (1 or 2).
Internal Clock
Internal use only.
* Press APPLY.

SYNCHRONIZATION: SETTING PLL CUT FREQUENCY


Path (Equipment Configuration-Synchronization-PLL Cut Frequency)
This option is used to set the cut frequency of the PLL Low Pass Filter within the Timing Selector
Oscillator Unit.
The slave clock can be viewed as a low-pass filter for the differences between the actual input
phase and the ideal input phase of the reference (noise transfer).
Reccomendations G.812 and G.813 specifies the constraints for these filters. Consider that:
n G.812 Transit is the Type V;
n G.812 Local is the Type VI;
n G.813 is the SEC.

IMPORTANT This option is available only if You are logged in as Supervisor.

Cut frequency can be set separately for the three different types of timing Selector Oscillator Units
(G813, G812 Local, G812 Transit).
The default values for each Timing Selector type are:
G.812 Transit
0.1Hz
G.812 Local
1Hz
G.813
8.2Hz

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 219 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
SYNCHRONIZATION

To select the cut frequency:


* Select the desired value.
* Press APPLY.

SYNCHRONIZATION: RESTORING OOF SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE


Path (Equipment Configuration-Synchronization-OOF Restoration)
When the system declares a synchronisation source as OOF (Out of Frequency) it is important to
note that this source will not be used again even if the synchronisation mode is "Normal Revertive".
This option is used to restore the synchronisation source that has been discharged. The procedure
will update the priority table and acknowledge the "discarded" synchronisation source as a valid
source.
In the "OOF Restoration" window are also displayed synchronisation information and the priority
tables for the system and the external output.

To restore a OOF synchronisation source:


* Select in the OOF SYNC SOURCES TO RESTORE field the OOF synchronisation
source to restore.
* Press the APPLY push button.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 220 Book Contents
Issue:1
PROTECTION AND TEST

CT SUBRACK PROTECTION: DISPLAYING UNIT STATE


Path (Equipment Configuration-Protection-Controller & Timing Protection-Card Protection
Scheme)
This option is used to display the protection status of the different units present in the Control and
Timing Subrack. The type of protection available is 1+1.
The following units are protected in the Control and Timing Subrack:
a. Central Control Unit.
b. Memory Expansion Unit.
c. Communication and Q Interface Unit.
d. Timing-Selector Oscillator Unit.

To display the protection status of a unit:


* Select the unit which protection information has to be displayed.
* The system displays information relevant to the Working Unit (REQUESTED
RESOURCE).
Use the scroll-bars to display information relevant to the Protection Unit (PARTNER RESOURCE).
Note For Communication and Q Interface Unit protection remind to commission both unit.
See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

CT SUBRACK PROTECTION: SWITCHING


Path (Equipment Configuration-Protection-Controller & Timing Protection-Protection
Switch)
This option allows the switching of the Control and Timing Subrack units.

To switch a duplicated unit:


* Select the unit to be switched.
* Use Command Switch to select the type of command to be executed.
Note For the CCU and Mem Unit only Manual switch and Clear Command are available.
* Press APPLY.
Use REFRESH button to perform an update of the protection state (Protection role, Stand-by
state, Protection status, Operational state).
See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 222 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

CT SUBRACK PROTECTION: DISPLAYING SIO LINE STATE


Path (Equipment Configuration-Protection-Controller & Timing Protection-SIO Line
Scheme)
This option is used to display the protection status of the serial lines (Serial Expansion Unit)
connecting Control and Timing Subrack to the other subracks (Matrix Subracks and Ports Subracks)
and to the Timing Selector Units.
* Select a Serial Expansion Unit.
A list of all serial lines in use (Line #) is displayed for both working and protection units (S1A and
S1B).
* Select the desired serial line (e.g.: Line_1).
In the Protection Information box are displayed information on the operational state of the
selected line for the working line (REQUESTED RESOURCE) and, clicking on the scroll bar, for the
protection line (PARTNER RESOURCE)
See Also:
Operative States

MATRIX SUBRACK PROTECTION: DISPLAYING


Path (Equipment Configuration-Protection-Matrix Protection-Protection Scheme)
This option is used to display the protection status of the Matrix Subracks. Matrix Subrack A is
protected 1+1 using Matrix Subrack B.
Only Not Revertive mode is available for Matrix Subrack.
Matrix Subrack A is used for normal operation (WORKER) and Matrix Subrack B (PROTECTION) is
used for protection.
See Also:
Operative States

MATRIX SUBRACK PROTECTION: SWITCHING


Path (Equipment Configuration-Protection-Matrix Protection-Protection Switch)
This option allows the Operator to switch from the worker Matrix (A) to the protection Matrix (B) and
vice-versa.

To switch a Matrix Subrack:


* Use Command Switch to select the type of command to be executed.
* Press APPLY.
Matrix Interface Units relevant to the switched Matrix Subrack (A or B) are also switched.
Use REFRESH button to perform an update of the protection state (Protection role, Stand-by
state, Protection status, Operational state).
See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 223 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

PORT SUBRACK PROTECTION: SELECTION


Path (Equipment Configuration-Protection-Subrack Protection)
This option allows the Operator to select the types of protection managed in the Port Subracks.

To enable the Action menu:


* Select the Port Subrack.

IMPORTANT In case of 2xSTM-1 MSP or Card Protection make sure that the subrack
supports the protection type (Prot. Type Supp.).

Port Controller Protection: displaying


Path (Action-Port Controller Protection-Protection Scheme)
This option is used to display the protection status of the Port Controller Unit present in the Port
Subracks.
Port Controller Unit A (PCA) is used for normal operation (WORKER) and Port Controller Unit B
(PCB) is used for protection (PROTECTION).
See Also:
Operative States

Port Controller Protection: switching


Path (Action-Port Controller Protection-Protection Switch)
This option allows the Operator to switch a Port Controller and DCC Access Unit from normal
Worker side to Protection side and vice-versa.

To switch a Port Controller Unit:


* Use Command Switch to select the type of command to be executed.
* Press APPLY.
Use REFRESH button to perform an update of the protection state (Protection role, Stand-by
state, Protection status, Operational state).
See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 224 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

Multiplexing Section Protection: configuring


Path (Action-Multiplexing Section Protection-Protection Scheme-Create)
Path (Action-NxSTM1 MSP Protection-Protection Scheme-Create)
This option is used to select the type of protection (1+1 or N+1) used for the Optic/Mux Units (or
Electric/Mux Units).
In the following are described the composition rules for the MS Protection relevant to the different
subracks.

NOTICE Both worker and protection ports have to be equipped and configured.
Within a protection group the ports have to be configured with the same VC-4
operational parameters. Different MS and RS operational parameters are
allowed.

See Also:
Unit: equipping (DXC 4/1), Port: configuration
Type 5 subrack
STM-1 Unit:
In the 1+1 protection the first four tributaries (1 to 4), starting from the left side of the subrack, are
protected using tributaries in positions 5 to 8 (P1 is protected by P5, P2 is protected by P6, and so
on).
In the N+1 protection the tributary 9 is used to protect all the other tributaries (1 to 8).
Position
Protection Type
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9
STM-1 MSP 1+1
W1 W2 W3 W4 P1 P2 P3 P4
STM-1 MSP 1:N
W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 P
W: Worker Unit P: Protection Unit
Note An STM-1 Type Standard cannot protect an STM-1 Type 2 and vice-versa; the worker
and protection unit must have the same configuration. Note that an STM-1 Optic/Mux
Unit can protect an STM-1 Electric/Mux Unit (of the same Type) and vice-versa.
The options available for the Type 5 port subrack are:
n one group of N+1 Protection (1<=N<=8);
n four groups of 1+1 Protection;
n M groups of 1+1 Protection and one group of N:1 Protection (N<=8-(Mx2)).

NOTICE Consider the following restriction:


- The protection channel must have the same port and frame configuration as
the protected one.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 225 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

MSP and DXC Type III Protection (DXC 4/1 only)


On Type 5 Subrack consider the following limitations:
n A resource (port or accesses) can not be used, at the same time, as protection of both MSP
and DXC Type III protection.
n A resource (port or accesses) can not be defined, at the same time, both Worker and
Protection.
The only case in which both protection type are allowed is: a resource defined as worker in both
MSP and DXC Type III protection.
See Also:
STM-N Port: configuring frame and supervisory unequipped state
Type 6 Subrack
IMPORTANT Make sure the Protection Type Supported by the subrack is the MSP (no
2XSTM-1 MSP1:N) or, in case of 2xSTM-1 MSP 1:N, the MSP (2XSTM-1
MSP1:N only)

See Also:
Type 6 Subrack: equipping
STM-4 Unit:
In the 1+1 protection the STM-4 Unit number 1 is protected by the STM-4 Unit number 6 and STM-
4 Unit number 3 is protected by the STM-4 Unit number 8. In the N+1 protection the STM-4 Unit
number 5 is used to protect all the other STM-4 units.
4xSTM-1 or 4x140-155Mbit/s Unit:
th th
In the 1+1 protection the n port of the Unit number 1 is protected by the n port of the Unit number
th th
6 and the n port of the Unit number 3 is protected by the n port of the Unit number 8. In the N+1
th th
protection the n port of the Unit number 5 is used to protect all the n ports of the other 4xSTM-1
or 4x140-155Mbit/s units.

IMPORTANT Different protection schemes on the same unit are not allowed.
This means that if on a 4xSTM-1 or 4x140-155Mbit/s Unit one port has been
protected with a 1+1 protection scheme, the other ports belonging to the same
unit can be protected only with a 1+1 protection scheme.
Protection Mode (Revertive/Not Revertive) and Type Unidirectional/Bidirectional)
can be different.

2xSTM-1 Unit:
th
In the 1+1 protection the n port of the first four Units (1 to 4), starting from the left side of the
th th
subrack, is protected using the n port of the Units in positions 5 to 8. In the N+1 protection the n
th
port of the Unit number 5 is used to protect all the n ports of the 2xSTM-1 units inserted in the
slots number 1, 3, 6 and 8.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 226 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

The following table summarises the possible Type 6 port subrack configurations:
Position
Protection Type
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8
STM-4; 4XSTM-1;
4XSTM-1/140Mbit/s W1 W2 P1 P2
MSP 1+1
STM-4; NXSTM-1*;
4XSTM-1/140Mbit/s W1 W2 P W3 W4
MSP 1:N
2xSTM-1 MSP 1+1 W1 W2 W3 W4 P2 P1 P4 P3
W: Worker Unit P: Protection Unit
*: 4XSTM-1 and 2XSTM-1 Units
Different protection architectures (at unit level) are allowed.

NOTICE Consider the following restriction:


- In case of 4x140-155Mbit/s Protection the Port Mode of the involved ports
must be the same.
- Due to different configurable parameter a 4x140-155Mbit/s Unit can not protect
a 4xSTM-1 Unit (and vice-versa).
- If the MSP 1+1 architecture is required the protection units accesses 1
(MAC and MAD Accesses for DXC 4/1, MAB and MAD Accesses for DXC
4/4) have to be not equipped.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 227 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

Type 6E Subrack
STM-4 Unit:
In the MSP 1+1 protection the STM-4 Units number 1, 2, 5, 7, 8 are protected respectively by the
STM-4 Units number 3, 4, 6, 9 and 10. It is possible to configure two groups of MSP 1:N and 1:M
(N+M< 8) where the protection units have to be slot number 5 and/or 6.
4xSTM-1/ 2xSTM-1 or 4x140-155Mbit/s Unit:
th th
In the 1+1 protection the n port of the units number 1, 2, 5, 7, 8 is protected respectively by the n
port of the units number 3, 4, 6, 9 and 10. It is possible to configure two groups of MSP 1:N and
th
1:M (N+M< 8) where the n port of the units number 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9 and 10 can be protected by
th
the n port of the number 5 and/or 6.
Note For DXC 4/4 using a MSP 1+1 protection scheme P5 and P6 are not configurable.
Position
Protection Type
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10
No protection
STM-4 /2xSTM-1
Opt. W W W W W W W W W W
4x(STM-1
El./140Mbit/s)
1:N CARD
PROTECTION W1 W2 W3 W4 P ----- W5 W6 W7 W8
4xSTM-1
El./140Mbit/s
(N<8)
MSP 1:N
STM-4 /2XSTM-1 W W W W Pa Pb W W W W
Opt. (N<8)

MSP 1+1
STM-4 /2xSTM-1
Opt. W1 W2 P1 P2 W3 P3 W4 W5 P4 P5
4x(STM-1
El./140Mbit/s)
W: Worker Unit P: Protection Unit M.A.: Matrix Accesses
Note P5 and P6 are the resources for 1:N protection schemes and can protect all the other
units in worker. They can not protect themselves except for 1+1 protection scheme.

IMPORTANT According to the Matrix Accesses scheme, different protection architectures are
supported.

NOTICE Consider the following restriction:


- In case of 4x140-155Mbit/s Protection the Port Mode of the involved ports
must be the same.
- Due to different configurable parameter a 4x140-155Mbit/s Unit can not protect
a 4xSTM-1 Unit (and vice-versa).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 228 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

- If the MSP 1+1 architecture is required the protection units accesses have to be
not equipped.

See Also:
Type 6E Subrack: equipping
Type 7 Subrack
STM-16 Unit:
In the type 7 subrack only two STM-16 Unit can be equipped therefore only 1+1 MSP is available.
The first STM-16 Unit, starting from the left side of the subrack, is protected using the second STM-
16 Unit
The options available for the Type 7 port subrack are:
n one group of 1+1 Protection.

NOTICE Consider the following restriction:


- If the MSP 1+1 architecture is required the protection unit accesses
(MAC, MAD, MAG and MAH Accesses for DXC 4/1, MAB, MAD, MAF and
MAH Accesses for DXC 4/4) must not be equipped.
- The protection channel must have the same frame configuration as the
protected one and must not be cross-connected.

Type 7E Subrack
STM-16 Unit:
In the 1+1 protection the STM-16 Units number 1 and 3 are protected respectively by the STM-16
Units number 2 and 4, while unit number 5 is not protected. In the N+1 protection the STM-16 Unit
number 5 is used to protect all the other STM-16 units.
Position
Protection Type
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
NO PROTECTION W W W W
MSP 1+1 W1 P1 W2 P2 W
MSP 1:N W1 W2 W3 W4 P

IMPORTANT According to the Matrix Accesses scheme, different protection architectures are
supported.

Note The STM-16 MUX 4/3 does not support MSP 1:N protection. If the card is configured
in Sonet mode is possible to do only MSP 1+1 unidirectional.
The STM-16 MUX 4/3 can be protected only by another STM-16 MUX 4/3.
See Also:
Type 7E Subrack: equipping

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 229 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 230 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

To define a MSP Protection:


* Select the tributary unit to be protected (one of the tributaries in positions 1 to 4).
Make sure that the port used for protection has been configured using the Port Management, VC-4
Configuration and Frame and Supervisory Unequipped Configuration options (with exception of
STM-1 Type Standard).
* Use Protection Mode to select the type of operation.
* Use Protection Type to select the type of protection needed.
According to the involved unit different items will be available:
STM-1 Unit:

1+1 Unidirectional
To enable the 1+1 unidirectional protection.
1+1 Bidirectional
To enable the 1+1 bidirectional protection.
N+1 Bidirectional
To enable the 1:N bidirectional protection (with N <= 4).
NxSTM-1 Unit:

NxSTM-1 MSP 1+1 Unidir


To enable the 1+1 unidirectional protection.
NxSTM-1 MSP 1+1 Bidir
To enable the 1+1 bidirectional protection.
NxSTM-1 MSP N+1Bidir
To enable the 1:N bidirectional protection.
STM-4 Unit:

STM-4 MSP 1+1 Unidir


To enable the 1+1 unidirectional protection.
STM-4 MSP 1+1 Bidir
To enable the 1+1 bidirectional protection.
STM-4 MSP 1:N Bidir
To enable the 1:N bidirectional protection (with N <= 4).
STM-16 Unit:

STM-16 MSP 1+1 Unidir


To enable the 1+1 unidirectional protection.
STM-16 MSP 1+1 Bidir
To enable the 1+1 bidirectional protection.
STM-16 MSP 1+1 Unidir (FE Sign)
To enable the 1+1 unidirectional protection with proprietary Far-End status Signalling (for DXC 4/4
512x512 only).
This functionality allows to send a "switching signal" (on K2 byte) when a SF/SD condition is
detected, at the same time, on both worker and protection line.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 231 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

IMPORTANT STM-16 interfaces unidirectional MSP 1+1 with proprietary Far-End status
signalling can be realised only if the connected far-end equipment supports the
relevant protocol.

* In case of NxSTM-1 Unit, select in the PORT field the port to be protected.
* Use MSP Chan Prio. to define the priority (Low or High) for SF and SD switching criteria
for every protected channel.
* Assign the APS Channel number (this field will be displayed only if N+1 Bidirectional
"Protection Type" has been selected), relevant to the selected protected channel, to
define a hierarchy among peer MSP Channel Priority (1 is the highest priority).
This means that if conditions of the same level are detected at the same time on different
protected channels having the same MSP Chan Prio., the channel with the lowest APS
Channel number takes priority.
Note This parameter acts as "MSP channel identifier" therefore in a MSP group same APS
Channel are not allowed even if the involved channel have different MSP Channel
Priority (MSP Chan Prio.).
Note If a unit is a synchronization source and is MSP 1:N Protected, it issues a "DO NOT
USE FOR SYNC" as quality level (byte S1) to prevent timing loops.
* Use SNCP-MSP Priority exclusive button to define which protection switch will have
precedence in case of simultaneous activation of MSP and SNCP on Type 5 / 6 / 6E / 7 /
7E subracks.
If MSP is selected no SNCP switch will take place, otherwise, selecting SNCP both
protections will be activated.
Note This setting will be applied to all the MSP protected STM-N of the selected subrack.
* Press APPLY.
The system automatically assigns the tributary unit used as protection unit.
Repeat same procedure for all STM-N Tributary Units to be protected N+1.
In the SUBRACK <shelf num> PROTECTION SCHEME box are displayed the type of protection
selected and the tributary units used.
The PROTECTION Information box displays information on the operational state of the working
and protection units.
See Also:
Port: configuration, STM-N Port: configuring frame and supervisory unequipped
state, STM-N Port: configuring VC-4 operational parameter

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 232 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

Multiplexing Section Protection: displaying


Path (Action-Multiplexing Section Protection-Protection Scheme-Read)
This option is used to display information about an existing MSP Protection (Protection Mode,
Protection Type, etc.) used for the Electric/Mux Units (or Optic/Mux Units).

To display information about a MSP Protection:


* Select the tributary unit.
* In case of NxSTM-1 Unit, select the port in the PORT field.
In the SUBRACK <shelf num> PROTECTION SCHEME box are displayed all 1+1 and N+1
protections enabled in the subrack.
In the PROTECTION Information box are displayed information on the operational state of the
working and protection units.
See Also:
Multiplexing Section Protection: configuring, Operative States

Multiplexing Section Protection: removing


Path (Action-Multiplexing Section Protection-Protection Scheme-Delete)
This option is used to remove the protection assigned to a selected Electric/Mux Unit (or Optic/Mux
Unit).

To delete a MSP protection:


* Select the tributary unit whose protection must be removed.
* In case of NxSTM-1 Unit, select the port in the PORT field.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Multiplexing Section Protection: configuring, Operative States

Multiplexing Section Protection: modifying


Path (Action-Multiplexing Section Protection-Protection Scheme-Modify)
This option is used to modify the Protection Mode (Revertive/Not Revertive) of an existing 1+1 MSP
Protection.

NOTICE This option is available for Type 6, 6E, 7 and 7E subracks only.

To modify a MSP Protection:


* Select the tributary unit.
* In case of NxSTM-1 Unit, select the port in the PORT field.
* Use Protection Mode to select the type of operation.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Multiplexing Section Protection: configuring, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 233 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

Multiplexing Section Protection: switching


Path (Action-Multiplexing Section Protection-Protection Switch)
This option allows the Operator to switch a MSP protection from the worker unit to the protection
unit and vice-versa.

To switch a MSP protection:


* Select the tributary unit to be switched (Worker or Protection).
Operator can select either a working unit or protection unit for the 1+1 protection. For the N+1
protection Operator must select the worker unit only.
* In case of NxSTM-1 Unit, select in the PORT field the port to be protected.
* Use Command Switch to select the type of command to be executed.
* Press APPLY.
Use REFRESH button to perform an update of the protection state (Protection role, Stand-by
state, Protection status, Operational state).
See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 234 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

NxSTM-1 Unit Protection: configuring


Path (Action-NxSTM1 Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Create)
This option is used to protect the NxSTM-1 or 4x155-140Mbit/s Units. In the N+1 protection the
tributary in position 5 is used to protect all the other tributaries (1,3,6 and 8).

IMPORTANT The protection unit ports has to be "not configured".

To define a Unit Protection:


* Select the NxSTM-1 or 4x155-140Mbit/s Unit to be protected (one of the tributaries in
positions 1,3,6 or 8).
* Use Protection Mode to select the Revertive/Not Revertive mode of the protection.
* Press APPLY.
Repeat same procedure for all NxSTM-1 Unit to be protected N+1.
See Also:
Operative States, Type 6 Subrack: equipping

NxSTM-1 Unit Protection: displaying information


Path (Action-NxSTM1 Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Read)
This option is used to display information on the protection used for the NxSTM-1 or 4x155-
140Mbit/s Units.

To display information about a NxSTM-1 or 4x155-140Mbit/s Unit Protection:


* Select the tributary unit.
The system displays information on the unit involved in the protection.
See Also:
NxSTM-1 Unit Protection: configuring, Operative States

NxSTM-1 Unit Protection: removing


Path (Action-NxSTM1 Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Delete)
This option is used to remove the protection assigned to a selected NxSTM-1 or 4x155-140Mbit/s
Unit.

To delete a NxSTM-1 or 4x155-140Mbit/s Unit Protection:


* Select the NxSTM-1 or 4x155-140Mbit/s Unit whose protection has to be removed.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
NxSTM-1 Unit Protection: configuring, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 235 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

NxSTM-1 Unit Protection: switching


Path (Action- NxSTM1 Card Protection-Protection Switch)
This option allows the Operator to switch traffic from the worker unit to the protection unit and vice-
versa.

To switch a unit protection:


* Select the NxSTM-1 or 4x155-140Mbit/s Unit to be switched (Worker).
* Use Command Switch to select the type of command to be executed.
* Press APPLY.
Use REFRESH button to perform an update of the protection state (PROTECTION Information).
See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 236 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

63x2Mbit/s Unit Protection: configuring


Path (Action-63x2Mb Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Create)
This option is used to protect the 63x2Mbit/s Units. The protection scheme is N+1: the tributary in
position 6 is used to protect all the other tributaries (1,4,7 and 10).

IMPORTANT The protection unit ports have to be "not configured".

To define a Unit Protection:


* Select the 63x2Mbit/s Unit to be protected (one of the tributaries in positions 1, 4, 7 or
10).
* Use Protection Mode to select the Revertive/Not Revertive mode of the protection.
* Press APPLY.
Repeat same procedure for all 63x2Mbit/s Unit to be protected N+1.
See Also:
Operative States, Type 3 Subrack: equipping

63x2Mbit/s Unit Protection: displaying information


Path (Action-63x2Mb Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Read)
This option is used to display information on the protection used for the 63x2Mbit/s Units.

To display information about a 63x2Mbit/s Unit Protection:


* Select the tributary unit.
The system displays information on the unit involved in the protection.
See Also:
63x2Mbit/s Unit Protection: configuring, Operative States

63x2Mbit/s Unit Protection: removing


Path (Action-63x2Mb Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Delete)
This option is used to remove the protection assigned to a selected 63x2Mbit/s Unit.

To delete a 63x2Mbit/s Unit Protection:


* Select the 63x2Mbit/s Unit whose protection has to be removed.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
63x2Mbit/s Unit Protection: configuring, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 237 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

63x2Mbit/s Unit Protection: switching


Path (Action-63x2Mb Card Protection-Protection Switch)
This option allows the Operator to switch traffic from the worker unit to the protection unit and vice-
versa.

To switch a unit protection:


* Select the 63x2Mbit/s Unit to be switched (Worker).
* Use Command Switch to select the type of command to be executed.
* Press APPLY.
Use REFRESH button to perform an update of the protection state (PROTECTION Information).
See Also:
Operative States

4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: configuring


Path (Action-4x34-TMUX Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Create)
This option is used to protect the 4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Units. Two N+1 protection schemes can be
configured:
1. the tributary in position 6 can be used to protect all the tributaries in position 1, 4, 7 and 10;

NOTICE The same positions can be used for the 63x2Mbit/s Units.

2. the tributary in position 5 can be used to protect all the tributaries in position 2, 3, 8 and 9.

IMPORTANT The protection unit ports have to be "not configured".

To define a Unit Protection:


* Select the 4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit to be protected (one of the tributaries in positions 1, 4,
7 or 10.
* Use Protection Mode to select the Revertive/Not Revertive mode of the protection.
* Press APPLY.
Repeat same procedure for all 4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit to be protected N+1.
See Also:
Operative States, Type 3 Subrack: equipping

4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: displaying information


Path (Action-4x34-TMUX Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Read)
This option is used to display information on the protection used for the 4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Units.

To display information about a 4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection:


* Select the tributary unit.
The system displays information on the unit involved in the protection.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 238 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

See Also:
4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: configuring, Operative States

4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: removing


Path (Action-4x34-TMUX Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Delete)
This option is used to remove the protection assigned to a selected 4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit.

To delete a 4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection:


* Select the 4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit whose protection has to be removed.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: configuring, Operative States

4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: switching


Path (Action-4x34-TMUX Card Protection-Protection Switch)
This option allows the Operator to switch traffic from the worker unit to the protection unit and vice-
versa.

To switch a unit protection:


* Select the 4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit to be switched (Worker).
* Use Command Switch to select the type of command to be executed.
* Press APPLY.
Use REFRESH button to perform an update of the protection state (PROTECTION Information).
See Also:
Operative States

1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: configuring


Path (Action-45-TMUX Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Create)
This option is used to protect the 1x45Mbit/s Tributary Units. In the 1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Unit protection
(1+1) the tributaries in the even positions are used to protect the tributaries in the odd positions (the
tributary in position 2 protects the tributary in position 1, etc.).

To define a Unit Protection:


* Select the 1x45Mbit/s Tributary Unit to be protected (one of the tributaries in positions 1,
3, 5, 7).
* Press APPLY.
Repeat same procedure for all 1x45Mbit/s Tributary Unit to be protected (1+1).
See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 239 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: displaying information


Path (Action-45-TMUX Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Read)
This option is used to display information on the protection used for the 1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Units.

To display information about a 1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection:


* Select the tributary unit.
The system displays information on the tributary unit involved in the protection.
See Also:
1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: configuring, Operative States

1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: removing


Path (Action-45-TMUX Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Delete)
This option is used to remove the protection assigned to a selected 1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Unit.

To delete a 1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection:


* Select the 16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit whose protection must be removed.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: configuring, Operative States

1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Protection: switching


Path (Action-45-TMUX Card Protection-Protection Switch)
This option allows the Operator to switch traffic from the worker unit to the protection unit and vice-
versa.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 240 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

To switch a unit protection:


* Select the 1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Unit to be switched (Worker).
* Use Command Switch to select the type of command to be executed.
* Press APPLY.
Use REFRESH button to perform an update of the protection state (PROTECTION Information).
See Also:
Operative States

2Mbit/s Unit Protection: configuring


Path (Action-2Mb Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Create)
This option is used to protect the 16x2Mbit/s Tributary Units. In the N+1 protection the tributary in
position 9 is used to protect all the other tributaries (1 to 8).

To define a Unit Protection:


* Select the 16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit to be protected (one of the tributaries in positions 1
to 8).
* Use Protection Mode to select the Revertive mode of the protection.
* Press APPLY.
Repeat same procedure for all 16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit to be protected N+1.

IMPORTANT In case of N+1 protection group the higher unit slot number has the maximum
priority than other.

See Also:
Operative States

2Mbit/s Unit Protection: displaying information


Path (Action-2Mb Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Read)
This option is used to display information on the protection used for the 16x2Mbit/s Tributary Units.

To display information about a 16x2Mbit/s Unit Protection:


* Select the tributary unit.
The system displays information on the tributary unit involved in the protection.
See Also:
63x2Mbit/s Unit Protection: configuring, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 241 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

2Mbit/s Unit Protection: removing


Path (Action-2Mb Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Delete)
This option is used to remove the protection assigned to a selected 16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit.

To delete a 2Mbit/s Unit Protection:


* Select the 16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit whose protection must be removed.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
63x2Mbit/s Unit Protection: configuring, Operative States

2Mbit/s Unit Protection: switching


Path (Action-2Mb Card Protection-Protection Switch)
This option allows the Operator to switch traffic from the worker unit to the protection unit and vice-
versa.

To switch a unit protection:


* Select the 16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit to be switched (Worker).
* Use Command Switch to select the type of command to be executed.
* Press APPLY.
Use REFRESH button to perform an update of the protection state (PROTECTION Information).
See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 242 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

4x34Mb/s Videocodec Unit Protection: configuring


Path (Action-4x34Mb VC Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Create)
This option is used to protect the 4x34Mbit/s Videocodec Tributary Units. The type of protection is
the 1+1 protection of the tributary unit (P2 protects P1 and P6 protects P5).

To define a 4x34Mb Videocodec Unit Protection:


* Select the 4x34Mbit/s Tributary Unit to be protected.
* Use Protection Mode to select the Not Revertive mode of the protection.
Note Only Not Revertive mode is available.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Operative States

4x34Mb/s Videocodec Unit Protection: displaying information


Path (Action-4x34Mb VC Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Read)
This option is used to display the protections used for the 4x34Mbit/s Videocodec Tributary Units.

To display information about a 4x34Mb/s Videocodec Unit Protection:


* Select the tributary unit.
The system displays information on both tributaries involved in the unit protection.
See Also:
Operative States, 4x34Mb/s Videocodec Unit Protection: configuring

4x34Mb/s Videocodec Unit Protection: removing


Path (Action-4x34Mb VC Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Delete)
This option is used to remove the protection assigned to a selected 34Mbit/s Tributary Unit.

To delete a 4x34Mb/s Card Protection:


* Select the 4x34Mbit/s Videocodec Tributary Unit of which protection must be removed.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Operative States, 4x34Mb/s Videocodec Unit Protection: configuring

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 243 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

4x34Mb/s Videocodec Unit Protection: switching


Path (Action-4x34Mb VC Card Protection-Protection Switch)
This option allows the Operator to switch traffic from the worker to the protection unit and vice-versa.

To switch a 4x34Mb unit protection:


* Select the 4x34Mbit/s Videocodec Tributary Unit to be switched (Worker).
* Use Command Switch to select the type of command to be executed.
* Press APPLY.
Use REFRESH button to perform an update of the protection state (PROTECTION Information).
See Also:
Operative States

3x34-45Mbit/s Unit Protection: configuring


Path (Action-3x34/45Mb Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Create)
This option is used to protect the 3x34 or 3x45Mbit/s Tributary Units.

NOTICE If protection card is providing service, performance data collection is stopped


and all counters are no more updated.

Type 2 Subrack
The type of protection is the 1+1 protection of the tributary unit (P2 protects P1 and P6 protects P5).

IMPORTANT The unit protection wont be applicable if the line protection is already set.

Type 3 Subrack
The type of protection is the N+1: the tributary in position 6 is used to protect the tributaries in
position 1, 4, 7 and 10, the tributary in position 5 is used to protect the tributaries in position 2, 3, 8
and 9.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 244 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

To define a 3x34-45Mb Unit Protection:


* Select the 3x34 or 3x45Mbit/s Tributary Unit to be protected.
* Use Protection Mode to select the Not Revertive mode of the protection.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Operative States

3x34-45Mbit/s Unit Protection: displaying information


Path (Action-3x34/45Mb Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Read)
This option is used to display the protections used for the 3x34Mbit/s or 3x45Mbit/s Tributary Units.

To display information about a 3x34-45Mbit/s Unit Protection:


* Select the tributary unit.
The system displays information on both tributary involved in the unit protection.
See Also:
3x34-45Mbit/s Unit Protection: configuring, Operative States

3x34-45Mbit/s Unit Protection: removing


Path (Action-3x34_45Mb Card Protection-Protection Scheme-Delete)
This option is used to remove the protection assigned to a selected 34Mbit/s or 3x45Mbit/s Tributary
Unit.

To delete a 3x34-45Mbit/s Unit Protection:


* Select the 3x34-45Mbit/s Tributary Unit of which protection must be removed.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
3x34-45Mbit/s Unit Protection: configuring, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 245 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

3x34-45Mbit/s Unit Protection: switching


Path (Action-3x34_45Mb Card Protection-Protection Switch)
This option allows the Operator to switch traffic from the worker to the protection unit and vice-versa.

To switch a 3x34-45Mb unit protection:


* Select the 3x34Mbit/s Tributary Unit to be switched (Worker).
* Use Command Switch to select the type of command to be executed.
* Press APPLY.
Use REFRESH button to perform an update of the protection state (PROTECTION Information).
See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 246 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

3x34-45Mbit/s Line Protection: configuring


Path (Action-3x34_45Mb Line Protection-Protection Scheme-Create)
This option is used to protect the 3x34 or 3x45Mbit/s Tributary lines. The type of protection is the
1+1 protection of the tributary line managed by the tributary unit and the Port Control Unit.

IMPORTANT The line protection wont be applicable if the unit protection is already set.

IMPORTANT The configuration state of the 34-45Mb protection unit must be Equipped only.

To define a 3x34-45Mb Line Protection:


* Select the 3x34 or 3x45Mbit/s Tributary Unit to be protected.
* Select the channel to be protected or All to protected every single channel.
* Press APPLY.
Note Only Not Revertive Protection Mode is available.
See Also:
3x34-45Mbit/s Unit Protection: configuring, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 247 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

3x34-45Mbit/s Line Protection: displaying information


Path (Action-3x34_45Mb Line Protection-Protection Scheme-Read)
This option is used to display the protections used for the 3x34-45Mbit/s Tributary Units.

To display information about a 3x34-45Mbit/s Line Protection:


* Select the 3x34 or 3x45Mbit/s Tributary Unit.
* Select the channel (or All if every single channel is protected).
The system displays information on both tributaries involved in the unit protection.
See Also:
3x34-45Mbit/s Line Protection: configuring, Operative States

3x34-45Mbit/s Line Protection: removing


Path (Action-3x34_45Mb Line Protection-Protection Scheme-Delete)
This option is used to remove the protection assigned to a selected 34Mbit/s Tributary Unit.

To delete a 3x34-45Mbit/s Line Protection:


* Select the 3x34-45Mbit/s Tributary Unit of which protection must be removed.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
3x34-45Mbit/s Line Protection: configuring, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 248 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

3x34-45Mbit/s Line Protection: switching


Path (Action-3x34_45Mb Line Protection-Protection Switch)
This option allows the Operator to switch from the WORKER to the PROTECTION line and vice-
versa.

To switch a 3x34-45Mb line protection:


* Select the 3x34-45Mbit/s Tributary Unit of which lines have to be switched. (Worker).
* Select the channel to be switched or All for every single channel.
* Use Command Switch to select the type of command to be executed.
* Press APPLY.
Use REFRESH button to perform an update of the protection state.
See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 249 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

140Mbit/s Line Protection: configuring


Path (Action-140Mb Line Protection-Protection Scheme-Create)
This option is used to protect the 140Mbit/s Tributary Units (1+1 protection). Remind that in the 1+1
protection (Type 5 Subrack) the first four tributaries (1 to 4), starting from the left side of the subrack,
are protected using tributaries in positions 5 to 8 (1+1).

To define a 140Mb Line Protection:


* Select the 140Mbit/s Tributary Unit to be protected.
* Use Protection Mode to select the protection operation type.
* Press APPLY.
Only 1+1 140Mbit/s line protection type is available (140Mb PDH 1+1).
See Also:
Operative States

140Mbit/s Line Protection: displaying information


Path (Action-140Mb Line Protection-Protection Scheme-Read)
This option is used to display the 140Mbit/s Tributary Units protection information.

To display information about the 140Mbit/s Line Protection:


* Select the 140Mbit/s Tributary Unit.
The system displays information on both tributary involved in the unit protection.
See Also:
140Mbit/s Line Protection: configuring, Operative States

140Mbit/s Line Protection: removing


Path (Action-140Mb Line Protection-Protection Scheme-Delete)
This option is used to remove the protection assigned to a selected 140Mbit/s Tributary Unit.

To delete a 140Mbit/s Line Protection:


* Select the 140Mbit/s Tributary Unit whose protection must be removed.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
140Mbit/s Line Protection: configuring, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 250 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

140Mbit/s Line Protection: switching


Path (Action-140Mb Line Protection-Protection Switch)
This option allows the Operator to switch from the worker to the protection line and vice-versa.

To switch a 140 Mb unit protection:


* Select the 140Mbit/s Tributary Unit to be switched (Worker).
* Use Command Switch to select the type of command to be executed.
* Press APPLY.
Use REFRESH button to perform an update of the protection state (PROTECTION Information).
See Also:
Operative States

140Mb T-Mux Line Protection: configuring


Path (Action-TMUX140 Line Protection-Protection Scheme-Create)
This option is used to protect the 140Mbit/s T-Mux Tributary Units (1+1 protection). Remind that in
the 1+1 protection (Type 5 Subrack) the first four tributaries (1 to 4), starting from the left side of the
subrack, are protected using tributaries in positions 5 to 8 (1+1).

To define a 140 Mbit/s T-Mux Line Protection:


* Select the 140Mbit/s T-Mux Tributary Unit to be protected.
* Use Protection Mode to select the protection operation type (Not Revertive/ Revertive).
* Press APPLY
See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 251 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

140Mbit/s T-Mux Line Protection: displaying information


Path (Action-TMUX140 Line Protection-Protection Scheme-Read)
This option is used to display the 140Mbit/s T-Mux Tributary Units protection information.

To display information about the 140Mbit/s T-Mux Line Protection:


* Select the 140Mbit/s T-Mux Tributary Unit.
The system displays information on both tributary involved in the unit protection.
See Also:
140Mb T-Mux Line Protection: configuring, Operative States

140Mbit/s T-Mux Line Protection: removing


Path (Action-TMUX140 Line Protection-Protection Scheme-Delete)
This option is used to remove the protection assigned to a selected 140Mbit/s T-Mux Tributary Unit.

To delete a 140Mbit/s T-Mux Line Protection:


* Select the 140Mbit/s T-Mux Tributary Unit of which protection must be removed.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
140Mb T-Mux Line Protection: configuring, Operative States

140Mbit/s T-Mux Line Protection: switching


Path (Action-TMUX140 Line Protection-Protection Switch)
This option allows the Operator to switch from the worker line to the protection unit and vice-versa.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 252 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

To switch a 140Mbit/s T-Mux Line Protection:


* Select the 140Mbit/s T-Mux Tributary Unit to be switched (Worker).
* Use Command Switch to select the type of command to be executed.
* Press APPLY.
Use REFRESH button to perform an update of the protection state (PROTECTION Information).
See Also:
Operative States

DXC TYPE THREE PROTECTION: SELECTION


Path (Equipment Configuration-Protection-DXC TYPE III Protection)
DXC type III functionality protects a VC-4 channel containing LO-VCs cross-connected.
It is possible to protect all LO-VCs contained in a VC-4 of a STM-n TUG structured (VC-4 worker)
with the LO-VCs contained in the same position in another VC-4 of a STM-n TUG structured (VC-4
protection).
Basically this kind of trail protection provides VC-4 SNC-P and LO cross-connections. As a
consequence the LO channels belonging to the protected VC-4 are protected.
The protection is activated in case of HO switching criteria detection.
This option is used to select the VC-4 to protect.
In the following are listed the restrictions applied in the selection of the worker channel:
n the related unit must be equipped and the involved port configured;
n STM-n port must be connected to a matrix access;
n it must be not involved into a VC-4-nc;
n it must not be cross-connected at VC-4 level;
n all the channels must not be involved in path protection either as worker or as protection
resource; in particular the TO side also of cross connections (broadcast included) must not
be involved in path protection;
n no Unidirectional Dropped Connections are allowed;
n no SPLIT accesses are allowed;
n the related port can not be used as MSP protection resource (1+1 or 1:N).
The supported LO cross-connections are:
n monodirectional (only Rx or Tx Type supported);
n bidirectional (only RxTx Type supported);
n broadcast (only Rx side).
Special Handling of some cross connection types:
n broadcast cross connection are allowed but Rx side only will be protected;
n monitor cross connection can be involved in Rx DXC Type III Protection as broadcast
cross connection.
n in case of contiguous concatenation, an high order path protection (DXC Type III) can not be
set up on AU-nC channels;

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 253 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

n in case of contiguous concatenation with conversion to virtual, a DXC Type III protection can
be set up on channels cross-connected as AU-nV (virtual at matrix side) if the protection
channels are configured as Aus not concatenated.

To select the VC-4 channel to be protected (and to activate Action menu):


* Select the port subrack.
* Select the tributary unit.
* Select the PORT containing the channel to connect (in case of NxSTM-1 Unit).
* Select the AUG.

DXC Type Three Protection: configuring


Path (Action-Create)
Use this option to define the partner resource on a DXC type III protection.
In the following are listed the restriction applied in the selection of the protection channel:
n the related unit must be equipped and the involved port configured;
n STM-n port must be connected to a matrix access;
n all LO channels must be not cross-connected;
n no Unidirectional Dropped Connections are allowed;
n no SPLIT access are allowed;
n the related port can not be used as Worker or Protection MSP resource (1+1 or 1:N).

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 254 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

To select the protection VC-4 channel:


* Select the port subrack.
* Select the tributary unit.
* Select the PORT (in case of NxSTM-1 or 4xSTM-1/140Mbit/s Unit).
* Select the AUG.
* Set the Hold Off time for SF and SD criteria.
* Use Protection Mode to enable (Revertive) or disable (Not Revertive) the restoration of
the traffic on the worker channel after repair of a failure that caused paths to be switched.
* Define the Protection Type to be created:
Rx Trail Protection
The system chooses from which resource (worker or protection) receives the channel: only the
receive side is protected (selection criteria).
Tx Trail Protection
The system sends the signal on both resources (worker and protection): only the transmit side is
protected (redounded).
RxTx Trail Protection
The system transmits the signal on both resources (worker and protection transmit side) and
selects from which resource (worker or protection receive side) receives the channel.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
Multiplexing Section Protection: configuring, Hold off: Management

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 255 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

DXC Type Three Protection: displaying information


Path (Action-Read)
This option is used to display information on the DXC Type Three Protection used for the selected
resource.

To display information about a DXC Type Three Protection:


* Select the unit.
The system displays information on the unit involved in the protection.
See Also:
DXC Type Three Protection: configuring, Operative States

DXC Type Three Protection: modifying


Path (Action-Modify)
This option is used to modify the protection mode of an existing DXC Type Three Protection.

To modify a DXC Type Three Protection:


* Select the port subrack.
* Select the tributary unit.
* Select the PORT (in case of NxSTM-1 or 4xSTM-1/140Mbit/s Unit).
* Select the AUG.
* Use Protection Mode to enable (Revertive) or disable (Not Revertive) the restoration of
the traffic on the worker channel after repair of a failure that caused paths to be switched.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
DXC Type Three Protection: configuring, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 256 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

DXC Type Three Protection: switching


Path (Action-Protection Switch)
This option allows the Operator to switch traffic from the worker unit to the protection unit and vice-
versa.

To switch a DXC Type Three Protection:


* Use Command Switch to select the type of command to be executed.
* Press APPLY.
Use REFRESH button to perform an update of the protection state (PROTECTION Information).
See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 257 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

DXC Type Three Protection: removing


Path (Action-Delete)
This option is used to remove the DXC Type Three Protection: assigned to a selected Unit.

To delete a DXC Type Three Protection Protection:


* Select the Unit whose DXC Type Three Protection has to be removed.
* Press APPLY.
See Also:
DXC Type Three Protection: configuring, Operative States

DXC Type Three Protection: swapping role


Path (Action-Prot Role Swap)
This option is used to swap the roles between the worker and the protection channel of a DXC Type
Three Protection.

To swap the DXC Type Three protection roles:


* Select the worker resource whose role must be swapped.
* Press APPLY.
Note After a role swap on DXC Type Three Protection status is not correctly displayed for a
short time.
See Also:
Operative States, DXC Type Three Protection: configuring, DXC Type Three
Protection: modifying, DXC Type Three Protection: removing, DXC Type Three
Protection: switching

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 258 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

PROTECTIONS LIST: FILTER


Path (Equipment Configuration-Protection- Protections List)
This option is used to display a list of the trail protections active in the equipment.
In particular this facility allows setting a filter on the report in order to disable the displaying of some
protection type.

To select the displaying parameter:


* Select the Protection Type to be displayed.

Protections List: reading


Path (Action-Read)
Use this option to display a list of the trail protections active in the equipment.
The report will be according to the selected filter.
See Also:
Protections List: filter

PORT SUBRACK PROTECTION: SETTING THE WTR PERIOD


Path (Protection-WTR Period- STM1 MSP WTR / STM4 MSP WTR / STM16 MSP WTR /
Line Protection WTR / Card Protection WTR)
These option are used to set the restoration time (WTR) for the Multiplexing Section Protection
STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 ports), Line Protection (140Mbit/s and 140 T-Mux ports - in the DXC 4/1)
and the Card Protection (NxSTM-1 and 4x140-155Mbit/s Units). Traffic is restored on the worker
line when no alarms are present for the WTR time.
WTR is enabled only when protection mode has been set to revertive.

To set the WTR:


* Indicate the WAIT TO RESTORE PERIOD in minutes (1 to 30 min).
* Press APPLY.
The WTR period applies to all MSP protections (1+1 and N+1) and Line Protection (1+1 for
140Mbit/s and 140 T-Mux - in the DXC 4/1).
See Also:
Multiplexing Section Protection: configuring, 140Mbit/s Line Protection: configuring,
140Mb T-Mux Line Protection: configuring, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 259 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

HOLD OFF: MANAGEMENT


Path (Equipment Configuration-Protection-Hold off Management)
The hold-off time is the time between declaration of signal degrade (SD) or signal fail (SF) and the
initialization of the protection switching algorithm and it is useful for interworking of protection
schemes. A hold off timer is started when a defect condition is declared and when the timer expires,
protection switching is initiated if a defect condition is still present at this point.
The operator can define the hold-off time between 100ms and 20s in 100ms steps.
The Matrix Controller expects the hold-off time before achieving the change. When an alarm arises
the hold-off timer is activated; after this time the Matrix Controller checks the channel in Worker and
if it has some alarms yet, the traffic will change on the another channel.
It is possible to apply the hold off timer to the SNC-P at all VC levels and to DXC type III protection.

Note The LO Hold Off Timer is managed only for DXC 4/1 256x256, DXC 4/1 512x512 (any
VC level) and DXC 4/4 512x512, DXC 4/4 1024x1024 (VC-3 level).

To set a Hold off Time:


* Indicate Signal Degrade Hold Off (SD) (0 to 20 seconds in steps of order of 100ms).
* Indicate Signal Failure Hold Off (SF) (0 to 20 seconds in steps of order of 100ms).
* Press APPLY.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 260 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

Note The default hold-off time shall be 0 seconds. The value 0 sec. means hold-off
disabled.

IMPORTANT The command applies the hold off time only to the protections that have the
worker channel on the selected port.

PORT LOOPBACKS: MANAGING


Path (Equipment Configuration-Loopback test)
Use this option to enable/disable testing loopbacks of Port Subracks.

To enable the Action menu:


* Select the port subrack.
* Select the tributary unit.
Note A Remote Loopback activation is feasible only if the selected port is not the
synchronization source.
See Also:
How To Select Objects, Operative States

Loopbacks: configuring the mapping state


Path (Action-2Mb Port Loopback-Mapping State-Setup)
This option performs a remote loop of all the 2Mbit/s ports (Mapping) for a selected 16x2Mbit/s
Tributary Unit.
The Mapping Loopback can not be performed if the 2Mbit/s ports are cross-connected.

To enable the mapping state:


* Use Mapping Loopback State to activate/deactivate the loop (Enable/Disable).
* Press APPLY.

Loopbacks: displaying the mapping state


Path (Action-2Mb Port Loopback-Mapping State -Read)
Use this option to display whether the Mapping loopback has been enabled in a selected
16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit. In the Mapping Loopback state box is indicated the state of the
Mapping loopback (Enable/Disable).
See Also:
Loopbacks: configuring the mapping state

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 261 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

2Mbit/s Port Loopback: configuring


Path (Action-2Mb Port Loopback-Port State-Setup)
This option is used to activate or deactivate a test loop of the 2Mbit/s tributary signal processed by
the 16x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit. Loop can be activated in anyone of the 16 ports.

To enable a 2 Mbit/s port loopback:


* Use Port Loopback State to activate/deactivate the loop in the selected port.
No Loopback
Loopback is deactivated.
Local Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the matrix side.
Remote Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the line side.
Port not configured
Port has not been configured (read-only value).
Note Only Not Transparent Forward Mode can be configured.
* Press APPLY.

2Mbit/s Port Loopback: displaying state


Path (Action-2Mb Port Loopback-Port State-Read)
This option is used to display the presence of port loopbacks enabled in the 16x2Mbit/s Tributary
Unit Port.
See Also:
2Mbit/s Port Loopback: configuring

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 262 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

63x2Mbit/s Unit Port Loopback: configuring


Path (Action-Type 3 Loopback-Setup)
This option is used to activate or deactivate a test loop of the 2Mbit/s tributary signal processed by
the 63x2Mbit/s Tributary Unit. Loop can be activated in anyone of the 63 ports.

To enable a 2 Mbit/s port loopback:


* Define the ports selection criteria by clicking on the exclusive buttons SINGLE or
MULTIPLE in the Selection Mode field. MULTIPLE selection allows to select (and
configure) more than one port at the same time, SINGLE allows to select only one port.
* Select the port in the PORT Sel. field (only configured ports will be displayed).
* Use Port Loopback State to activate/deactivate the loop in the selected port.
No Loopback
Loopback is deactivated.
Local Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the matrix side.
Remote Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the line side.
* Use the Forward Mode to select the type of signal forwarded to the other side when port
is looped:
Transparent
Data signal sent to the other side.
Not Transparent
AIS sent to the other side.
* Press APPLY.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 263 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

63x2Mbit/s Unit Port Loopback: displaying state


Path (Action-Type 3 Loopback-Read)
This option is used to display the presence of port loopbacks enabled in the 63x2Mbit/s Tributary
Unit Port.
See Also:
63x2Mbit/s Unit Port Loopback: configuring

4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Port Loopback: configuring


Path (Action-Type 3 Loopback-Setup)
This option is used to activate or deactivate a test loop of the 34Mbit/s tributary signals processed by
the 4x34Mbit/s Tributary Unit. Loop can be activated in anyone of the 4 ports.

To enable a 34 Mbit/s port loopback:


* Define the ports selection criteria by clicking on the exclusive buttons SINGLE or
MULTIPLE in the Selection Mode field. MULTIPLE selection allows to select (and
configure) more than one port at the same time, SINGLE allows to select only one port.
* Select the port in the PORT Sel. field (only configured ports will be displayed).
* Use Port Loopback State to activate/deactivate the loop in the selected port.
No Loopback
Loopback is deactivated.
Local Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the matrix side.
Remote Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the line side.
* Use the Forward Mode to select the type of signal forwarded to the other side when port
is looped:
Transparent
Data signal sent to the other side.
Not Transparent
AIS sent to the other side.

NOTICE Not Transparent Local Loopback is not available. Transparent Local Loopback
needs a valid and not alarmed input signal on PDH ports to properly work (a
warning message will appear to inform the Operator) .

* Press APPLY.
See Also:
63x2Mbit/s Unit Port Loopback: configuring

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 264 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Port Loopback: displaying state


Path (Action-Type 3 Loopback-Read)
This option is used to display the presence of port loopbacks enabled in the 4x34Mbit/s Tributary
Unit Port.
See Also:
4x34Mbit/s T-Mux Unit Port Loopback: configuring

NxSTM-1 Port Loopback: configuring


Path (Action-NxSTM1 Loopback-Setup)
This option is used to activate or deactivate a test loop of the STM-N signal processed by the
NxSTM-1 Unit.
Note A Remote Loopback activation is feasible only if the selected port is not the
synchronization source and if no DCC is enable on it.

To enable a STM-1 port loopback:


* Use the Port Loopback State to activate/deactivate the loop in the selected port.
No Loopback
Loopback is deactivated.
Local Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the matrix side.
Remote Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the line side.
* Use the Forward Mode to select the type of signal forwarded to the other side when port
is looped:
Transparent
Data signal sent to the other side.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 265 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

Not Transparent
AIS sent to the other side.
* Press APPLY.

NxSTM-1 Port Loopback: displaying state


Path (Action-NxSTM1 Loopback-Read)
This option is used to display the presence of port loopbacks enabled in the NxSTM1 Tributary
Units.
See Also:
NxSTM-1 Port Loopback: configuring

STM-N Port Loopback: configuring


Path (Action-STM-1 Loopback-Setup)
This option is used to activate or deactivate a test loop of the STM-N signal processed by the
Optic/Mux Unit (or also Electric/Mux Unit in case of STM-1 signal).
Note A Remote Loopback activation is feasible only if the selected port is not the
synchronization source and if no DCC is enable on it.
Standard Type STM-1 Port

To enable a STM-1 port loopback:


* Use the Port Loopback State to activate/deactivate the loop in the selected port.
No Loopback
Loopback is deactivated.
Local Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the matrix side.
Remote Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the line side.
* Press APPLY.
Type 2 STM-1 Port

To enable a STM-1 Type 2 port loopback:


* Use the Port Loopback State to activate/deactivate the loop in the selected port.
No Loopback
Loopback is deactivated.
Local Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the matrix side.
Remote Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the line side.
* Use the Forward Mode to select the type of signal forwarded to the other side when port
is looped:
Transparent
Data signal sent to the other side.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 266 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

Not Transparent
AIS sent to the other side.
* Press APPLY.
STM-4 and STM-16 Port

To enable a STM-N port loopback:


* Use the Port Loopback State to activate/deactivate the loop in the selected port.
No Loopback
Loopback is deactivated.
Local Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the matrix side.
Remote Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the line side.
* Use the Forward Mode to select the type of signal forwarded to the other side when port
is looped:
Transparent
Data signal sent to the other side.
Not Transparent
AIS sent to the other side.
* Press APPLY.

STM-N Port Loopback: displaying state


Path (Action-STM-1 Loopback-Read)
This option is used to display the presence of port loopbacks enabled in the STM-N Units.
See Also:
STM-N Port Loopback: configuring

140Mbit/s Port Loopback: configuring


Path (Action-140Mb/140TMUX Port Loopback-Setup)
Use this option to activate or deactivate a test loop of the 140Mbit/s tributary signal processed by the
140Mbit/s Tributary Unit.

To enable a 140Mbit/s port loopback:


* Use the Port Loopback State to activate/deactivate the loop in the selected port.
No Loopback
Loopback is deactivated.
Local Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the matrix side.
Remote Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the line side.
* Use the Forward Mode to select the type of signal forwarded to the other side when port
is looped:

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 267 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

Transparent
Data signal sent to the other side.
Not Transparent
AIS sent to the other side.
* Press APPLY.

140Mbit/s Port Loopback: displaying state


Path (Action-140Mb/140TMUX Port Loopback-Read)
This option is used to display the presence of test port loopbacks enabled in the 140Mbit/s Tributary
Units.
See Also:
140Mbit/s Port Loopback: configuring

140Mbit/s T-Mux Port Loopback: configuring


Path (Action-140Mb/140TMUX Port Loopback-Setup)
Use this option to activate or deactivate a loop of the 140Mbit/s tributary signal processed by the
140Mbit/s T-Mux Tributary Unit.

To enable a 140Mbit/s port loopback:


* Use the Port Loopback State to activate/deactivate the loop in the selected port.
No Loopback
Loopback is deactivated.
Local Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the matrix side.
Remote Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the line side.
* Press APPLY.

140Mbit/s T-Mux Port Loopback: displaying state


Path (Action-140Mb/140TMUX Port Loopback-Read)
This option is used to display the presence of test port loopbacks enabled in the 140Mbit/s T-Mux
Tributary Units.
See Also:
140Mbit/s T-Mux Port Loopback: configuring

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 268 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Port Loopback: configuring


Path (Action-45-TMUX Loopback-DS3 state-Setup)
This option is used to activate or deactivate a test loop of the DS3 channel processed by the
1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Tributary Unit.

To enable a 45Mbit/s port loopback (DS3 channel):


* Use DS3 Loopback State to activate/deactivate the loop in the port.
Local loopback
Signal loopback activated on the matrix side.
Remote Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the line side
No loopback
Loopback is deactivated.
* Use the Forward Mode to select the type of signal forwarded to the other side when port
is looped:
Transparent
Data signal sent to the other side.
Not Transparent
AIS sent to the other side.
* Press APPLY.

1x45 Mbit/s T-Mux Port Loopback: displaying state


Path (Action-45-TMUX Loopback-DS3 state-Read)
This option is used to display the presence of test port loopbacks enabled in the 1x45Mbit/s T-Mux
Tributary Units
See Also:
1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Port Loopback: configuring

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 269 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Port Loopback: channel configuration


Path (Action-45-TMUX Loopback-Channel state-Setup)
This option is used to activate or deactivate a test loop of the DS1/E1 channels managed by the
1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Tributary Unit.

In this window are listed the twenty-eight channels that can be managed by the 1x45Mbit/s T-Mux
Tributary Unit. This number as to be intended as a maximum value and it can be reached only if the
all DS2 channels have been structured as DS1 (1,5 Mbit/s as defined by ANSI T1.107).
Each group of four channel (starting from the first position in the window) is a DS2 channel
(remember that a DS2 channel can be demultiplied on four DS1 or on three E1).
In case some DS2 channels have been configured to carry E1 channels (2Mbit/s as defined by ITU-
T G747) some field in the window, that represent a possible channel, will be not available.

To enable a DS1/E1 loopback (1,5/2Mbit/s channel):


* Use DS1/E1 Loopback State to activate/deactivate the loop in the port.
Local loopback
Signal loopback activated on the matrix side.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 270 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

Remote Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the line side
No loopback
Loopback is deactivated.
* Use the Forward Mode to select the type of signal forwarded to the other side when port
is looped:
Transparent
Data signal sent to the other side.
Not Transparent
AIS sent to the other side.
* Press APPLY.

1x45 Mbit/s T-Mux Port Loopback: displaying channel state


Path (Action-45-TMUX Loopback-Channel state-Read)
This option is used to display the presence of test loopbacks enabled in the DS1/E1 channels
managed by the 1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Tributary Units
See Also:
1x45Mbit/s T-Mux Port Loopback: channel configuration

34/45 Mbit/s Port Loopback: configuring


Type 2 Subrack
Path (Action-3x34/45Mb Port Loopback-Setup)
This option is used to activate or deactivate a test loop of the 34-45Mbit/s Tributary signal processed
by the 34-45Mbit/s Tributary Unit.

To enable a 34-45 Mbit/s port loopback:


* Use Port Loopback State to activate/deactivate the loop in the three available ports.
Local loopback
Signal loopback activated on the matrix side.
Remote Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the line side
No loopback
Loopback is deactivated.
* Use the Forward Mode to select the type of signal forwarded to the other side when port
is looped:
Transparent
Data signal sent to the other side.
Not Transparent
AIS sent to the other side.
* Press APPLY.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 271 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

Type 3 Subrack
Path (Action-Type 3 Loopback-Setup)
This option is used to activate or deactivate a test loop of the 34-45Mbit/s Tributary signal processed
by the 3x34-45Mbit/s Tributary Unit.

To enable a 34-45 Mbit/s port loopback:


* Define the ports selection criteria by clicking on the exclusive buttons SINGLE or
MULTIPLE in the Selection Mode field. MULTIPLE selection allows to select (and
configure) more than one port at the same time, SINGLE allows to select only one port.
* Select the port in the PORT Sel. field (only configured ports will be displayed).
* Use Port Loopback State to activate/deactivate the loop in the selected port.
No Loopback
Loopback is deactivated.
Local Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the matrix side.
Remote Loopback
Signal loopback activated on the line side.
* Use the Forward Mode to select the type of signal forwarded to the other side when port
is looped:
Transparent
Data signal sent to the other side.
Not Transparent
AIS sent to the other side.
* Press APPLY.

34/45 Mbit/s Port Loopback: displaying state


Type 2 Subrack
Path (Action-3x34/45Mb Port Loopback-Setup)
Type 3 Subrack
Path (Action- Type 3 Loopback -Read)
This option is used to display the presence of test port loopbacks enabled in the 3x34/45Mbit/s
Tributary Units
See Also:
34/45 Mbit/s Port Loopback: configuring

Loopback: displaying
Path (Equipment Configuration-Test-Loopback List)
This option is used to display the list of all the loopbacks active in the equipment.
Furthermore for each loopback its configuration is reported (Loopback_State and Forward Mode)
See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 272 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

TEST STATE: MANAGEMENT


Path (Equipment Configuration-Test-NE Test State)
This option allows to masks the alarm due to a test session open on the matrix.
If the Matrix Global Test or/and Subrack Link Test have to be performed the Operator has to:
* Perform a forced switch on the matrix not involved in the test;
* Enable the Test State on the matrix where the test has to be launched;
* Activate the test.
This is the correct sequence of actions to start a test session on the matrix. Once a test session has
been completed the Operator has to:
* Disable the Test State;
* Perform a clear switch on the matrix.

To enable/disable the Test State:


* Select the matrix on which a test session has to be opened/closed.
* Define the test state (Enable/Disable) using the Test State scroll list.
* Press APPLY.
When the test state is enable, a proper indication will be displayed in the local controller main
window.
See Also:
Operative States, General Information

WIRING TEST: EXECUTION


Path (Equipment Configuration-Test-Wiring Tests)
Use this option to perform a test of the correct wiring of the timing, control and data signals relevant
to Control and Timing Subrack, Matrix Subrack, Port Subrack.

To enable the Action menu:


Select the subrack to be tested.
See Also:
How To Select Objects, Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 273 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

Wiring Test: displaying information


Path (Action-Read)
Control and Timing Subrack
Use this option to check the correct connection (wiring) of the control signal connecting Serial
Expansion Unit to Timing Selector Oscillator Unit (refer to Documentation supplied with the
equipment for more details).

The message Passed indicates that the connection is correctly made, the message Failed
indicates a problem.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 274 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

Port Subrack
Use this option to check the wiring of the data signals connecting port subrack to matrix subrack,
and to check the wiring of the control and timing signals connecting port subrack to the CT Subrack
(refer to Documentation supplied with the equipment for more details).

PORT MATRIX ACCESS Test box displays the state of data connections from port subrack to
matrix subracks.
In the box are listed the accesses (Tx and Rx Side) connecting port subrack to matrix A and matrix
B. For each access the message Passed indicates the correct wiring, the message Failed indicates
that the relevant data cable is not connected or is plugged into a wrong connector.
SERIAL I/O LINE test box displays information about the control cables connecting the port subrack
to CT Subrack. Message Passed indicates the correct wiring, the message Failed indicates that the
relevant cable is not properly working.
In the SYNCHRONIZATION LINE Test box are displayed the information about the timing cables
connecting port subrack to CT Subrack.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 275 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

Matrix Subrack
Having selected the Matrix Subrack, the correct connection (wiring) of control and timing cables
connecting Matrix Subrack to CT Subrack is shown (refer to Installation for more details).

DXC 4/1 DXC 4/4

Serial I/O Line Test box contains information about the serial line connecting matrix A and matrix B
to the CT subrack.
Sync. Line Test box contains information about the timing signals connecting matrix A and matrix B
to the CT Subrack. Performing the test on the DXC 4/4 Matrix also the information about the timing
signals connecting matrix A Slave and matrix B Slave to the CT Subrack are reported.

MATRIX SUBRACK TEST: ACTIVATING (DXC 4/1)


Path (Equipment Configuration-Test-Matrix Global Test)
This option is used to test the internal STM-1 links between Ist to IInd and IInd to IIIrd stage units using
a test pattern.

To start the Matrix Global test:

IMPORTANT This test will be activated into a matrix only if it is in test state and the traffic is
forced switched into the other one matrix.

* Select the Matrix Subrack to be tested.


* Select Action-Start Test
See Also:
Operative States

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 276 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

Matrix Subrack Test: displaying information (DXC 4/1)


Path (Action-Read)
For each card the system display one of the following messages depending by the test result:

Passed
Test successfully passed.
Failed
Test not passed, card failed.
Card Missing
Card equipped but not inserted.
Unequipped Card
Card unequipped.

PORT/MATRIX SUBRACK LINK TEST: ACTIVATION (DXC 4/1)


Path (Equipment Configuration-Test-Subrack Link Test)
This option is used to verify the interconnection among the port subracks and the matrix subracks
using a test pattern.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 277 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

To start the subrack link test:

IMPORTANT This test will be activated into a matrix only if it is in test state and the traffic is
forced switched into the other one matrix.

* Select a port subrack.


* Use MATRIX exclusive buttons (either A or B) to select the matrix subrack.
* Use SIDE exclusive buttons to select the direction to be verified:
FROM
From the selected port subrack to the selected matrix subrack.
TO
From the selected matrix subrack to the selected port subrack.
* Select Action-Start Test from the menu bar.

Port/Matrix Subrack Link Test: displaying information (DXC 4/1)


Path (Action-Read)

For each subrack access the system display one of the following messages depending by the test
result:
Connected-Passed
Access connected to a matrix access - Test passed.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 278 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

Connected-Failed
Access connected to a matrix access - Test not passed, cards/cable failed.
Not Connected
Port subrack access not configured.

DATABASE TEST: ACTIVATION


Path (Equipment Configuration-Test-X Conn. Global Test)
This option is used to verify the cross-connection database. All the wrong cross-connections (not
congruent with the database structure) will be notified.

To start cross-connection global test:


* Press OK.
An Event Message is displayed in the Real Time Monitor Window. A different message is displayed
depending on the type of problem that has been detected.
A message No errors detected, test completed indicates that the test has been successfully
completed. If a different message is present proceed as follows:
a. Delete the involved cross-connection/s.
See Also:
Cross-Connection: managing list filters (DXC 4/1), CCU Fault History Buffer:
displaying

CCU FAULT HISTORY BUFFER: DISPLAYING


Path (Equipment Configuration-Test- CCU Fault History Buffer)
This option allows to create a log file of the possible errors that have caused a CCU restart (not due
to management operation that means not requested by the operator). The last part of the code
executed by the CCU preceding a CCU restart is saved in the backup memory of the Memory
Expansion Unit; using this option the content of this memory can be saved in a file (binary
proprietary format) and subsequently sent to the supplier to analysed the problem.
Note The content of this memory is overridden each time a restart occurs then it is useful
perform this operation after each restart.

COPYRIGHT - Refer To Title Page Marconi


.
339-1063/14 Navigation Page 279 Book Contents
Issue:1
MSH8X - OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
PROTECTION AND TEST

To select the directory where the file has to be saved:


* Select the directory in the DIR. : field and then the file.
* Press OK
Select FILTER to change the types of files displayed according to the selected filter.
Note The default directory is the Application Software installation directory.

CCU STATE: CONFIGURING


Path (Equipment Configuration-Online State)
The NE Online State represents the status of the Central Control Unit (CCU) regarding its control
capabilities on the other peripheral units in the equipment.
In ONLINE state the CCU unit communicates with the Local Controller and also with all the units; in
OFFLINE state the CCU unit communicates only with the Local Controller and has no control on
peripheral units.
The UPGRADING state is used when the equipment software release has to be upgraded.
The Central Control Unit must be Off-Line in order to perform a decommissioning of the
equipment.

To modify the operational state of the Central Control Unit:


* Use Online State to select the operational state of the CCU
(ONLINE/OFFLINE/UPGRADING).
* Press APPLY.